US20010024095A1 - Movable barrier operator - Google Patents

Movable barrier operator Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20010024095A1
US20010024095A1 US09/785,619 US78561901A US2001024095A1 US 20010024095 A1 US20010024095 A1 US 20010024095A1 US 78561901 A US78561901 A US 78561901A US 2001024095 A1 US2001024095 A1 US 2001024095A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
motor
equ
force
door
speed
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
US09/785,619
Other versions
US6417637B2 (en
Inventor
James Fitzgibbon
Paul Wanis
Colin Willmott
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Chamberlain Group Inc
Original Assignee
Chamberlain Group Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=22582981&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=US20010024095(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Chamberlain Group Inc filed Critical Chamberlain Group Inc
Priority to US09/785,619 priority Critical patent/US6417637B2/en
Publication of US20010024095A1 publication Critical patent/US20010024095A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US6417637B2 publication Critical patent/US6417637B2/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05DHINGES OR SUSPENSION DEVICES FOR DOORS, WINDOWS OR WINGS
    • E05D15/00Suspension arrangements for wings
    • E05D15/36Suspension arrangements for wings moving along slide-ways so arranged that one guide-member of the wing moves in a direction substantially perpendicular to the movement of another guide member
    • E05D15/38Suspension arrangements for wings moving along slide-ways so arranged that one guide-member of the wing moves in a direction substantially perpendicular to the movement of another guide member for upwardly-moving wings, e.g. up-and-over doors
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05FDEVICES FOR MOVING WINGS INTO OPEN OR CLOSED POSITION; CHECKS FOR WINGS; WING FITTINGS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, CONCERNED WITH THE FUNCTIONING OF THE WING
    • E05F15/00Power-operated mechanisms for wings
    • E05F15/60Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators
    • E05F15/603Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators using rotary electromotors
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05FDEVICES FOR MOVING WINGS INTO OPEN OR CLOSED POSITION; CHECKS FOR WINGS; WING FITTINGS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, CONCERNED WITH THE FUNCTIONING OF THE WING
    • E05F15/00Power-operated mechanisms for wings
    • E05F15/60Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators
    • E05F15/603Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators using rotary electromotors
    • E05F15/665Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators using rotary electromotors for vertically-sliding wings
    • E05F15/668Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators using rotary electromotors for vertically-sliding wings for overhead wings
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05FDEVICES FOR MOVING WINGS INTO OPEN OR CLOSED POSITION; CHECKS FOR WINGS; WING FITTINGS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, CONCERNED WITH THE FUNCTIONING OF THE WING
    • E05F15/00Power-operated mechanisms for wings
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05FDEVICES FOR MOVING WINGS INTO OPEN OR CLOSED POSITION; CHECKS FOR WINGS; WING FITTINGS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, CONCERNED WITH THE FUNCTIONING OF THE WING
    • E05F15/00Power-operated mechanisms for wings
    • E05F15/60Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators
    • E05F15/603Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators using rotary electromotors
    • E05F15/665Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators using rotary electromotors for vertically-sliding wings
    • E05F15/668Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators using rotary electromotors for vertically-sliding wings for overhead wings
    • E05F15/681Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators using rotary electromotors for vertically-sliding wings for overhead wings operated by flexible elongated pulling elements, e.g. belts
    • E05F15/684Power-operated mechanisms for wings using electrical actuators using rotary electromotors for vertically-sliding wings for overhead wings operated by flexible elongated pulling elements, e.g. belts by chains
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES E05D AND E05F, RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS, ELECTRIC CONTROL, POWER SUPPLY, POWER SIGNAL OR TRANSMISSION, USER INTERFACES, MOUNTING OR COUPLING, DETAILS, ACCESSORIES, AUXILIARY OPERATIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, APPLICATION THEREOF
    • E05Y2201/00Constructional elements; Accessories therefor
    • E05Y2201/60Suspension or transmission members; Accessories therefor
    • E05Y2201/622Suspension or transmission members elements
    • E05Y2201/71Toothed gearing
    • E05Y2201/726Ring gears; Internal gears
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES E05D AND E05F, RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS, ELECTRIC CONTROL, POWER SUPPLY, POWER SIGNAL OR TRANSMISSION, USER INTERFACES, MOUNTING OR COUPLING, DETAILS, ACCESSORIES, AUXILIARY OPERATIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, APPLICATION THEREOF
    • E05Y2400/00Electronic control; Electrical power; Power supply; Power or signal transmission; User interfaces
    • E05Y2400/10Electronic control
    • E05Y2400/45Control modes
    • E05Y2400/452Control modes for saving energy, e.g. sleep or wake-up
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES E05D AND E05F, RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS, ELECTRIC CONTROL, POWER SUPPLY, POWER SIGNAL OR TRANSMISSION, USER INTERFACES, MOUNTING OR COUPLING, DETAILS, ACCESSORIES, AUXILIARY OPERATIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, APPLICATION THEREOF
    • E05Y2400/00Electronic control; Electrical power; Power supply; Power or signal transmission; User interfaces
    • E05Y2400/10Electronic control
    • E05Y2400/45Control modes
    • E05Y2400/456Control modes for programming, e.g. learning or AI [artificial intelligence]
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES E05D AND E05F, RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS, ELECTRIC CONTROL, POWER SUPPLY, POWER SIGNAL OR TRANSMISSION, USER INTERFACES, MOUNTING OR COUPLING, DETAILS, ACCESSORIES, AUXILIARY OPERATIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, APPLICATION THEREOF
    • E05Y2400/00Electronic control; Electrical power; Power supply; Power or signal transmission; User interfaces
    • E05Y2400/80User interfaces
    • E05Y2400/81Feedback to user, e.g. tactile
    • E05Y2400/818Visual
    • E05Y2400/822Light emitters, e.g. light emitting diodes [LED]
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES E05D AND E05F, RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS, ELECTRIC CONTROL, POWER SUPPLY, POWER SIGNAL OR TRANSMISSION, USER INTERFACES, MOUNTING OR COUPLING, DETAILS, ACCESSORIES, AUXILIARY OPERATIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, APPLICATION THEREOF
    • E05Y2400/00Electronic control; Electrical power; Power supply; Power or signal transmission; User interfaces
    • E05Y2400/80User interfaces
    • E05Y2400/81Feedback to user, e.g. tactile
    • E05Y2400/83Travel information display
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES E05D AND E05F, RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS, ELECTRIC CONTROL, POWER SUPPLY, POWER SIGNAL OR TRANSMISSION, USER INTERFACES, MOUNTING OR COUPLING, DETAILS, ACCESSORIES, AUXILIARY OPERATIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, APPLICATION THEREOF
    • E05Y2800/00Details, accessories and auxiliary operations not otherwise provided for
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES E05D AND E05F, RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS, ELECTRIC CONTROL, POWER SUPPLY, POWER SIGNAL OR TRANSMISSION, USER INTERFACES, MOUNTING OR COUPLING, DETAILS, ACCESSORIES, AUXILIARY OPERATIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, APPLICATION THEREOF
    • E05Y2900/00Application of doors, windows, wings or fittings thereof
    • E05Y2900/10Application of doors, windows, wings or fittings thereof for buildings or parts thereof
    • E05Y2900/106Application of doors, windows, wings or fittings thereof for buildings or parts thereof for garages
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10STECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10S388/00Electricity: motor control systems
    • Y10S388/90Specific system operational feature
    • Y10S388/904Stored velocity profile
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10STECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10S388/00Electricity: motor control systems
    • Y10S388/907Specific control circuit element or device
    • Y10S388/909Monitoring means

Definitions

  • This invention relates generally to movable barrier operators for operating movable barriers or doors. More particularly, it relates to garage door operators having improved safety and energy efficiency features.
  • Some movable barrier operators include a flasher module which causes a small light to flash or blink whenever the barrier is commanded to move.
  • the flasher module provides some warning when the barrier is moving.
  • There is a need for an improved flasher unit which provides even greater warning to the user when the barrier is commanded to move.
  • the motor would be started at a slow speed, usually 20 percent of full operating speed, then after a fixed period of time, the motor speed would increase to full operating speed. Similarly, when the door reaches a fixed point above/below the close/open limit, the operator would decrease the motor speed to 20 percent of the maximum operating speed. While this two speed operation may eliminate some of the hard starts and stops, the speed changes can be noisy and do not occur smoothly, causing stress on the transmission. There is a need for a garage door operator which opens the door smoothly and quietly, with no aburptly apparent sign of speed change during operation.
  • Garage doors come in many types and sizes and thus different travel speeds are required for them. For example, a one-piece door will be movable through a shorter total travel distance and need to travel slower for safety reasons than a segmented door with a longer total travel distance.
  • many garage door operators include two sprockets for driving the transmission. At installation, the installer must determine what type of door is to be driven, then select the appropriate sprocket to attach to the transmission. This takes additional time and if the installer is the user, may require several attempts before matching the correct sprocket for the door. There is a need for a garage door operator which automatically configures travel speed depending on size and weight of the door.
  • the first “force” is usually preset or setable at two force levels: the UP force level setting used to determine the speed at which the door travels in the UP direction and the DOWN force level setting used to determine the speed at which the door travels in the DOWN direction.
  • the second “force” is the force level determined by the decrease in motor speed due to an external force applied to the door, i.e., from an obstacle or the floor. This external force level is also preset or setable and is any set-point type force against which the feedback force signal is compared. When the system determines the set point force has been met, an auto-reverse or stop is commanded.
  • the DOWN force setting is set so high that it is only a small incremental value less than the force setting which initiates an auto-reverse due to force, this causes the door to engage objects at a higher speed before reaching the auto-reverse force setting. While the obstacle detection system will cause the door to auto-reverse, the speed and force at which the door hits the obstacle may cause harm to the obstacle and/or the door.
  • a movable barrier operator having an electric motor for driving a garage door, a gate or other barrier is operated from a source of AC current.
  • the movable barrier operator includes circuitry for automatically detecting the incoming AC line voltage and frequency of the alternating current. By automatically detecting the incoming AC line voltage and determining the frequency, the operator can automatically configure itself to certain user preferences. This occurs without either the user or the installer having to adjust or program the operator.
  • the movable barrier operator includes a worklight for illuminating its immediate surroundings such as the interior of a garage.
  • the barrier operator senses the power line frequency (typically 50 Hz or 60 Hz) to automatically set an appropriate shut-off time for a worklight. Because the power line frequency in Europe is 50 Hz and in the U.S.
  • the worklight shut-off time is set to preferably 41 ⁇ 2 minutes; for European users, the worklight shut-off time is set to preferably 21 ⁇ 2 minutes.
  • the movable barrier operator of the present invention automatically detects if an optional flasher module is present. If the module is present, when the door is commanded to move, the operator causes the flasher module to operate. With the flasher module present, the operator also delays operation of the motor for a brief period, say ore or two seconds. This delay period with the flasher module blinking before door movement provides an added safety feature to users which warns them of impending door travel (e.g. if activated by an unseen transmitter).
  • the movable barrier operator of the present invention drives the barrier, which may be a door or a gate, at a variable speed.
  • the electric motor After motor start, the electric motor reaches a preferred initial speed of 20 percent of the full operating speed. The motor speed then increases slowly in a linearly continuous fashion from 20 percent to 100 percent of full operating speed. This provides a smooth, soft start without jarring the transmission or the door or gate.
  • the motor moves the barrier at maximum speed for the largest portion of its travel, after which the operator slowly decreases speed from 100 percent to 20 percent as the barrier approaches the limit of travel, providing a soft, smooth and quiet stop.
  • a slow, smooth start and stop provides a safer barrier movement operator for the user because there is less momentum to apply an impulse force in the event of an obstruction.
  • the operator includes two relays and a pair of field effect transistors (FETs) for controlling the motor.
  • the relays are used to control direction of travel.
  • the FET's with phase controlled, pulse width modulation, control start up and speed.
  • Speed is responsive to the duration of the pulses applied to the FETs. A longer pulse causes the FETs to be on longer causing the barrier speed to increase. Shorter pulses result in a slower speed. This provides a very fine ramp control and more gentle starts and stops.
  • the movable barrier operator provides for the automatic measurement and calculation of the total distance the door is to travel.
  • the total door travel distance is the distance between the UP and the DOWN limits (which depend on the type of door).
  • the automatic measurement of door travel distance is a measure of the length of the door. Since shorter doors must travel at slower speeds than normal doors (for safety reasons), this enables the operator to automatically adjust the motor speed so the speed of door travel is the same regardless of door size.
  • the total door travel distance in turn determines the maximum speed at which the operator will travel. By determining the total distance traveled, travel speeds can be automatically changed without having to modify the hardware.
  • the movable barrier operator provides full door or gate closure, i.e. a firm closure of the door to the floor so that the door is not movable in place after it stops.
  • the operator includes a digital control or processor, specifically a microcontroller which has an internal microprocessor, an internal RAM and an internal ROM and an external EEPROM.
  • the microcontroller executes instructions stored in its internal ROM and provides motor direction control signals to the relays and speed control signals to the FETs.
  • the operator is first operated in a learn mode to store a DOWN limit position for the door.
  • the DOWN limit position of the door is used as an approximation of the location of the floor (or as a minimum reversal point, below which no auto-reverse will occur).
  • the microcontroller causes the electric motor to drive the door past the DOWN limit a small distance, say for one or two inches. This causes the door to close solidly on the floor.
  • the operator embodying the present invention provides variable door or gate output speed, i.e., the user can vary the minimum speed at which the motor starts and stops the door. This enables the user to overcome differences in door installations, i.e. stickiness and resistance to movement and other varying functional-type forces.
  • the minimum barrier speeds in the UP and DOWN directions are determined by the user-configured force settings, which are adjusted using UP and DOWN force potentiometers.
  • the force potentiometers set the lengths of the pulses to the FETs, which translate to variable speeds. The user gains a greater force output and a higher minimum starting speed to overcome differences in door installations, i.e.
  • the user can configure the door to start at a speed greater than a default value, say 20 percent.
  • This greater start up and slow down speed is transferred to the linearly variable speed function in that instead of traveling at 20 percent speed, increasing to 100 percent speed, then decreasing to 20 percent speed, the door may, for instance, travel at 40 percent speed to 100 percent speed and back down to 40 percent speed.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a garage having mounted within it a garage door operator embodying the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a head unit of the garage door operator shown in FIG. 1;
  • FIG. 3 is an, exploded perspective view of a portion of a transmission unit of the garage door operator shown in FIG. 1;
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a controller and motor mounted within the head unit of the garage door operator shown in FIG. 1;
  • FIGS. 5 A- 5 D are a schematic diagram of the controller shown in block format in FIG. 4;
  • FIGS. 6 A- 6 B are a flow chart of an overall routine that executes in a microprocessor of the controller shown in FIGS. 5 A- 5 D;
  • FIGS. 7 A- 7 H are a flow chart of the main routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIG. 8 is a flow chart of a set variable light shut-off timer routine executed by the microprocessor
  • FIGS. 9 A- 9 C are a flow chart of a hardware timer interrupt routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIGS. 10 A- 10 C are a flow chart of a 1 millisecond timer routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIGS. 11 A- 11 C are a flow chart of a 125 millisecond timer routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIGS. 12 A- 12 B are a flow chart of a 4 millisecond timer routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIGS. 13 A- 13 B are a flow chart of an RPM interrupt routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIG. 14 is a flow chart of a motor state machine routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIG. 15 is a flow chart of a stop in midtravel routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIG. 16 is a flow chart of a DOWN position routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIGS. 17 A- 17 C are a flow chart of an UP direction routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIG. 18 is a flow chart of an auto-reverse routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIG. 19 is a flow chart of an UP position routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIGS. 20 A- 20 D are a flow chart of the DOWN direction routine executed in the microprocessor
  • FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of a pass point detector and motor of the operator shown in FIG. 2;
  • FIG. 22A is a plan view of the pass point detector shown in FIG. 21.
  • FIG. 22B is a partial plan view of the pass point detector shown in FIG. 21.
  • a movable barrier or garage door operator system is generally shown therein and referred to by numeral 8 .
  • the system 8 includes a movable barrier operator or garage door operator 10 having a head unit 12 mounted within a garage 14 . More specifically, the head unit 12 is mounted to a ceiling 15 of the garage 14 .
  • the operator 10 includes a transmission 18 extending from the head unit 12 with a releasable trolley 20 attached.
  • the releasable trolley 20 releasably connects an arm 22 extending to a single panel garage door 24 positioned for movement along a pair of door rails 26 and 28 .
  • the system 8 includes a hand-held RF transmitter unit 30 adapted to send signals to an antenna 32 (see FIG. 4) positioned on the head unit 12 and coupled to a receiver within the head unit 12 as will appear hereinafter.
  • a switch module 39 is mounted on the head unit 12 .
  • Switch module 39 includes switches for each of the commands available from a remote transmitter or from an optional wall-mounted switch (not shown). Switch module 39 enables an installer to conveniently request the various learn modes during installation of the head unit 12 .
  • the switch module 39 includes a learn switch, a light switch, a lock switch and a command switch, which are described below.
  • Switch module 39 may also include terminals for wiring a pedestrian door state sensor comprising a pair of contacts 13 and 15 for a pedestrian door 11 , as well as wiring for an optional wall switch (not shown).
  • the garage door 24 includes the pedestrian door 11 .
  • Contact 13 is mounted to door 24 for contact with contact 15 mounted to pedestrian door 11 .
  • Both contacts 13 and 15 are connected via a wire 17 to head unit 12 .
  • electrical contact is made between the contacts 13 and 15 closing a pedestrian door circuit in the receiver in head unit 12 and signalling that the pedestrian door state is closed. This circuit must be closed before the receiver will permit other portions of the operator to move the door 24 . If circuit is open, indicating that the pedestrian door state is open, the system will not permit door 24 to move.
  • the head unit 12 includes a housing comprising four sections: a bottom section 102 , a front section 106 , a back section 108 and a top section 110 , which are held together by screws 112 as shown in FIG. 2.
  • Cover 104 fits into front section 106 and provides a cover for a worklight.
  • External AC power is supplied to the operator 10 through a power cord 112 .
  • the AC power is applied to a step-down transformer 120 .
  • An electric motor 118 is selectively energized by rectified AC power and drives a sprocket 125 in sprocket assembly 124 .
  • the sprocket 125 drives chain 144 (see FIG. 3).
  • a printed circuit board 114 includes a controller 200 and other electronics for operating the head unit 12 .
  • a cable 116 provides input and output connections or, signal paths between the printed circuit board 114 and switch module 39 .
  • the transmission 18 includes a rail 142 which holds chain 144 within a rail and chain housing 140 and holds the chair in tension to transfer mechanical energy from the motor to the door.
  • Controller 200 includes an RF receiver 80 , a microprocessor 300 and an EEPROM 302 .
  • RF receiver 80 of controller 200 receives a command to move the door and actuate the motor either from remote transmitter 30 , which transmits an RF signal which is received by antenna 32 , or from a user command switch 250 .
  • User command switch 250 can be a switch on switch panel 39 , mounted on the head unit, or a switch from an optional wall switch.
  • the controller 200 Upon receipt of a door movement command signal from either antenna 32 or user switch 250 , the controller 200 sends a power enable signal via line 240 to AC hot connection 206 which provides AC line current to transformer 212 and power to work light 210 .
  • Rectified AC is provided from rectifier 214 via line 236 to relays 232 and 234 .
  • controller 200 provides a signal to either relay 232 or relay 234 .
  • Relays 232 and 234 are used to control the direction of rotation of motor 118 by controlling the direction of current flow through the windings.
  • One relay is used for clockwise rotation; the other is used for counterclockwise rotation.
  • controller 200 Upon receipt of the door movement command signal, controller 200 sends a signal via line 230 to power-control FET 252 .
  • Motor speed is determined by the duration or length of the pulses in the signal to a gate electrode of FET 252 . The shorter the pulses, the slower the speed. This completes the circuit between relay 232 and FET 252 providing power to motor 118 via line 254 . If the door had been commanded to move in the opposite direction, relay 234 would have been enabled, completing the circuit with FET 252 and providing power to motor 118 via line 238 .
  • Gear redaction housing 260 includes an internal pass point system which sends a pass point signal via line 220 to controller 220 whenever the pass point is reached.
  • the pass point signal is provided to controller 200 via current limiting resistor 226 to protect controller 200 from electrostatic discharge (ESD).
  • An RPM interrupt signal is provided via line 224 , via current limiting resistor 228 , to controller 200 .
  • Lead 222 provides a plus five volts supply for the Hall effect sensors in the RPM module. Commanded force is input by two force potentiometers 202 , 204 .
  • Force potentiometer 202 is used to set the commanded force for UP travel; force potentiometer 204 is used to set the commanded force for DOWN travel. Force potentiometers 202 and 204 provide commanded inputs to controller 200 which are used to adjust the length of the pulsed signal provided to FET 252 .
  • Pass point module 40 is attached to gear reduction housing 260 of motor 118 .
  • Pass point module 40 includes upper plate 42 which covers the three internal gears and switch within lower housing 50 .
  • Lower housing 50 includes recess 62 having two pins 61 which position switch assembly 52 in recess 62 .
  • Housing 50 also includes three cutouts which are sized to support and provide for rotation of the three geared elements.
  • Outer gear 44 fits rotatably within cutout 64 .
  • Outer gear includes a smooth outer surface for rotating within housing 50 and inner gear teeth for rotating middle gear 46 .
  • Middle gear 46 fits rotatably within inner cutout 66 .
  • Middle gear 46 includes a smooth outer surface and a raised portion with gear teeth for being driven by the gear teeth of outer ring gear 44 .
  • Inner gear 48 fits within middle gear 46 and is driven by an extension of shaft 216 . Rotation of the motor 118 causes shaft 216 to rotate and drive inner gear 48 .
  • Outer gear 44 includes a notch 74 in the outer periphery.
  • Middle gear includes a notch 76 in the outer periphery.
  • rotation of inner gear 48 rotates middle gear 46 in the same direction.
  • Rotation of middle gear 46 rotates outer gear 44 in the same direction.
  • Gears 46 and 44 are sized such that pass point indications comprising switch release cutouts 74 and 76 line up only once during the entire travel distance of the door.
  • switch release cutouts 74 and 76 line up
  • switch 72 is open generating a pass point presence signal.
  • the location where switch release cutouts 74 and 76 line up is the pass point.
  • at least one of the two gears holds switch 72 closed generating a signal indicating that the pass point has not been reached.
  • the receiver portion 80 of controller 200 is shown in FIG. 5A.
  • RF signals may be received by the controller 200 at the antenna 32 and fed to the receiver 80 .
  • the receiver 80 includes variable inductor L 1 and a pair of capacitors C 2 and C 3 that provide impedance matching between the antenna 32 and other portions of the receiver.
  • An NPN transistor Q 4 is connected in common-base configuration as a buffer amplifier. Bias to the buffer amplifier transistor Q 4 is provided by resistors R 2 , R 3 .
  • the buffered RF output signal is supplied to a second NPN transistor Q 5 .
  • the radio frequency signal is coupled to a bandpass amplifier 280 to an average detector 282 which feeds a comparator 284 .
  • the analog output signal A, B is applied to noise reduction capacitors C 19 , C 20 and C 21 then provided to pins P 32 and P 33 of the microcontroller 300 .
  • Microcontroller 300 may be a Z86733 microprocessor.
  • An external transformer 212 receives AC power from a source such as a utility and steps down the AC voltage to the power supply 90 circuit of controller 200 .
  • Transformer 212 provides AC current to full-wave bridge circuit 214 , which produces a 28 volt full wave rectified signal across capacitor C 35 .
  • the AC power may have a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
  • An external transformer is especially important when motor 118 is a DC motor.
  • the 28 volt rectified signal is used to drive a wall control switch, a obstacle detector circuit, a door-in-door switch and to power FETs Q 11 and Q 12 used to start the motor.
  • Zener diode D 18 protects against overvoltage due to the pulsed current, in particular, from the FETs rapidly switching off inductive load of the motor.
  • the potential of the full-wave rectified signal is further reduced to provide 5 volts at capacitor C 38 , which is used to power the microprocessor 300 , the receiver circuit 80 and other logic functions.
  • the 28 volt rectified power supply signal indicated by reference numeral T in FIG. 5C is voltage divided down by resistors R 61 and R 62 , then applied to an input pin P 24 of microprocessor 300 .
  • This signal is used to provide the phase of the power line current to microprocessor 300 .
  • Microprocessor 300 constantly checks for the phase of the line voltage in order to determine if the frequency of the line voltage is 50 Hz or 60 Hz. This information is used to establish the worklight time-out period and to select the look-up table stored in the ROM in the microcontroller for converting pulse width to door speed.
  • the microprocessor 300 commands the work light to turn on.
  • Microprocessor 300 sends a worklight enable signal from pin P 07 .
  • the worklight enable signal is applied to the base of transistor Q 3 , which drives relay K 3 .
  • AC power from a signal U provides power for operating the worklight 210 .
  • Microprocessor 300 reads from and writes data to an EEPROM 302 via its pins P 25 , P 26 and P 27 .
  • EEPROM 302 may be a 93C46.
  • Microprocessor 300 provides a light enable signal at pin P 21 which is used to enable a learn mode indicator yellow LED D 15 . LED D 15 is enabled or lit when the receiver is in the learn mode.
  • Pin P 26 provides double duty.
  • switch S 1 When the user selects switch S 1 , a learn enable signal is provided to both microprocessor 300 and EEPROM 302 .
  • Switch S 1 is mounted on the head unit 12 and is part of switch module 39 , which is used by the installer to operate the system.
  • An optional flasher module provides an additional level of safety for users and is controlled by microprocessor 300 at pin P 22 .
  • the optional flasher module is connected between terminals 308 and 310 .
  • the microprocessor 300 sends a signal from P 22 which causes the flasher light to blink for 2 seconds.
  • the door does not move during that 2 second period, giving the user notice that the door has been commanded to move and will start to move in 2 seconds.
  • the door moves and the flasher light module blinks during the entire period of door movement. If the operator does not have a flasher module installed in the head unit, when the door is commanded to move, there is no time delay before the door begins to move.
  • Microprocessor 300 provides the signals which start motor 116 , control its direction of rotation (and thus the direction of movement of the door) and the speed of rotation (speed of door travel). FETs Q 11 and Q 12 are used to start motor 118 . Microprocessor 300 applies a pulsed output signal to the gates of FETs Q 11 and Q 12 . The lengths of the pulses determine the time the FETs conduct and thus the amount of time current is applied to start and run the motor 118 . The longer the pulse, the longer current is applied, the greater the speed of rotation the motor 118 will develop. Diode D 11 is coupled between the 28 volt power supply and is used to clean up flyback voltage to the input bridge D 4 when the FETs are conducting. Similarly, Zener diode D 19 (see FIG. 5A) is used to protect against overvoltage when the FETs are conducting.
  • Control of the direction of rotation of motor 118 (and thus direction of travel of the door) is accomplished with two relays, K 1 and K 2 .
  • Relay K 1 supplies current to cause the motor to rotate clockwise in an opening direction (door moves UP);
  • relay K 2 supplies current to cause the motor to rotate counterclockwise in a closing direction (door moves DOWN).
  • the microprocessor 300 sends an enable signal from pin P 05 to the base of transistor Q 1 , which drives relay K 1 .
  • the microprocessor 300 sends an enable signal from pin P 06 to the base of transistor Q 2 , which drives relay K 2 .
  • Door-in-door contacts 13 and 15 are connected to terminals 304 and 306 .
  • Terminals 304 and 306 are connected to relays K 1 and K 2 . If the signal between contacts 13 and 15 is broken, the signal across terminals 304 and 306 is open, preventing relays K 1 and K 2 from energizing. The motor 118 will not rotate and the door 24 will not move until the user closes pedestrian door 11 , making contact between contacts 13 and 15 .
  • the pass point signal 220 from the pass point module 40 (see FIG. 21) of motor 118 is applied to pin P 23 of microprocessor 300 .
  • the RPM signal 224 from the RPM sensor module in motor 118 is applied to pin P 31 of microprocessor 300 . Application of the pass point signal and the RPM signal is described with reference to the flow charts.
  • An optional wall control which duplicates the switches on remote transmitter 30 , may be connected to controller 200 at terminals 312 and 314 .
  • a dead short is made to ground, which the microprocessor 300 detects by the failure to detect voltage.
  • Capacitor C 22 is provided for RF noise reduction. The dead short to ground is sensed at pins P 02 and P 03 , for redundancy.
  • Switches S 1 and S 2 are part of switch module 39 mounted on head unit 12 and used by the installer for operating the system. As stated above, S 1 is the learn switch. S 2 is the door command switch. When S 2 is pressed, microprocessor 300 detects the dead short at pins P 02 and P 03 .
  • Input from an obstacle detector is provided at terminal 316 .
  • This signal is voltage divided down and provided to microprocessor 300 at pins P 20 and P 30 , for redundancy. Except when the door is moving and less than an inch above the floor, when the obstacle detector senses an object in the doorway, the microprocessor executes the auto-reverse routine causing the door to stop and/or reverse depending on the state of the door movement.
  • Potentiometer R 33 adjusts the force and speed of UP travel; potentiometer R 34 adjusts the force and speed of DOWN travel. Potentiometers R 33 and R 34 act as analog voltage dividers. The analog signal from R 33 , R 34 is further divided down by voltage divider R 35 /R 37 , R 36 /R 38 before it is applied to the input of comparators 320 and 322 . Reference pulses from pins P 34 and P 35 of microprocessor 300 are compared with the force input from potentiometers R 33 and R 34 in comparators 320 and 322 . The output of comparators 320 and 322 is applied to pins P 01 and P 00 .
  • the microprocessor 300 samples the output of the comparators 320 and 322 at pins P 00 and P 01 to determine which voltage is higher: the voltage from the potentiometer R 33 or R 34 (IN) or the voltage from the reference pin P 34 or P 35 (REF). If the potentiometer voltage is higher than the reference, then the microprocessor outputs a pulse. If not, the output voltage is held low.
  • the RC filter (R 39 , C 29 /R 40 , C 30 ) converts the pulses into a DC voltage equivalent to the duty cycle of the pulses. By outputting the pulses in the manner described above, the microprocessor creates a voltage at REF which dithers around the voltage at IN. The microprocessor then calculates the duty cycle of the pulse output which directly correlates to the voltage seen at IN.
  • microprocessor 300 executes a series of routines. With power applied, microprocessor 300 executes the main routines shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B.
  • the main loop 400 includes three basic functions, which are looped continuously until power is removed.
  • the microprocessor 300 handles all non-radio EEPROM communications and disables radio access to the EEPROM 302 when communicating. This ensures that during normal operation, i.e., when the garage door operator is not being programmed, the remote transmitter does not have access to the EEPROM, where transmitter codes are stored. Radio transmissions are processed upon receipt of a radio interrupt (see below).
  • microprocessor 300 maintains all low priority tasks, such as calculating new force levels and minimum speed.
  • a set of redundant RAM registers is provided.
  • an unforeseen event e.g., an ESD event
  • the main RAM registers and the redundant RAM registers will not match.
  • the routine knows the regular RAM has been corrupted.
  • microprocessor 300 tests redundant RAM registers. Several interrupt routines can take priority over blocks 402 , 404 and 406 .
  • the infrared obstacle detector generates an asynchronous IR interrupt signal which is a series of pulses. The absence of the obstacle detector pulses indicates an obstruction in the beam. After processing the IR interrupt, microprocessor 300 sets the status of the obstacle detector as unobstructed at block 416 .
  • Receipt of a transmission from remote transmitter 30 generates an asynchronous radio interrupt at block 410 .
  • microprocessor 300 parses incoming radio signals and sets a flag if the signal matches a stored code. If in the learn mode, microprocessor 300 stores the new transmitter codes in the EEPROM.
  • An asynchronous interrupt is generated if a remote communications unit is connected to an optional RS- 232 communications port located on the head unit.
  • microprocessor 300 executes a serial data communications routine for transferring and storing data from the remote hardware.
  • Hardware timer 0 interrupt is shown in block 422 .
  • microprocessor 300 reads the incoming AC line signal from pin P 24 and handles the motor phase control output. The incoming line signal is used to determine if the line voltage is 50 Hz for the foreign market or 60 Hz for the domestic market. With each interrupt, microprocessor 300 , at block 426 , task switches among three tasks. In block 428 , microprocessor 300 updates software timers. In block 430 , microprocessor 300 debounces wall control switch signals. In block 432 , microprocessor 300 controls the motor state, including motor direction relay outputs and motor safety systems.
  • motor 118 When the motor 118 is running, it generates an asynchronous RPM interrupt at block 434 .
  • microprocessor 300 receives the asynchronous RPM interrupt at pin P 31 , it calculates the motor RPM period at block 436 , then updates the position of the door at block 438 .
  • main loop 400 Further details of main loop 400 are shown in FIGS. 7A through 7H.
  • the first step executed in main loop 400 is block 450 , where the microprocessor checks to see if the pass point has been passed since the last update. If it has, the routine branches to block 452 , where the microprocessor 300 updates the position of the door relative to the pass point in EEPROM 302 or non-volatile memory. The routine then continues at block 454 .
  • An optional safety feature of the garage door operator system enables the worklight, when the door is open and stopped and the infrared beam in the obstacle detector is broken.
  • the microprocessor checks if the enable/disable of the worklight for this feature has been changed. Some users want the added safety feature; others prefer to save the electricity used. If new input has been provided, the routine branches to block 456 and sets the status of the obstacle detector-controlled worklight in non-volatile memory in accordance with the new input. Then the routine continues to block 458 where the routine checks to determine if the worklight has been turned on without the timer. A separate switch is provided on both the remote transmitter 30 and the head unit at module 39 to enable the user to switch on the worklight without operating the door command switch. If no, the routine skips to block 470 .
  • the routine checks at block 460 to see if the one-shot flag has been set for an obstacle detector beam break. If no, the routine skips to block 470 . If yes, the routine checks if the obstacle detector controlled worklight is enabled at block 462 . If not, the routine skips to block 470 . If it is, the routine checks if the door is stopped in the fully open position at block 464 . If no, the routine skips to block 470 . If yes, the routine calls the SetVarLight subroutine (see FIG. 8) to enable the appropriate turn off time (4.5 minutes for 60 Hz systems or 2.5 minutes for 50 Hz systems). At block 468 , the routine turns on the worklight.
  • the routine checks at block 460 to see if the one-shot flag has been set for an obstacle detector beam break. If no, the routine skips to block 470 . If yes, the routine checks if the obstacle detector controlled worklight is enabled at block 462 . If not, the routine skips to block 470 . If it is, the routine checks
  • the microprocessor 300 clears the one-shot flag for the infrared beam break. This resets the obstacle detector, so that a later beam break can generate an interrupt.
  • the microprocessor 300 updates the non-volatile timer for the radio temporary password.
  • the microprocessor 300 refreshes the RAM registers for radio mode from non-volatile memory (EEPROM 302 ).
  • the microprocessor 300 refreshes I/O port directions, i.e., whether each of the ports is to be input or output.
  • the microprocessor 300 updates the status of the radio lockout flag, if necessary.
  • the radio lockout flag prevents the microprocessor from responding to a signal from a remote transmitter.
  • a radio interrupt (described below) will disable the radio lockout flag and enable the remote transmitter to communicate with the receiver.
  • the microprocessor 300 checks if the door is about to travel. If not, the routine skips to block 502 . If the door is about to travel, the microprocessor 300 checks if the limits are being trained at block 482 . If they are, the routine skips to block 502 . If not, the routine asks at block 484 if travel is UP or DOWN. If DOWN, the routine refreshes the DOWN limit from non-volatile memory (EEPROM 302 ) at block 486 . If UP, the routine refreshes the UP limit from non-volatile memory (EEPROM 302 ) at block 488 . The routine updates the current operating state and position relative to the pass point in non-volatile memory at block 490 . This is a redundant read for stability of the system.
  • the routine checks for completion of a limit training cycle. If training is complete, the routine branches to block 494 where the new limit settings and position relative to the pass point are written to non-volatile memory.
  • the routine then updates the counter for the number of operating cycles at block 496 . This information can be downloaded at a later time and used to determine when certain parts need to be replaced.
  • the routine checks if the number of cycles is a multiple of 256. Limiting the storage of this information to multiples of 256 limits the number of times the system has to write to that register. If yes it updates the history of force settings at block 500 . If not, the routine continues to block 502 .
  • the routine updates the learn switch debouncer.
  • the routine performs a continuity check by comparing the backup (redundant) RAM registers with the main registers. If they do not match, the routine branches to block 506 . If the registers do not match, the RAM memory has been corrupted and the system is not safe to operate, so a reset is commanded. At this point, the system powers up as if power had been removed and reapplied and the first step is a self test of the system (all installation settings are unchanged).
  • routine continues to block 508 where the routine services any incoming serial messages from the optional wall control (serial messages might be user input start or stop commands).
  • the routine then loads the UP force timing from the ROM look-up table, using the user setting as an index at block 510 .
  • Force potentiometers R 33 and R 34 are set by the user.
  • the analog values set by the user are converted to digital values.
  • the digital values are used as an index to the look-up table stored in memory.
  • the value indexed from the look-up table is then used as the minimum motor speed measurement.
  • the routine compares the selected value from the look-up table with the digital timing from the RPM routine to ensure the force is acceptable.
  • a look-up table is provided for each potentiometer.
  • the range of values based on the range of user inputs is stored in ROM and used to save microprocessor processing time.
  • the system includes two force limits: one for the UP force and one for the DOWN force. Two force limits provide a safer system. A heavy door may require more UP force to lift, but need a lower DOWN force setting (and therefore a slower closing speed) to provide a soft closure. A light door will need less UP force to open the door and possibly a greater DOWN force to provide a full closure.
  • the force timing is divided by power level of the motor for the door to scale the maximum force timeout at block 512 .
  • This step scales the force reversal point based on the maximum force for the door.
  • the maximum force for the door is determined based on the size of the door, i.e. the distance the door travels. Single piece doors travel a greater distance than segmented doors. Short doors require less force to move than normal doors. The maximum force for a short door is scaled down to 60 percent of the maximum force available for a normal door.
  • the force setting is set by the user, for example at 40 percent, and the door is a normal door (i.e., a segmented door or multi-paneled door), the force is scaled to 40 percent of 100 percent. If the door is a short door (i.e., a single panel door), the force is scaled to 40 percent of 60 percent, or 24 percent.
  • the routine loads the DOWN force timing from the ROM look-up table, using the user setting as an index.
  • the routine divides the force timing by the power level of the motor for the door to scale the force to the speed.
  • the routine checks if the door is traveling DOWN. If yes, the routine disables use of the MinSpeed Register at block 524 and loads the MinSpeed Register with the DOWN force setting, i.e., the value read from the DOWN force potentiometer at block 526 . If not, the routine disables use of the MinSpeed Register at block 520 and loads the MinSpeed Register with the UP force setting from the force potentiometer at block 522 .
  • the routine continues at block 528 where the routine subtracts 20 from the MinSpeed value.
  • the MinSpeed value ranges from 0 to 63. The system uses 64 levels of force. If the result is negative at block 530 , the routine clears the MinSpeed Register at block 532 to effectively truncate the lower 38 percent of the force settings. If no, the routine divides the minimum speed by 4 to scale 8 speeds to 32 force settings at block 534 . At block 536 , the routine adds 4 into the minimum speed to correct the offset, and clips the result to a maximum of 12. At block 538 the routine enables use of the MinSpeed Register.
  • the routine checks if the period of the rectified AC line signal (input to microprocessor 300 at pin P 24 ) is less than 9 milliseconds (indicating the line frequency is 60 Hz). If it is, the routine skips to block 548 . If not, the routine checks if the light shut-off timer is active at block 542 . If not, the routine skips to block 548 . If yes, the routine checks if the light time value is greater than 2.5 minutes at block 544 . If no, the routine skips to block 548 . If yes, the routine calls the SetVarLight subroutine (see FIG. 8), to correct the light timing setting, at block 546 .
  • the routine calls the SetVarLight subroutine (see FIG. 8), to correct the light timing setting, at block 546 .
  • the routine checks if the radio signal has been clear for 100 milliseconds or more. If not, the routine skips to block 552 . If yes, the routine clears the radio at block 550 . At block 552 , the routine resets the watchdog timer. At block 554 , the routine loops to the beginning of the main loop.
  • the SetVarLight subroutine is called whenever the door is commanded to move and the worklight is to be turned on.
  • the subroutine checks if the period of the rectified power line signal (pin P 24 of microprocessor 300 ) is greater than or equal to 9 milliseconds. If yes, the line frequency is 50 Hz, and the timer is set to 2.5 minutes at block 564 . If no, the line frequency is 60 Hz and the timer is set to 4.5 minutes at block 562 . After setting, the subroutine returns to the call point at block 566 .
  • the hardware timer interrupt subroutine operated by microprocessor 300 runs every 0.256 milliseconds. Referring to FIGS. 9 A- 9 C, when the subroutine is first called, it sets the radio interrupt status as indicated by the software flags at block 580 . At block 582 , the subroutine updates the software timer extension. The next series of steps monitor the AC power line frequency (pin P 24 of microprocessor 300 ). At step 584 , the subroutine checks if the rectified power line input is high (checks for a leading edge). If yes, the subroutine skips to block 594 , where it increments the power line high time counter, then continues to block 596 .
  • the subroutine checks if the high time counter is below 2 milliseconds at block 586 . If yes, the subroutine skips to block 594 . If no, the subroutine sets the measured power line time in RAM at block 588 . The subroutine then resets the power line high time counter at block 590 and resets the phase timer register in block 592 .
  • the subroutine checks if the motor power level is set at 100 percent. If yes, the subroutine turns on the motor phase control output at block 606 . If no, the subroutine checks if the motor power level is set at 0 percent at block 598 . If yes, the subroutine turns off the motor phase control output at block 604 . If no, the phase timer register is decremented at block 600 and the result is checked for sign. If positive the subroutine branches to block 606 ; if negative the subroutine branches to block 604 .
  • the subroutine continues at block 608 where the incoming RPM signal (at pin P 31 of microprocessor 300 ) is digitally filtered. Then the time prescaling task switcher (which loops through 8 tasks identified at blocks 620 , 630 , 640 , 650 ) is incremented at block 610 . The task switcher varies from 0 to 7. At block 612 , the subroutine branches to the proper task depending on the value of the task switcher.
  • the execute motor state machine subroutine is called at block 620 . If the task is value 0 or 4 (this occurs every 2 milliseconds), the wall control switches are debounced at block 630 . If the task value is 6 (this occurs every 4 milliseconds), the execute 4 ms timer subroutine is called at block 640 . If the task is value 1, 3, 5 or 7, the 1 millisecond timer subroutine is called at block 650 . Upon completion of the called subroutine, the 0.256 millisecond timer subroutine returns at block 614 .
  • FIGS. 10 A- 10 C Details of the 1 ms timer subroutine (block 650 ) are shown in FIGS. 10 A- 10 C.
  • the first step is to update the A/D converters on the UP and DOWN force setting potentiometers (P 34 and P 35 of microprocessor 300 ) at block 652 .
  • the subroutine checks if the A/D conversion (comparison at comparators 320 and 322 ) is complete. If yes, the measured potentiometer values are stored at block 656 . Then the stored values (which vary from 0 to 127) are divided by 2 to obtain the 64 level force setting at block 658 .
  • the subroutine decrements the infrared obstacle detector timeout timer at block 660 .
  • the subroutine checks if the timer has reached zero. If no, the subroutine skips to block 672 . If yes, the subroutine resets the infrared obstacle detector timeout timer at block 664 .
  • the flag setting for the obstacle detector signal is checked at block 666 . If no, the one-shot break flag is set at block 668 . If yes, the flag is set indicating the obstacle detector signal is absent at block 670 .
  • the subroutine increments the radio time out register. Then the infrared obstacle detector reversal timer is decremented at block 674 . The pass point input is debounced at block 676 . The 125 millisecond prescaler is incremented at block 678 . Then the prescaler is checked if it has reached 63 milliseconds at block 680 . If yes, the fault blinking LED is updated at block 682 . If no, the prescaler is checked if it has reached 125 ms at block 684 . If yes, the 125 ms timer subroutine is executed at block 686 . If no, the routine returns at block 688 .
  • the 125 millisecond timer subroutine (block 690 ) is used to manage the power level of the motor 118 .
  • the subroutine updates the RS- 232 mode timer and exits the RS- 232 mode timer if necessary. The same pair of wires is used for both wall control switches and RS- 232 communication. If RS- 232 communication is received while in the wall control mode, the RS- 232 mode is entered. If four seconds passes since the last RS- 232 word was received, then the RS- 232 timer times out and reverts to the wall control mode.
  • the subroutine checks if the motor is set to be stopped.
  • the subroutine skips to block 716 and sets the motor's power level to 0 percent. If no, the subroutine checks if the pre-travel safety light is flashing at block 696 (if the optional flasher module has been installed, a light will flash for 2 seconds before the motor is permitted to travel and then flash at a predetermined interval during motor travel). If yes, the subroutine skips to block 716 and sets the motor's power level to 0 percent.
  • the subroutine checks if the microprocessor 300 is in the last phase of a limit training mode at block 698 . If yes, the subroutine skips to block 710 . If no, the subroutine checks if the microprocessor 300 is in another part of the limit training mode at block 700 . If no, the subroutine skips to block 710 . If yes, the subroutine checks if the minimum speed (as determined by the force settings) is greater than 40 percent at block 704 . If no, the power level is set to 40 percent at block 708 . If yes, the power level is set equal to the minimum speed stored in MinSpeed Register at block 706 .
  • the subroutine checks if the flag is set to slow down. If yes, the subroutine checks if the motor is running above or below minimum speed at block 714 . If above minimum speed, the power level of the motor is decremented one step increment (one step increment is preferably 5% of maximum motor speed) at block 722 . If below the minimum speed, the power level of the motor is incremented one step increment (which is preferably 5% of maximum motor speed) to minimum speed at block 720 .
  • the subroutine checks if the motor is running at maximum allowable speed at block 712 . If no, the power level of the motor is incremented one step increment (which is preferably 5% of maximum motor speed) at block 720 . If yes, the flag is set for motor ramp-up speed complete.
  • the subroutine continues at block 724 where it checks if the period of the rectified AC power line (pin P 24 of microprocessor 300 ) is greater than or equal to 9 ms. If no, the subroutine fetches the motor's phase control information (indexed from the power level) from the 60 Hz look-up table stored in ROM at block 728 . If yes, the subroutine fetches the motor's phase control information (indexed from the power level) from the 50 Hz look-up table stored in ROM at block 726 .
  • the subroutine tests for a user enable/disable of the infrared obstacle detector-controlled worklight feature at block 730 . Then the user radio learning timers, ZZWIN (at the wall keypad if installed) and AUXLEARNSW (radio on air and worklight command) are updated at block 732 . The software watchdog timer is updated at block 734 and the fault blinking LED is updated at block 736 . The subroutine returns at block 738 .
  • the 4 millisecond timer subroutine is used to check on various systems which do not require updating as often as more critical systems. Referring to FIGS. 12A and 12B, the subroutine is called at block 640 .
  • the RPM safety timers are updated. These timers are used to determine if the door has engaged the floor.
  • the RPM safety timer is a one second delay before the operator begins to look for a falling door, i.e., one second after stopping.
  • the first type force are the forces determined by the UP and DOWN force potentiometers. These force levels determine the speed at which the door travels in the UP and DOWN directions.
  • the second type of force is determined by the decrease in motor speed due to an external force being applied to the door (an obstacle or the floor). This programmed or pre-selected external force is the maximum force that the system will accept before an auto-reverse or stop is commanded.
  • a block 752 the 0.5 second RPM timer is checked to see if it has expired. If yes, the 0.5 second timer is reset at block 754 . At block 756 safety checks are performed on the RPM seen during the last 0.5 seconds to prevent the door from falling. The 0.5 second timer is chosen so the maximum force achieved at the trolley will reach 50 kilograms in 0.5 seconds if the motor is operating at 100 percent of power.
  • the subroutine updates the 1 second timer for the optional light flasher module.
  • the preferred flash period is 1 second.
  • the radio dead time and dropout timers are updated.
  • the learn switch is debounced.
  • the status of the worklight is updated in accordance with the various light timers.
  • the optional wall control blink timer is updated.
  • the optional wall control includes a light which blinks when the door is being commanded to auto-reverse in response to an infrared obstacle detector signal break.
  • the subroutine returns.
  • FIGS. 13A and 13B Further details of the asynchronous RPM signal interrupt, block 434 , are shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B.
  • This signal which is provided to microprocessor 300 at pin P 31 , is used to control the motor speed and the position detector.
  • Door position is determined by a value relative to the pass point. The pass point is set at 0. Positions above the pass point are negative; positions below the pass point are positive.
  • the position detector (or counter) determines the position based on the number of RPM pulses to the UP limit number.
  • the position detector counts the number of RPM pulses to the DOWN limit number.
  • the UP and DOWN limit numbers are stored in a register.
  • the RPM interrupt subroutine calculates the period of the incoming RPM signal. If the door is traveling UP, the subroutine calculates the difference between two successive pulses. If the door is traveling DOWN, the subroutine calculates the difference between two successive pulses. At block 784 , the subroutine divides the period by 8 to fit into a binary word. At block 786 the subroutine checks if the motor speed is ramping up. This is the max force mode. RPM timeout will vary from 10 to 500 milliseconds. Note that these times are recommended for a DC motor. If an AC motor is used, the maximum time would be scaled down to typically 24 milliseconds.
  • a 24 millisecond period is slower than the breakdown RPM of the motor and therefore beyond the maximum possible force of most preferred motors. If yes, the RPM timeout is set at 500 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) at block 790 . If no, the subroutine sets the RPM timeout as the rounded-up value of the force setting in block 788 .
  • the subroutine checks for the direction of travel. This is found in the state machine register. If the door is traveling DOWN, the position counter is incremented at block 796 and the pass point debouncer is sampled at block 800 .
  • the subroutine checks for the falling edge of the pass point signal. If the falling edge is present, the subroutine returns at block 814 . If there is a pass point falling edge, the subroutine checks for the lowest pass point (in cases where more than one pass point is used). If this is not the lowest pass point, the subroutine returns at block 814 . If it is the only pass point or the lowest pass point, the position counter is zeroed and the subroutine returns at block 814 .
  • the subroutine decrements the position counter at block 794 and samples the pass point debouncer at block 798 . Then it checks for the rising edge of the pass point signal at block 802 . If there is no pass point signal rising edge, the subroutine returns at block 814 . If there is, it checks for the lowest pass point at block 806 . If no the subroutine returns at block 814 . If yes, the subroutine zeroes the position counter and returns at block 814 .
  • the motor state machine subroutine is shown in FIG. 14. It keeps track of the state of the motor.
  • the subroutine updates the false obstacle detector signal output, which is used in systems that do not require an infrared obstacle detector.
  • the subroutine checks if the software watchdog timer has reached too high a value. If yes, a system reset is commanded at block 824 . If no, at block 826 , it checks the state of the motor stored in the motor state register located in EEPROM 302 and executes the appropriate subroutine.
  • the UP direction subroutine at block 832 is executed. If the door is traveling DOWN, the DOWN direction subroutine is executed at block 828 . If the door is stopped in the middle of the travel path, the stop in midtravel subroutine is executed at block 838 . If the door is fully closed, the DOWN position subroutine is executed at block 830 . If the door is fully open, the UP position subroutine is executed at block 834 . If the door is reversing, the auto-reverse subroutine is executed at block 836 .
  • the subroutine at block 838 is called, as shown in FIG. 15.
  • the subroutine updates the relay safety system (ensuring that relays K 1 and K 2 are open).
  • the subroutine checks for a received wall command or radio command. If there is no received command, the subroutine updates the worklight status and returns. If yes, the motor power is set to 20 percent at block 844 and the motor state is set to traveling DOWN at block 846 . The worklight status is updated and the subroutine returns at block 850 . If the door is stopped in midtravel and a door command is received, the door is set to close. The next time the system calls the motor state machine subroutine, the motor state machine will call the DOWN direction subroutine. The door must close to the DOWN limit before it can be opened to the full UP limit.
  • the DOWN position subroutine block 830 , at FIG. 16 is called.
  • the subroutine checks if a wall control or radio command has been received. If no, the subroutine updates the light and returns at block 858 . If yes, the motor power is set to 20 percent at block 854 and the motor state register is set to show the state is traveling UP at block 856 . The subroutine then updates the light and returns at block 858 .
  • the UP direction subroutine, block 832 is shown in FIGS. 17 A- 17 C.
  • the subroutine waits until the main loop refreshes the UP limit from EEPROM 302 . Then it checks if 40 milliseconds have passed since closing of the light relay K 3 at block 862 . If not, the subroutine returns. If yes, the subroutine checks for flashing the warning light prior to travel at block 866 (only if the optional flasher module is installed). If the light is flashing, the status of the blinking light is updated and the subroutine returns at block 868 . If not, the flashing is terminated, the motor UP relay is turned on at block 870 .
  • the subroutine waits until 1 second has passed after the motor was turned on at block 872 . If no, the subroutine skips to block 888 . If yes, the subroutine checks for the RPM signal timeout. If no, the subroutine checks if the motor speed is ramping up at block 876 by checking the value of the RAMPFLAG register in RAM (i.e., UP, DOWN, FULLSPEED, STOP). If yes, the subroutine skips to block 888 . If no, the subroutine checks if the measured RPM is longer than the allowable RPM period at block 878 . If no, the subroutine continues at block 888 .
  • the subroutine branches to block 880 .
  • the reason is set as force obstruction.
  • the training limits are being set, the training status is updated.
  • the motor power is set to zero and the state is set as stopped in midtravel.
  • the subroutine returns.
  • the subroutine checks if the door's exact position is known. If it is not, the door's distance from the UP limit is updated in block 890 by subtracting the UP limit stored in RAM from the position of the door also stored in RAM. Then the subroutine checks at block 892 if the door is beyond its UP limit. If yes, the subroutine sets the reason as reaching the limit in block 894 . Then the subroutine checks if the limits are being trained. If yes, the limit training machine is updated at block 898 . If no, the motor's power is set as zero and the motor state is set at the UP position in block 900 . Then the subroutine returns at block 902 .
  • the subroutine checks if the door is being manually positioned in the training cycle at block 904 . If not, the door position within the slowdown distance of the limit is checked at block 906 . If yes, the motor slow down flag is set at block 910 . If the door is being positioned manually at block 904 or the door is not within the slow down distance, the subroutine skips to block 912 . At block 912 the subroutine checks if a wall control or radio command has been received. If yes, the motor power is set at zero and the state is set at stopped in midtravel as block 916 . If no, the system checks if the motor has been running for over 27 seconds at block 914 . If yes, the motor power is set at zero and the motor state is set at stopped in midtravel at block 916 . Then the subroutine returns at block 918 .
  • the auto-reverse subroutine block 836 is described. (Force reversal is stopping the motor for 0.5 seconds, then traveling UP.)
  • the subroutine updates the 0.5 second reversal timer (the force reversal timer described above). Then the subroutine checks at block 922 for expiration of the force-reversal timer. If yes, the motor power is set to 20 percent at block 924 and the motor state is set to traveling UP at block 926 and the subroutine returns at block 932 . If the timer has not expired, the subroutine checks for receipt of a wall command or radio command at block 928 . If yes, the motor power is set to zero and the state is set at stopped in midtravel at block 930 , then the subroutine returns at block 932 . If no, the subroutine returns at block 932 .
  • the UP position routine, block 834 is shown in FIG. 19.
  • Door travel limits training is started with the door in the UP position.
  • the subroutine updates the relay safety system. Then the subroutine checks for receipt of a wall command or radio command at block 936 indicating an intervening user command. If yes, the motor power is set to 20 percent at block 938 and the state is set at traveling DOWN in block 940 . Then the light is updated and the subroutine returns at block 950 . If no wall command has been received, the subroutine checks for training the limits at block 942 . If no, the light is updated and the subroutine returns at block 950 . If yes, the limit training state machine is updated at block 944 .
  • the subroutine checks if it is time to travel DOWN at block 946 . If no, the subroutine updates the light and returns at block 950 . If it is time to travel DOWN, the state is set at traveling DOWN at block 948 and the system returns at block 950 .
  • the DOWN direction subroutine, block 828 is shown in FIGS. 20 A- 20 D.
  • the subroutine waits until the main loop routine refreshes the DOWN limit from EEPROM 302 .
  • the main loop routine refreshes the DOWN limit from EEPROM 302 .
  • the remote transmitter radio
  • EEPROM communication is handled within software, it is necessary to ensure that two software routines do not try to communicate with the EEPROM at the same time (and have a data collision). Therefore, EEPROM communication is allowed only in the Main Loop and in the Radio routine, with the Main loop having a busy flag to prevent the radio from communicating with the EEPROM at the same time.
  • the subroutine checks if 40 milliseconds has passed since closing of the light relay K 3 . If no, the subroutine returns at block 956 . If yes, the subroutine checks if the warning light is flashing (for 2 seconds if the optional flasher module is installed) prior to travel at block 958 . If yes, the subroutine updates the status of the flashing light and returns at block 960 . If no, or the flashing is completed, the subroutine turns on the DOWN motor relay K 2 at block 962 . At block 964 the subroutine checks if one second has passed since the motor is first turned on. The system ignores the force on the motor for the first one second. This allows the motor time to overcome the inertia of the door (and exceed the programmed force settings) without having to adjust the programmed force settings for ramp up, normal travel and slow down. Force is effectively set to maximum during ramp up to overcome sticky doors.
  • the subroutine skips to block 984 . If the one second time limit has passed, the subroutine checks for the RPM signal time out at block 966 . If no, the subroutine checks if the motor speed is currently being ramped up at block 968 (this is a maximum force condition). If yes, the routine skips to block 984 . If no, the subroutine checks if the measured RPM period is longer than the allowable RPM period. If no, the subroutine continues at block 984 .
  • the subroutine checks if the door is positioned beyond the DOWN limit setting. If it is, the subroutine skips to block 990 where it checks if the motor has been powered for at least one second. This one second power period after the DOWN limit has been reached provides for the door to close fully against the floor. This is especially important when DC motors are used. The one second period overcomes the internal braking effect of the DC motor on shut-off. Auto-reverse is disabled after the position detector reaches the DOWN limit.
  • the subroutine sets the reason as reaching the limit at block 994 .
  • the subroutine then checks if the limits are being trained at block 998 . If yes, the limit training machine is updated at block 1002 . If no, the motor's power is set to zero and the motor state is set at the DOWN position in block 1006 . In block 1008 the subroutine returns.
  • the subroutine sets the reason as early limit at block 1026 . Then the subroutine sets the motor power at zero and the motor state as auto-reverse at block 1028 and returns at block 1030 .
  • the subroutine checks if the door's position is currently unknown. If yes, the subroutine skips to block 1004 . If no, the subroutine updates the door's distance from the DOWN limit using internal RAM in microprocessor 300 in block 986 . Then the subroutine checks at block 988 if the door is three inches beyond the DOWN limit. If yes, the subroutine skips to block 990 . If no, the subroutine checks if the door is being positioned manually in the training cycle at block 992 . If yes, the subroutine skips to block 1004 . If no, the subroutine checks if the door is within the slow DOWN distance of the limit at block 996 . If no, the subroutine skips to block 1004 . If yes, the subroutine sets the motor slow down flag at block 1000 .
  • the subroutine checks if a wall control command or radio command has been received. If yes, the subroutine sets the motor power at zero and the state as auto-reverse at block 1012 . If no, the subroutine checks if the motor has been running for over 27 seconds at block 1010 . If yes, the subroutine sets the motor power at zero and the state at auto-reverse. If no, the subroutine checks if the obstacle detector signal has beer, missing for 12 milliseconds or more at block 1014 indicating the presence of the obstacle or the failure of the detector. If no, the subroutine returns at block 1018 .
  • the subroutine checks if the wall control or radio signal is being held to override the infrared obstacle detector at block 1016 . If yes, the subroutine returns at block 1018 . If no, the subroutine sets the reason as infrared obstacle detector obstruction at block 1020 . The subroutine then sets the motor power at zero and the state as auto-reverse at block 1022 and returns at block 1024 . (The auto-reverse routine stops the motor for 0.5 seconds then causes the door to travel up.)
  • the appendix attached hereto includes a source listing of a series of routines used to operate a movable barrier operator in accordance with the present invention.
  • Wall control and RS232 are P98 with a redundant smart button and command button on the logic board Flex GDO Logic Board Fixed AND Rolling Code Functionality Learn from keyless entry transmitter Posi-lock Turn on light from broken IR beam (when at up limit) Keyless entry temporary password based on number of hours or number of activations.
  • (Rolling code mode only) GDO is initialized to a ‘clean slate’ mode when the memory is erased. In this mode, the GDO will receive either fixed or rolling codes. When the first radio code is learned, the GDO locks itself into that mode (fixed or rolling) until the memory is again erased.
  • Revision 1.1 Changed light from broken IP beam to work in both fixed and rolling modes. Changed light from IR beam to work only on beam break, not on beam block.
  • Revision 1.2 Learning rolling code formely erased fixed code. Mode is now determined by first transmitter learned after radio erase.
  • Revision 1.3 Moved radio interrupt disable to reception of 20 bits. Changed mode of radio switching. Formely toggled upon radio error, now switches in pseudo-random fashion depending upon value of 125 ms timer.
  • Revision 1.4 Optimized portion of radio after bit value is determined. Used relative addressing to speed code and minimize ROM size.
  • Revision 1.5 Changed mode of learning transmitters. Learn command is now light-command, learn light is now light-lock, and learn open/close/ stop is lock-command. (Command was press light, press command, release light, release command, worklight was press light, press command, release command, release light, o/c/s was press lock, press command, release command, release lock. This caused DOG2 to reset.
  • Revision 1.6 Light button and light transmitter now ignored during travel. Switch data cleared only after a command switch is checked.
  • Revision 1.7 Rejected fixed mode (and fixed mode test) when learning light and open/close/stop transmitters.
  • Revision 1.8 Changed learn from wall control to work obly when both switches are held. Modified force pot.
  • Revision 2.0A On the event that the noise pulse is of the same duration as the sync pulse the time between sync and first data pulse (inactive time) is measured The inactive time is 5.14 ms for billion code and 2.4 ms for rolling code. If it is determined that the previously received sync is indeed a noise pulse, the pulse is thrown out and the micro continules to lock for a sync pulse as in Rev. 2.0.
  • Revision 2.1 To make the blank time more impervious to noise, the sync pulses are differentiated between. Fixed max width is 4.6 ms, roll max width is 2.3 ms. This is simular to the inactive time check done in Rev. 2.0A.
  • Revision 2.2 The worklight function; when the IP beam is broken and the door is at the up limit the light will turn on for 4.5 min.
  • This revision allows the worklight function to be enabled and disabled by the user. The function will come enabled from the factor. To disable, with the light off press and hold the light button for 7 sec. The light will come on and after 5 sec. the function is disabled the light will turn off. To enable the function, turn the light on, release the button, then press and hold the light button down for 5 sec. The light will turn off and after the function has been enable in 5 sec. the light will turn on.
  • Revision 3.0 Integrated in functionality for Siminor rolling code transmitter. The Siminor transmitter may be received whenever a C code transmitter may be received.
  • Siminor transmitters are able to perform as a standard command or as a light control transmitter, but not as an open/close/stop transmitter.
  • Revision 3.1 Modified handling of rolling code counter (in mirroring and adding) to improve efficiency and hopefully kill all short cycles when a radio is jammed on the air.
  • PROD000 Revision 0.1 Removed physical radio tests Disabled radio temporarily Put in sign bit test for limits
  • Automatic limits working Revision 0.2 Provided for traveling up when too close to limit Revision 0.3: Changed force pot. read to new routine. Disabled T1 interrupt and all old force pot. code Disabled all RS232 output Revision 0.4: Added in (veerrrry) rough force into pot.
  • Revision 0.5 Changed EEPROM in comments to add in up limit, last operation, and down limit. Created OnePass register Added in limit read from nonvolatile when going to a moving state Added in limit read on power-up Created passcounter register to keep track of pass point(s) Installed basic wake-up routine to restore position based on last state Revision 0.6: Changed RPM time read to routine used in P98 to save RAM Changed operation of RPM forced up travel Implemented pass point for one-pass-point travel Revision 0.7: Changed pass point from single to multiple (no EEPROM support) Revision 0.8: Changed all CKIPRADIO loads from 0xFF to NOEECOMM Installed EEPROM support for multiple pass points Revision 0.9: Changed state machine to handle wake-up (i.e.
  • Revision 0.10 Changed the AC line input routine to work off full-wave rectified AC coming in Revision 0.11: Installed the phase control for motor speed control Revision 0.12: Installed traveling down if too near up limit Installed speed-up when starting travel Installed slow-down when ending travel Revision 0.13: Re-activated the C code Revision 0.14: Added in conditional assembly for Siminor radio codes Revision 0.15: Disabled old wall control code Changed all pins to conform with new layout Removed unused constants Commented out old wall control routine Changed code to run at 6 MHz Revision 0.16: Fixed bugs in Flex radio Revision 0.17: Re-enabled old wall control.
  • Revision 0.23 Added in RS232 functionality over wall control lines
  • Revision 0.24 Touched up RS232 over wall control routine Removed 50 Hz force table Added in fixes to LAC state machine
  • Revision 0.25 Added switch set and release for wall control (NOT smart switch, into RS232 commands (Turned debouncer set and release in to subs)
  • Added smart switch into RS232 commands (smart switch is also a sub) Re-enabled pass point test in ‘:’
  • Revision 0.28 Modified the wall control documentation Installed blinking the wall control on an IP reversal instead of the worklight Installed blinking the wall control when a pass point is seen
  • Revision 0.29 Changed max. RPM timeout to 100 ms Fixed wall control blink bug Raised minimum speed setting NOTE: Forces still need to be set to accurate levels
  • Revision 0.30 Removed ‘er’ before setteing of pcon register Bypassed slow-down to limit during learn mode
  • Revision 0.31 Changed force ramp to a linear FORCE ramp, not a linear time ramp Installed a look-up table to make the ramp more linear.
  • Revision 0.32 Changed down limit to drive lightly into floor Changed down limit when learning to back off of floor for a few pulses
  • Revision 0.33 Changed max. speed to 2 ⁇ 3 when a short door is detected
  • Revision 0.34 Changed light timer to 2.5 minutes for a 50 Hz line, 4.5 minutes for a 60 Hz line. Currently, the light timer is 4.5 minutes WHEN THE UNIT FIRST POWERS UP.
  • Revision 1.6 Fixed blinking of wall control when indicating IP protector recersal to give the blink a true 50% duty cycle Changed blinker output to output a constant high instead of pulsing Changed P2S_POR to 1010 Indicate Siminor unit;
  • Revision 1.7 Disabled Siminor Radio Changed P2S_POR to 1011 Indicate Lift-Master unit, Added in one more conditional assembly point to avoid use of simradio label
  • Revision 1.9 Lengthened blink time for indicating pass point Installed a max.
  • Revision 2.5 Changed backing off of up limit to only occur during learn cycle. Backs off by ⁇ fraction (1/2 ) ⁇ ′′ if learn cycle force stops within 1 ⁇ 2′′ of stop bolt. Removed considering system lost if floor not seen. Changed drive-past of down limit to 36 pulses (3′′) Added in clearing of power level whenever motor gets stopped (to turn off the FET's sooner) Added in a 40 ms delay (using the same MOTDEL register as for the traveling states to delay the shut-off of the motor relay.
  • RINFILTER .equ NextGroup+7 radio input filter LIGHT1S .equ NextGroup+8 ; light timer for 1second flash DOG2 .equ NextGroup+9 ; second watchdog FAULTFLAG .equ NextGroup+10 ; flag for fault blink, no rad.
  • ReadUpLimit ld SKIPRADIO, #NOEECOMM ; Skip radio EEPROM reads ld ADDRESS, #UPLIMADDR ; Read the up limit call READMEMORY ; di ; ld UP_LIMIT_HI, MTEMPH ; ld UP_LIMIT_LO, MTEMPL ; clr FirstRun ; Calculate the highest possible value for pass count add MTEMPL, #10 ; Bias back by 1” to provide margin of error adc MTEMPH, #00 ; CalcMaxLoop: inc FirstRun ; add MTEMPL, #LOW(PPOINTPULSES) ; adc MTEMPH, #HIGH(PPOINTPULSES) ; jr nc, CalcMaxLoop ; Count pass points until value goes positive GotMaxPPoint: ei ; clr SKIPRADIO ; tm PassCounter, #01000000b ; Test for a negative
  • GotRs4E cp SDISABLE, #32 ; If the 4 second init timer jp ult, ExitNoTest ; is done, don't do the test di ; Shut down all other GDO operations ld COUNT_HI, #002H ; Set up to loop for 512 iterations, clr COUNT_LO ; totaling 13.056 milliseconds ld P01M, #00000100b ; Set all possible pins or micro.
  • BlankSkip cp rtimeah,#00h ; test first the min sync pr z,JustNoise ; if high byte 0 then clear the radio SyncOk: TM RadioMode,#ROLL_MASK ;checking sync pulse with,fix or Roll JR z,Fixedsync CP rtimeah,#09h ;time for roll 1/2 fixed, 2.3ms JR uge,JustNoise JR SET1 Fixedsync: cp rtimeah,#012h ; test of the max time 4.6mS jr uge,JustNoise ; if not clear SET1: clr PREVFIX ;Clear the previous “fixed” bit cp rtimeah, SyncThresh ; test for 1 or three time units jr uge,SYNC3FLAG ; set the sync 3 flag SYNCLFLAG: tm RFlag
  • jr nz,HigherUp Average too low -- output pulse LowerUp: and P3,#( ⁇ UP_OUT) ; Take pulse output low jr UpPotDone ; HigherUp: or P3,#UP_OUT ; Output a high pulse inc UP_TEMP ; Increase measured duty cycle UpPotDone: inc POT_COUNT ; Incremet the total period for jr nz, GoTimer ; duty cycle measurement rcf ; Divide the pot values by two to obtain rrc UP_TEMP ; a 64-level force range rcf ; rrc DN_TEMP ; cr ; Subtract from 63 to reverse the direction ld UPFORCE, #63 ; Calculate pot.
  • the zero position is taken to be the upper edge of the pass point signal (i.e. the falling edge in the up direction, the rising edge in the down direction) cp STATE, #UP_DIRECTION ; Test for the proper direction of the counter jr z, DecPos ; cp STATE, #STOP ; jr z, DecPos ; +T+L,12 cp STATE, #UP_POSITION ; jr z, DecPos ; IncPos: incw POSITION ; cp PPOINT_DEB, #2 ; Test for pass point being seen jr ult, NoDNPPoint ; If signal is low, none seen DnPPoint: or PassCounter, #10000000b +T+L,32 ; Mark pass point as currently high jr CtrDone ; NoDnPPoint: tm PassCounter, #10000000b ; Test for pass point seen before jr z, PastDnEdge ;
  • PastDnEdge NoUpPPoint: and PassCounter, #01111111b ; Clear the flag for pass point high jr CtrDone ; DecPos: decw POSITION ; cp PPOINT_DEB, #2 ; Test for pass point being seen jr ult, NoUpPPoint ; If signal is low, none seen UpPPoint: tm PassCounter, #10000000b +T+L,32 ; Test for pass point seen before jr nz, PastUpEdge ; If so, then we're past the edge AtUpEdge: tm PassCounter, #01111111b ; Test for lowest pass point jr nz, NotLowest2 ; If not, don't zero the position counter Lowest2: di clr POSITION_HI ; Set the position counter back to zero clr POSITION_LO ; ei NotLowest2: cp STATUS, #RSSTATUS ;
  • JR NZ,NotHeldDown ;if not debounced, skip long hold CP EnableWorkLight,#01100000B ;has the 10 sec. already passed? JR GE,HeldDon CP EnableWorkLight,#01010000B JR LT,HeldDown LD EnableWorkLight,#10010000B ;when debounce occurs, set register ;to initiate e2 write in mainloop JR HeldDown NotHeldDown: CLR EnableWorkLight HeldDown: and SW_DATA, #LIGHT_SW ; Clear all switches excect for worklrght cp STATUS, #WALLOFF ; Test for illegal status jp ugt, start ; if so reset jr z, NoWallCtrl ; Turn off wall control state cp STATUS, #RSSTATUS ; Check for in RS232 mode jr z, NOTFLASHED ; If so, skip the state machine cp ST
  • jr nz,CMDOPEN open command tm P0,#SWITCHES2 ; test the second command input jr nz,CMDOPEN CMDCLOSE1: ; closed command call DECVAC ; decrease vacation debounce call DECLIGHT ; decrease light debounce cp CMD_DEB,#0FFH ; test for the max number jr z,SKIPCMDINO ; if at the max skip inc di inc CMD_DEB ; increase the debouncer inc BCMD_DEB increase the debouncer SKIPCMDINC: cp CMD_DEB,#CMD_MAFE ; jr nz,CMDEXIT ; if not made then exit call CmdSet ; Set the command switch CMDEXIT: or p3,#CHARGE_SW ; turn on the charge system and p3,# ⁇ DIS_SW ; ld SWITCH_DELAY,#CMD_DEL_EX ;

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Power-Operated Mechanisms For Wings (AREA)

Abstract

A movable barrier operator having improved safety and energy efficiency features automatically detects line voltage frequency and uses that information to set a worklight shut-off time. The operator automatically detects the type of door (single panel or segmented) and uses that information to set a maximum speed of door travel. The operator moves the door with a linearly variable speed from start of travel to stop for smooth and quiet performance. The operator provides for full door closure by driving the door into the floor when the DOWN limit is reached and no auto-reverse condition has been detected. The operator provides for user selection of a minimum stop speed for easy starting and stopping of sticky or binding doors.

Description

    BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • This invention relates generally to movable barrier operators for operating movable barriers or doors. More particularly, it relates to garage door operators having improved safety and energy efficiency features. [0001]
  • Garage door operators have become more sophisticated over the years providing users with increased convenience and security. However, users continue to desire further improvements and new features such as increased energy efficiency, ease of installation, automatic configuration, and aesthetic features, such as quiet, smooth operation. [0002]
  • In some markets energy costs are significant. Thus energy efficiency options such as lower horsepower motors and user control over the worklight functions are important to garage door operator owners. For example, most garage door operators have a worklight which turns on when the operator is commanded to move the door and shuts off a fixed period of time after the door stops. In the United States, an illumination period of 4½ minutes is considered adequate. In markets outside the United States, 4½ minutes is considered too long. Some garage door operators have special safety features, for example, which enable the worklight whenever the obstacle detection beam is broken by an intruder passing through an open garage door. Some users may wish to disable the worklight in this situation. There is a need for a garage door operator which can be automatically configured for predefined energy saving features, such as worklight shut-off time. [0003]
  • Some movable barrier operators include a flasher module which causes a small light to flash or blink whenever the barrier is commanded to move. The flasher module provides some warning when the barrier is moving. There is a need for an improved flasher unit which provides even greater warning to the user when the barrier is commanded to move. [0004]
  • Another feature desired in many markets is a smooth, quiet motor and transmission. Most garage door operators have AC motors because they are less expensive than DC motors. However, AC motors are generally noisier than DC motors. [0005]
  • Most garage door operators employ only one or two speeds of travel. Single speed operation, i.e., the motor immediately ramps up to full operating speed, can create a jarring start to the door. Then during closing, when the door approaches the floor at full operating speed, whether a DC or AC motor is used, the door closes abruptly with a high amount of tension on it from the inertia of the system. This jarring is hard on the transmission and the door and is annoying to the user. [0006]
  • If two operating speeds are used, the motor would be started at a slow speed, usually 20 percent of full operating speed, then after a fixed period of time, the motor speed would increase to full operating speed. Similarly, when the door reaches a fixed point above/below the close/open limit, the operator would decrease the motor speed to 20 percent of the maximum operating speed. While this two speed operation may eliminate some of the hard starts and stops, the speed changes can be noisy and do not occur smoothly, causing stress on the transmission. There is a need for a garage door operator which opens the door smoothly and quietly, with no aburptly apparent sign of speed change during operation. [0007]
  • Garage doors come in many types and sizes and thus different travel speeds are required for them. For example, a one-piece door will be movable through a shorter total travel distance and need to travel slower for safety reasons than a segmented door with a longer total travel distance. To accommodate the two door types, many garage door operators include two sprockets for driving the transmission. At installation, the installer must determine what type of door is to be driven, then select the appropriate sprocket to attach to the transmission. This takes additional time and if the installer is the user, may require several attempts before matching the correct sprocket for the door. There is a need for a garage door operator which automatically configures travel speed depending on size and weight of the door. [0008]
  • National safety standards dictate that a garage door operator perform a safety reversal (auto-reverse) when an object is detected only one inch above the DOWN limit or floor. To satisfy these safety requirements, most garage door operators include an obstacle detection system, located near the bottom of the door travel. This prevents the door from closing on objects or persons that may be in the door path. Such obstacle detection systems often include an infrared source and detector located on opposite sides of the door frame. The obstacle detector sends a signal when the infrared beam between the source and detector is broker,, indicating an obstacle is detected. In response to the obstacle signal, the operator causes an automatic safety reversal. The door stops and begins traveling up, away from the obstacle. [0009]
  • There are two different “forces” used in the operation of the garage door operator. The first “force” is usually preset or setable at two force levels: the UP force level setting used to determine the speed at which the door travels in the UP direction and the DOWN force level setting used to determine the speed at which the door travels in the DOWN direction. The second “force” is the force level determined by the decrease in motor speed due to an external force applied to the door, i.e., from an obstacle or the floor. This external force level is also preset or setable and is any set-point type force against which the feedback force signal is compared. When the system determines the set point force has been met, an auto-reverse or stop is commanded. [0010]
  • To overcome differences in door installations, i.e. stickiness and resistance to movement and other varying frictional-type forces, some garage door operators permit the maximum force (the second force) used to drive the speed of travel to be varied manually. This, however, affects the system's auto-reverse operation based on force. The auto-reverse system based on force initiates an auto-reverse if the force on the door exceeds the maximum force setting (the second force) by some predetermined amount. If the user increases the force setting to drive the door through a “sticky” section of travel, the user may inadvertently affect the force to a much greater value than is safe for the unit to operate during normal use. For example, if the DOWN force setting is set so high that it is only a small incremental value less than the force setting which initiates an auto-reverse due to force, this causes the door to engage objects at a higher speed before reaching the auto-reverse force setting. While the obstacle detection system will cause the door to auto-reverse, the speed and force at which the door hits the obstacle may cause harm to the obstacle and/or the door. [0011]
  • Barrier movement operators should perform a safety reversal off an obstruction which is only marginally higher than the floor, yet still close the door safely against the floor. In operator systems where the door moves at a high speed, the relatively large momentum of the moving parts, including the door, accomplishes complete closure. In systems with a soft closure, where the door speed decreases from full maximum to a small percentage of full maximum when closing, there may be insufficient momentum in the door or system to accomplish a full closure. For example, even if the door is positioned at the floor, there is sometimes sufficient play in the trolley of the operator to allow the door to move if the user were to try to open it. In particular, in systems employing a DC motor, when the DC motor is shut off, it becomes a dynamic brake. If the door isn't quite at the floor when the DOWN travel limit is reached and the DC motor is shut off, the door and associated moving parts may not have sufficient momentum to overcome the braking force of the DC motor. There is a need for a garage door operator which closes the door completely, eliminating play in the door after closure. [0012]
  • Many garage door operator installations are made to existing garage doors. The amount of force needed to drive the door varies depending on type of door and the quality of the door frame and installation. As a result, some doors are “stickier” than others, requiring greater force to move them through the entire length of travel. If the door is started and stopped using the full operating speed, stickiness is not usually a problem. However, if the garage door operator is capable of operation at two speeds, stickiness becomes a larger problem at the lower speed. In some installations, a force sufficient to run at 20 percent of normal speed is too small to start some doors moving. There is a need for a garage door operator which automatically controls force output and thus start and stop speeds. [0013]
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • A movable barrier operator having an electric motor for driving a garage door, a gate or other barrier is operated from a source of AC current. The movable barrier operator includes circuitry for automatically detecting the incoming AC line voltage and frequency of the alternating current. By automatically detecting the incoming AC line voltage and determining the frequency, the operator can automatically configure itself to certain user preferences. This occurs without either the user or the installer having to adjust or program the operator. The movable barrier operator includes a worklight for illuminating its immediate surroundings such as the interior of a garage. The barrier operator senses the power line frequency (typically 50 Hz or 60 Hz) to automatically set an appropriate shut-off time for a worklight. Because the power line frequency in Europe is 50 Hz and in the U.S. is 60 Hz, sensing the power line frequency enables the operator to configure itself for either a European or a U.S. market with no user or installer modifications. For U.S. users, the worklight shut-off time is set to preferably 4½ minutes; for European users, the worklight shut-off time is set to preferably 2½ minutes. Thus, a single barrier movement operator can be sold in two different markets with automatic setup, saving installation time. [0014]
  • The movable barrier operator of the present invention automatically detects if an optional flasher module is present. If the module is present, when the door is commanded to move, the operator causes the flasher module to operate. With the flasher module present, the operator also delays operation of the motor for a brief period, say ore or two seconds. This delay period with the flasher module blinking before door movement provides an added safety feature to users which warns them of impending door travel (e.g. if activated by an unseen transmitter). [0015]
  • The movable barrier operator of the present invention drives the barrier, which may be a door or a gate, at a variable speed. After motor start, the electric motor reaches a preferred initial speed of 20 percent of the full operating speed. The motor speed then increases slowly in a linearly continuous fashion from 20 percent to 100 percent of full operating speed. This provides a smooth, soft start without jarring the transmission or the door or gate. The motor moves the barrier at maximum speed for the largest portion of its travel, after which the operator slowly decreases speed from 100 percent to 20 percent as the barrier approaches the limit of travel, providing a soft, smooth and quiet stop. A slow, smooth start and stop provides a safer barrier movement operator for the user because there is less momentum to apply an impulse force in the event of an obstruction. In a fast system, relatively high momentum of the door changes to zero at the obstruction before the system can actually detect the obstruction. This leads to the application of a high impulse force. With the system of the invention, a slower stop speed means the system has less momentum to overcome, and therefore a softer, more forgiving force reversal. A slow, smooth start and stop also provide a more aesthetically pleasing effect to the user, and when coupled with a quieter DC motor, a barrier movement operator which operates very quietly. [0016]
  • The operator includes two relays and a pair of field effect transistors (FETs) for controlling the motor. The relays are used to control direction of travel. The FET's, with phase controlled, pulse width modulation, control start up and speed. Speed is responsive to the duration of the pulses applied to the FETs. A longer pulse causes the FETs to be on longer causing the barrier speed to increase. Shorter pulses result in a slower speed. This provides a very fine ramp control and more gentle starts and stops. [0017]
  • The movable barrier operator provides for the automatic measurement and calculation of the total distance the door is to travel. The total door travel distance is the distance between the UP and the DOWN limits (which depend on the type of door). The automatic measurement of door travel distance is a measure of the length of the door. Since shorter doors must travel at slower speeds than normal doors (for safety reasons), this enables the operator to automatically adjust the motor speed so the speed of door travel is the same regardless of door size. The total door travel distance in turn determines the maximum speed at which the operator will travel. By determining the total distance traveled, travel speeds can be automatically changed without having to modify the hardware. [0018]
  • The movable barrier operator provides full door or gate closure, i.e. a firm closure of the door to the floor so that the door is not movable in place after it stops. The operator includes a digital control or processor, specifically a microcontroller which has an internal microprocessor, an internal RAM and an internal ROM and an external EEPROM. The microcontroller executes instructions stored in its internal ROM and provides motor direction control signals to the relays and speed control signals to the FETs. The operator is first operated in a learn mode to store a DOWN limit position for the door. The DOWN limit position of the door is used as an approximation of the location of the floor (or as a minimum reversal point, below which no auto-reverse will occur). When the door reaches the DOWN limit position, the microcontroller causes the electric motor to drive the door past the DOWN limit a small distance, say for one or two inches. This causes the door to close solidly on the floor. [0019]
  • The operator embodying the present invention provides variable door or gate output speed, i.e., the user can vary the minimum speed at which the motor starts and stops the door. This enables the user to overcome differences in door installations, i.e. stickiness and resistance to movement and other varying functional-type forces. The minimum barrier speeds in the UP and DOWN directions are determined by the user-configured force settings, which are adjusted using UP and DOWN force potentiometers. The force potentiometers set the lengths of the pulses to the FETs, which translate to variable speeds. The user gains a greater force output and a higher minimum starting speed to overcome differences in door installations, i.e. stickiness and resistance to movement and other varying functional-type forces speed, without affecting the maximum speed of travel for the door. The user can configure the door to start at a speed greater than a default value, say 20 percent. This greater start up and slow down speed is transferred to the linearly variable speed function in that instead of traveling at 20 percent speed, increasing to 100 percent speed, then decreasing to 20 percent speed, the door may, for instance, travel at 40 percent speed to 100 percent speed and back down to 40 percent speed.[0020]
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a garage having mounted within it a garage door operator embodying the present invention; [0021]
  • FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a head unit of the garage door operator shown in FIG. 1; [0022]
  • FIG. 3 is an, exploded perspective view of a portion of a transmission unit of the garage door operator shown in FIG. 1; [0023]
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a controller and motor mounted within the head unit of the garage door operator shown in FIG. 1; [0024]
  • FIGS. [0025] 5A-5D are a schematic diagram of the controller shown in block format in FIG. 4;
  • FIGS. [0026] 6A-6B are a flow chart of an overall routine that executes in a microprocessor of the controller shown in FIGS. 5A-5D;
  • FIGS. [0027] 7A-7H are a flow chart of the main routine executed in the microprocessor;
  • FIG. 8 is a flow chart of a set variable light shut-off timer routine executed by the microprocessor; [0028]
  • FIGS. [0029] 9A-9C are a flow chart of a hardware timer interrupt routine executed in the microprocessor;
  • FIGS. [0030] 10A-10C are a flow chart of a 1 millisecond timer routine executed in the microprocessor;
  • FIGS. [0031] 11A-11C are a flow chart of a 125 millisecond timer routine executed in the microprocessor;
  • FIGS. [0032] 12A-12B are a flow chart of a 4 millisecond timer routine executed in the microprocessor;
  • FIGS. [0033] 13A-13B are a flow chart of an RPM interrupt routine executed in the microprocessor;
  • FIG. 14 is a flow chart of a motor state machine routine executed in the microprocessor; [0034]
  • FIG. 15 is a flow chart of a stop in midtravel routine executed in the microprocessor; [0035]
  • FIG. 16 is a flow chart of a DOWN position routine executed in the microprocessor; [0036]
  • FIGS. [0037] 17A-17C are a flow chart of an UP direction routine executed in the microprocessor;
  • FIG. 18 is a flow chart of an auto-reverse routine executed in the microprocessor; [0038]
  • FIG. 19 is a flow chart of an UP position routine executed in the microprocessor; [0039]
  • FIGS. [0040] 20A-20D are a flow chart of the DOWN direction routine executed in the microprocessor;
  • FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of a pass point detector and motor of the operator shown in FIG. 2; [0041]
  • FIG. 22A is a plan view of the pass point detector shown in FIG. 21; and [0042]
  • FIG. 22B is a partial plan view of the pass point detector shown in FIG. 21.[0043]
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
  • Referring now to the drawings and especially to FIG. 1, a movable barrier or garage door operator system is generally shown therein and referred to by [0044] numeral 8. The system 8 includes a movable barrier operator or garage door operator 10 having a head unit 12 mounted within a garage 14. More specifically, the head unit 12 is mounted to a ceiling 15 of the garage 14. The operator 10 includes a transmission 18 extending from the head unit 12 with a releasable trolley 20 attached. The releasable trolley 20 releasably connects an arm 22 extending to a single panel garage door 24 positioned for movement along a pair of door rails 26 and 28.
  • The [0045] system 8 includes a hand-held RF transmitter unit 30 adapted to send signals to an antenna 32 (see FIG. 4) positioned on the head unit 12 and coupled to a receiver within the head unit 12 as will appear hereinafter. A switch module 39 is mounted on the head unit 12. Switch module 39 includes switches for each of the commands available from a remote transmitter or from an optional wall-mounted switch (not shown). Switch module 39 enables an installer to conveniently request the various learn modes during installation of the head unit 12. The switch module 39 includes a learn switch, a light switch, a lock switch and a command switch, which are described below. Switch module 39 may also include terminals for wiring a pedestrian door state sensor comprising a pair of contacts 13 and 15 for a pedestrian door 11, as well as wiring for an optional wall switch (not shown).
  • The [0046] garage door 24 includes the pedestrian door 11. Contact 13 is mounted to door 24 for contact with contact 15 mounted to pedestrian door 11. Both contacts 13 and 15 are connected via a wire 17 to head unit 12. As will be described further below, when the pedestrian door 11 is closed, electrical contact is made between the contacts 13 and 15 closing a pedestrian door circuit in the receiver in head unit 12 and signalling that the pedestrian door state is closed. This circuit must be closed before the receiver will permit other portions of the operator to move the door 24. If circuit is open, indicating that the pedestrian door state is open, the system will not permit door 24 to move.
  • The [0047] head unit 12 includes a housing comprising four sections: a bottom section 102, a front section 106, a back section 108 and a top section 110, which are held together by screws 112 as shown in FIG. 2. Cover 104 fits into front section 106 and provides a cover for a worklight. External AC power is supplied to the operator 10 through a power cord 112. The AC power is applied to a step-down transformer 120. An electric motor 118 is selectively energized by rectified AC power and drives a sprocket 125 in sprocket assembly 124. The sprocket 125 drives chain 144 (see FIG. 3). A printed circuit board 114 includes a controller 200 and other electronics for operating the head unit 12. A cable 116 provides input and output connections or, signal paths between the printed circuit board 114 and switch module 39. The transmission 18, as shown in FIG. 3, includes a rail 142 which holds chain 144 within a rail and chain housing 140 and holds the chair in tension to transfer mechanical energy from the motor to the door.
  • A block diagram or the controller and motor connections is shown in FIG. 4. [0048] Controller 200 includes an RF receiver 80, a microprocessor 300 and an EEPROM 302. RF receiver 80 of controller 200 receives a command to move the door and actuate the motor either from remote transmitter 30, which transmits an RF signal which is received by antenna 32, or from a user command switch 250. User command switch 250 can be a switch on switch panel 39, mounted on the head unit, or a switch from an optional wall switch. Upon receipt of a door movement command signal from either antenna 32 or user switch 250, the controller 200 sends a power enable signal via line 240 to AC hot connection 206 which provides AC line current to transformer 212 and power to work light 210. Rectified AC is provided from rectifier 214 via line 236 to relays 232 and 234. Depending on the commanded direction of travel, controller 200 provides a signal to either relay 232 or relay 234. Relays 232 and 234 are used to control the direction of rotation of motor 118 by controlling the direction of current flow through the windings. One relay is used for clockwise rotation; the other is used for counterclockwise rotation.
  • Upon receipt of the door movement command signal, [0049] controller 200 sends a signal via line 230 to power-control FET 252. Motor speed is determined by the duration or length of the pulses in the signal to a gate electrode of FET 252. The shorter the pulses, the slower the speed. This completes the circuit between relay 232 and FET 252 providing power to motor 118 via line 254. If the door had been commanded to move in the opposite direction, relay 234 would have been enabled, completing the circuit with FET 252 and providing power to motor 118 via line 238.
  • With power provided, the [0050] motor 118 drives the output shaft 216 which provides drive power to transmission sprocket 125. Gear redaction housing 260 includes an internal pass point system which sends a pass point signal via line 220 to controller 220 whenever the pass point is reached. The pass point signal is provided to controller 200 via current limiting resistor 226 to protect controller 200 from electrostatic discharge (ESD). An RPM interrupt signal is provided via line 224, via current limiting resistor 228, to controller 200. Lead 222 provides a plus five volts supply for the Hall effect sensors in the RPM module. Commanded force is input by two force potentiometers 202, 204. Force potentiometer 202 is used to set the commanded force for UP travel; force potentiometer 204 is used to set the commanded force for DOWN travel. Force potentiometers 202 and 204 provide commanded inputs to controller 200 which are used to adjust the length of the pulsed signal provided to FET 252.
  • The pass point for this system is provided internally in the [0051] motor 118. Referring to FIG. 22, the pass point module 40 is attached to gear reduction housing 260 of motor 118. Pass point module 40 includes upper plate 42 which covers the three internal gears and switch within lower housing 50. Lower housing 50 includes recess 62 having two pins 61 which position switch assembly 52 in recess 62. Housing 50 also includes three cutouts which are sized to support and provide for rotation of the three geared elements. Outer gear 44 fits rotatably within cutout 64. Outer gear includes a smooth outer surface for rotating within housing 50 and inner gear teeth for rotating middle gear 46. Middle gear 46 fits rotatably within inner cutout 66. Middle gear 46 includes a smooth outer surface and a raised portion with gear teeth for being driven by the gear teeth of outer ring gear 44. Inner gear 48 fits within middle gear 46 and is driven by an extension of shaft 216. Rotation of the motor 118 causes shaft 216 to rotate and drive inner gear 48.
  • [0052] Outer gear 44 includes a notch 74 in the outer periphery. Middle gear includes a notch 76 in the outer periphery. Referring to FIG. 22A, rotation of inner gear 48 rotates middle gear 46 in the same direction. Rotation of middle gear 46 rotates outer gear 44 in the same direction. Gears 46 and 44 are sized such that pass point indications comprising switch release cutouts 74 and 76 line up only once during the entire travel distance of the door. As seen in FIG. 22A, when switch release cutouts 74 and 76 line up, switch 72 is open generating a pass point presence signal. The location where switch release cutouts 74 and 76 line up is the pass point. At all other times, at least one of the two gears holds switch 72 closed generating a signal indicating that the pass point has not been reached.
  • The [0053] receiver portion 80 of controller 200 is shown in FIG. 5A. RF signals may be received by the controller 200 at the antenna 32 and fed to the receiver 80. The receiver 80 includes variable inductor L1 and a pair of capacitors C2 and C3 that provide impedance matching between the antenna 32 and other portions of the receiver. An NPN transistor Q4 is connected in common-base configuration as a buffer amplifier. Bias to the buffer amplifier transistor Q4 is provided by resistors R2, R3. The buffered RF output signal is supplied to a second NPN transistor Q5. The radio frequency signal is coupled to a bandpass amplifier 280 to an average detector 282 which feeds a comparator 284. Referring to FIGS. 5C and 5B, the analog output signal A, B is applied to noise reduction capacitors C19, C20 and C21 then provided to pins P32 and P33 of the microcontroller 300. Microcontroller 300 may be a Z86733 microprocessor.
  • An [0054] external transformer 212 receives AC power from a source such as a utility and steps down the AC voltage to the power supply 90 circuit of controller 200. Transformer 212 provides AC current to full-wave bridge circuit 214, which produces a 28 volt full wave rectified signal across capacitor C35. The AC power may have a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz. An external transformer is especially important when motor 118 is a DC motor. The 28 volt rectified signal is used to drive a wall control switch, a obstacle detector circuit, a door-in-door switch and to power FETs Q11 and Q12 used to start the motor. Zener diode D18 protects against overvoltage due to the pulsed current, in particular, from the FETs rapidly switching off inductive load of the motor. The potential of the full-wave rectified signal is further reduced to provide 5 volts at capacitor C38, which is used to power the microprocessor 300, the receiver circuit 80 and other logic functions.
  • The 28 volt rectified power supply signal indicated by reference numeral T in FIG. 5C is voltage divided down by resistors R[0055] 61 and R62, then applied to an input pin P24 of microprocessor 300. This signal is used to provide the phase of the power line current to microprocessor 300. Microprocessor 300 constantly checks for the phase of the line voltage in order to determine if the frequency of the line voltage is 50 Hz or 60 Hz. This information is used to establish the worklight time-out period and to select the look-up table stored in the ROM in the microcontroller for converting pulse width to door speed.
  • When the door is commanded to move, either through a signal from a remote transmitter received through [0056] antenna 32 and processed by receiver 80, or through an optional wall switch, the microprocessor 300 commands the work light to turn on. Microprocessor 300 sends a worklight enable signal from pin P07. The worklight enable signal is applied to the base of transistor Q3, which drives relay K3. AC power from a signal U provides power for operating the worklight 210.
  • [0057] Microprocessor 300 reads from and writes data to an EEPROM 302 via its pins P25, P26 and P27. EEPROM 302 may be a 93C46. Microprocessor 300 provides a light enable signal at pin P21 which is used to enable a learn mode indicator yellow LED D15. LED D15 is enabled or lit when the receiver is in the learn mode. Pin P26 provides double duty. When the user selects switch S1, a learn enable signal is provided to both microprocessor 300 and EEPROM 302. Switch S1 is mounted on the head unit 12 and is part of switch module 39, which is used by the installer to operate the system.
  • An optional flasher module provides an additional level of safety for users and is controlled by [0058] microprocessor 300 at pin P22. The optional flasher module is connected between terminals 308 and 310. In the optional flasher module, after receipt of a door command, the microprocessor 300 sends a signal from P22 which causes the flasher light to blink for 2 seconds. The door does not move during that 2 second period, giving the user notice that the door has been commanded to move and will start to move in 2 seconds. After expiration of the 2 second period, the door moves and the flasher light module blinks during the entire period of door movement. If the operator does not have a flasher module installed in the head unit, when the door is commanded to move, there is no time delay before the door begins to move.
  • [0059] Microprocessor 300 provides the signals which start motor 116, control its direction of rotation (and thus the direction of movement of the door) and the speed of rotation (speed of door travel). FETs Q11 and Q12 are used to start motor 118. Microprocessor 300 applies a pulsed output signal to the gates of FETs Q11 and Q12. The lengths of the pulses determine the time the FETs conduct and thus the amount of time current is applied to start and run the motor 118. The longer the pulse, the longer current is applied, the greater the speed of rotation the motor 118 will develop. Diode D11 is coupled between the 28 volt power supply and is used to clean up flyback voltage to the input bridge D4 when the FETs are conducting. Similarly, Zener diode D19 (see FIG. 5A) is used to protect against overvoltage when the FETs are conducting.
  • Control of the direction of rotation of motor [0060] 118 (and thus direction of travel of the door) is accomplished with two relays, K1 and K2. Relay K1 supplies current to cause the motor to rotate clockwise in an opening direction (door moves UP); relay K2 supplies current to cause the motor to rotate counterclockwise in a closing direction (door moves DOWN). When the door is commanded to move UP, the microprocessor 300 sends an enable signal from pin P05 to the base of transistor Q1, which drives relay K1. When the door is commanded to move DOWN, the microprocessor 300 sends an enable signal from pin P06 to the base of transistor Q2, which drives relay K2.
  • Door-in-[0061] door contacts 13 and 15 are connected to terminals 304 and 306. Terminals 304 and 306 are connected to relays K1 and K2. If the signal between contacts 13 and 15 is broken, the signal across terminals 304 and 306 is open, preventing relays K1 and K2 from energizing. The motor 118 will not rotate and the door 24 will not move until the user closes pedestrian door 11, making contact between contacts 13 and 15.
  • The [0062] pass point signal 220 from the pass point module 40 (see FIG. 21) of motor 118 is applied to pin P23 of microprocessor 300. The RPM signal 224 from the RPM sensor module in motor 118 is applied to pin P31 of microprocessor 300. Application of the pass point signal and the RPM signal is described with reference to the flow charts.
  • An optional wall control, which duplicates the switches on [0063] remote transmitter 30, may be connected to controller 200 at terminals 312 and 314. When the user presses the door command switch 39, a dead short is made to ground, which the microprocessor 300 detects by the failure to detect voltage. Capacitor C22 is provided for RF noise reduction. The dead short to ground is sensed at pins P02 and P03, for redundancy.
  • Switches S[0064] 1 and S2 are part of switch module 39 mounted on head unit 12 and used by the installer for operating the system. As stated above, S1 is the learn switch. S2 is the door command switch. When S2 is pressed, microprocessor 300 detects the dead short at pins P02 and P03.
  • Input from an obstacle detector (not shown) is provided at terminal [0065] 316. This signal is voltage divided down and provided to microprocessor 300 at pins P20 and P30, for redundancy. Except when the door is moving and less than an inch above the floor, when the obstacle detector senses an object in the doorway, the microprocessor executes the auto-reverse routine causing the door to stop and/or reverse depending on the state of the door movement.
  • Force and speed of door travel are determined by two potentiometers. Potentiometer R[0066] 33 adjusts the force and speed of UP travel; potentiometer R34 adjusts the force and speed of DOWN travel. Potentiometers R33 and R34 act as analog voltage dividers. The analog signal from R33, R34 is further divided down by voltage divider R35/R37, R36/R38 before it is applied to the input of comparators 320 and 322. Reference pulses from pins P34 and P35 of microprocessor 300 are compared with the force input from potentiometers R33 and R34 in comparators 320 and 322. The output of comparators 320 and 322 is applied to pins P01 and P00.
  • To perform the A/D conversion, the [0067] microprocessor 300 samples the output of the comparators 320 and 322 at pins P00 and P01 to determine which voltage is higher: the voltage from the potentiometer R33 or R34 (IN) or the voltage from the reference pin P34 or P35 (REF). If the potentiometer voltage is higher than the reference, then the microprocessor outputs a pulse. If not, the output voltage is held low. The RC filter (R39, C29/R40, C30) converts the pulses into a DC voltage equivalent to the duty cycle of the pulses. By outputting the pulses in the manner described above, the microprocessor creates a voltage at REF which dithers around the voltage at IN. The microprocessor then calculates the duty cycle of the pulse output which directly correlates to the voltage seen at IN.
  • When power is applied to the [0068] head unit 12 including controller 200, microprocessor 300 executes a series of routines. With power applied, microprocessor 300 executes the main routines shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B. The main loop 400 includes three basic functions, which are looped continuously until power is removed. In block 402 the microprocessor 300 handles all non-radio EEPROM communications and disables radio access to the EEPROM 302 when communicating. This ensures that during normal operation, i.e., when the garage door operator is not being programmed, the remote transmitter does not have access to the EEPROM, where transmitter codes are stored. Radio transmissions are processed upon receipt of a radio interrupt (see below).
  • In [0069] block 404, microprocessor 300 maintains all low priority tasks, such as calculating new force levels and minimum speed. Preferably, a set of redundant RAM registers is provided. In the event of an unforeseen event (e.g., an ESD event) which corrupts regular RAM, the main RAM registers and the redundant RAM registers will not match. Thus, when the values in RAM do not match, the routine knows the regular RAM has been corrupted. (See block 504 below.) In block 406, microprocessor 300 tests redundant RAM registers. Several interrupt routines can take priority over blocks 402, 404 and 406.
  • The infrared obstacle detector generates an asynchronous IR interrupt signal which is a series of pulses. The absence of the obstacle detector pulses indicates an obstruction in the beam. After processing the IR interrupt, [0070] microprocessor 300 sets the status of the obstacle detector as unobstructed at block 416.
  • Receipt of a transmission from [0071] remote transmitter 30 generates an asynchronous radio interrupt at block 410. At block 418, if in the door command mode, microprocessor 300 parses incoming radio signals and sets a flag if the signal matches a stored code. If in the learn mode, microprocessor 300 stores the new transmitter codes in the EEPROM.
  • An asynchronous interrupt is generated if a remote communications unit is connected to an optional RS-[0072] 232 communications port located on the head unit. Upon receipt of the hardware interrupt, microprocessor 300 executes a serial data communications routine for transferring and storing data from the remote hardware.
  • [0073] Hardware timer 0 interrupt is shown in block 422. In block 422, microprocessor 300 reads the incoming AC line signal from pin P24 and handles the motor phase control output. The incoming line signal is used to determine if the line voltage is 50 Hz for the foreign market or 60 Hz for the domestic market. With each interrupt, microprocessor 300, at block 426, task switches among three tasks. In block 428, microprocessor 300 updates software timers. In block 430, microprocessor 300 debounces wall control switch signals. In block 432, microprocessor 300 controls the motor state, including motor direction relay outputs and motor safety systems.
  • When the [0074] motor 118 is running, it generates an asynchronous RPM interrupt at block 434. When microprocessor 300 receives the asynchronous RPM interrupt at pin P31, it calculates the motor RPM period at block 436, then updates the position of the door at block 438.
  • Further details of [0075] main loop 400 are shown in FIGS. 7A through 7H. The first step executed in main loop 400 is block 450, where the microprocessor checks to see if the pass point has been passed since the last update. If it has, the routine branches to block 452, where the microprocessor 300 updates the position of the door relative to the pass point in EEPROM 302 or non-volatile memory. The routine then continues at block 454. An optional safety feature of the garage door operator system enables the worklight, when the door is open and stopped and the infrared beam in the obstacle detector is broken.
  • At block [0076] 454, the microprocessor checks if the enable/disable of the worklight for this feature has been changed. Some users want the added safety feature; others prefer to save the electricity used. If new input has been provided, the routine branches to block 456 and sets the status of the obstacle detector-controlled worklight in non-volatile memory in accordance with the new input. Then the routine continues to block 458 where the routine checks to determine if the worklight has been turned on without the timer. A separate switch is provided on both the remote transmitter 30 and the head unit at module 39 to enable the user to switch on the worklight without operating the door command switch. If no, the routine skips to block 470.
  • If yes, the routine checks at [0077] block 460 to see if the one-shot flag has been set for an obstacle detector beam break. If no, the routine skips to block 470. If yes, the routine checks if the obstacle detector controlled worklight is enabled at block 462. If not, the routine skips to block 470. If it is, the routine checks if the door is stopped in the fully open position at block 464. If no, the routine skips to block 470. If yes, the routine calls the SetVarLight subroutine (see FIG. 8) to enable the appropriate turn off time (4.5 minutes for 60 Hz systems or 2.5 minutes for 50 Hz systems). At block 468, the routine turns on the worklight.
  • At [0078] block 470, the microprocessor 300 clears the one-shot flag for the infrared beam break. This resets the obstacle detector, so that a later beam break can generate an interrupt. At block 472, if the user has installed a temporary password usable for a fixed period of time, the microprocessor 300 updates the non-volatile timer for the radio temporary password. At block 474, the microprocessor 300 refreshes the RAM registers for radio mode from non-volatile memory (EEPROM 302). At block 476, the microprocessor 300 refreshes I/O port directions, i.e., whether each of the ports is to be input or output. At block 478, the microprocessor 300 updates the status of the radio lockout flag, if necessary. The radio lockout flag prevents the microprocessor from responding to a signal from a remote transmitter. A radio interrupt (described below) will disable the radio lockout flag and enable the remote transmitter to communicate with the receiver.
  • At block [0079] 480, the microprocessor 300 checks if the door is about to travel. If not, the routine skips to block 502. If the door is about to travel, the microprocessor 300 checks if the limits are being trained at block 482. If they are, the routine skips to block 502. If not, the routine asks at block 484 if travel is UP or DOWN. If DOWN, the routine refreshes the DOWN limit from non-volatile memory (EEPROM 302) at block 486. If UP, the routine refreshes the UP limit from non-volatile memory (EEPROM 302) at block 488. The routine updates the current operating state and position relative to the pass point in non-volatile memory at block 490. This is a redundant read for stability of the system.
  • At block [0080] 492, the routine checks for completion of a limit training cycle. If training is complete, the routine branches to block 494 where the new limit settings and position relative to the pass point are written to non-volatile memory.
  • The routine then updates the counter for the number of operating cycles at block [0081] 496. This information can be downloaded at a later time and used to determine when certain parts need to be replaced. At block 498 the routine checks if the number of cycles is a multiple of 256. Limiting the storage of this information to multiples of 256 limits the number of times the system has to write to that register. If yes it updates the history of force settings at block 500. If not, the routine continues to block 502.
  • At [0082] block 502 the routine updates the learn switch debouncer. At block 504 the routine performs a continuity check by comparing the backup (redundant) RAM registers with the main registers. If they do not match, the routine branches to block 506. If the registers do not match, the RAM memory has been corrupted and the system is not safe to operate, so a reset is commanded. At this point, the system powers up as if power had been removed and reapplied and the first step is a self test of the system (all installation settings are unchanged).
  • If the answer to block [0083] 504 is yes, the routine continues to block 508 where the routine services any incoming serial messages from the optional wall control (serial messages might be user input start or stop commands). The routine then loads the UP force timing from the ROM look-up table, using the user setting as an index at block 510. Force potentiometers R33 and R34 are set by the user. The analog values set by the user are converted to digital values. The digital values are used as an index to the look-up table stored in memory. The value indexed from the look-up table is then used as the minimum motor speed measurement. When the motor runs, the routine compares the selected value from the look-up table with the digital timing from the RPM routine to ensure the force is acceptable.
  • Instead of calculating the force each time the force potentiometers are set, a look-up table is provided for each potentiometer. The range of values based on the range of user inputs is stored in ROM and used to save microprocessor processing time. The system includes two force limits: one for the UP force and one for the DOWN force. Two force limits provide a safer system. A heavy door may require more UP force to lift, but need a lower DOWN force setting (and therefore a slower closing speed) to provide a soft closure. A light door will need less UP force to open the door and possibly a greater DOWN force to provide a full closure. [0084]
  • Next the force timing is divided by power level of the motor for the door to scale the maximum force timeout at block [0085] 512. This step scales the force reversal point based on the maximum force for the door. The maximum force for the door is determined based on the size of the door, i.e. the distance the door travels. Single piece doors travel a greater distance than segmented doors. Short doors require less force to move than normal doors. The maximum force for a short door is scaled down to 60 percent of the maximum force available for a normal door. So, at block 512, if the force setting is set by the user, for example at 40 percent, and the door is a normal door (i.e., a segmented door or multi-paneled door), the force is scaled to 40 percent of 100 percent. If the door is a short door (i.e., a single panel door), the force is scaled to 40 percent of 60 percent, or 24 percent.
  • At block [0086] 514, the routine loads the DOWN force timing from the ROM look-up table, using the user setting as an index. At block 516, the routine divides the force timing by the power level of the motor for the door to scale the force to the speed.
  • At block [0087] 518 the routine checks if the door is traveling DOWN. If yes, the routine disables use of the MinSpeed Register at block 524 and loads the MinSpeed Register with the DOWN force setting, i.e., the value read from the DOWN force potentiometer at block 526. If not, the routine disables use of the MinSpeed Register at block 520 and loads the MinSpeed Register with the UP force setting from the force potentiometer at block 522.
  • The routine continues at block [0088] 528 where the routine subtracts 20 from the MinSpeed value. The MinSpeed value ranges from 0 to 63. The system uses 64 levels of force. If the result is negative at block 530, the routine clears the MinSpeed Register at block 532 to effectively truncate the lower 38 percent of the force settings. If no, the routine divides the minimum speed by 4 to scale 8 speeds to 32 force settings at block 534. At block 536, the routine adds 4 into the minimum speed to correct the offset, and clips the result to a maximum of 12. At block 538 the routine enables use of the MinSpeed Register.
  • At block [0089] 540 the routine checks if the period of the rectified AC line signal (input to microprocessor 300 at pin P24) is less than 9 milliseconds (indicating the line frequency is 60 Hz). If it is, the routine skips to block 548. If not, the routine checks if the light shut-off timer is active at block 542. If not, the routine skips to block 548. If yes, the routine checks if the light time value is greater than 2.5 minutes at block 544. If no, the routine skips to block 548. If yes, the routine calls the SetVarLight subroutine (see FIG. 8), to correct the light timing setting, at block 546.
  • At block [0090] 548 the routine checks if the radio signal has been clear for 100 milliseconds or more. If not, the routine skips to block 552. If yes, the routine clears the radio at block 550. At block 552, the routine resets the watchdog timer. At block 554, the routine loops to the beginning of the main loop.
  • The SetVarLight subroutine, FIG. 8, is called whenever the door is commanded to move and the worklight is to be turned on. When the SetVarLight subroutine, block [0091] 558 is called, the subroutine checks if the period of the rectified power line signal (pin P24 of microprocessor 300) is greater than or equal to 9 milliseconds. If yes, the line frequency is 50 Hz, and the timer is set to 2.5 minutes at block 564. If no, the line frequency is 60 Hz and the timer is set to 4.5 minutes at block 562. After setting, the subroutine returns to the call point at block 566.
  • The hardware timer interrupt subroutine operated by [0092] microprocessor 300, shown at block 422, runs every 0.256 milliseconds. Referring to FIGS. 9A-9C, when the subroutine is first called, it sets the radio interrupt status as indicated by the software flags at block 580. At block 582, the subroutine updates the software timer extension. The next series of steps monitor the AC power line frequency (pin P24 of microprocessor 300). At step 584, the subroutine checks if the rectified power line input is high (checks for a leading edge). If yes, the subroutine skips to block 594, where it increments the power line high time counter, then continues to block 596. If no, the subroutine checks if the high time counter is below 2 milliseconds at block 586. If yes, the subroutine skips to block 594. If no, the subroutine sets the measured power line time in RAM at block 588. The subroutine then resets the power line high time counter at block 590 and resets the phase timer register in block 592.
  • At [0093] block 596, the subroutine checks if the motor power level is set at 100 percent. If yes, the subroutine turns on the motor phase control output at block 606. If no, the subroutine checks if the motor power level is set at 0 percent at block 598. If yes, the subroutine turns off the motor phase control output at block 604. If no, the phase timer register is decremented at block 600 and the result is checked for sign. If positive the subroutine branches to block 606; if negative the subroutine branches to block 604.
  • The subroutine continues at [0094] block 608 where the incoming RPM signal (at pin P31 of microprocessor 300) is digitally filtered. Then the time prescaling task switcher (which loops through 8 tasks identified at blocks 620, 630, 640, 650) is incremented at block 610. The task switcher varies from 0 to 7. At block 612, the subroutine branches to the proper task depending on the value of the task switcher.
  • If the task switcher is at value 2 (this occurs every 4 milliseconds), the execute motor state machine subroutine is called at [0095] block 620. If the task is value 0 or 4 (this occurs every 2 milliseconds), the wall control switches are debounced at block 630. If the task value is 6 (this occurs every 4 milliseconds), the execute 4 ms timer subroutine is called at block 640. If the task is value 1, 3, 5 or 7, the 1 millisecond timer subroutine is called at block 650. Upon completion of the called subroutine, the 0.256 millisecond timer subroutine returns at block 614.
  • Details of the 1 ms timer subroutine (block [0096] 650) are shown in FIGS. 10A-10C. When this subroutine is called, the first step is to update the A/D converters on the UP and DOWN force setting potentiometers (P34 and P35 of microprocessor 300) at block 652. At block 654, the subroutine checks if the A/D conversion (comparison at comparators 320 and 322) is complete. If yes, the measured potentiometer values are stored at block 656. Then the stored values (which vary from 0 to 127) are divided by 2 to obtain the 64 level force setting at block 658. If no, the subroutine decrements the infrared obstacle detector timeout timer at block 660. In block 662, the subroutine checks if the timer has reached zero. If no, the subroutine skips to block 672. If yes, the subroutine resets the infrared obstacle detector timeout timer at block 664. The flag setting for the obstacle detector signal is checked at block 666. If no, the one-shot break flag is set at block 668. If yes, the flag is set indicating the obstacle detector signal is absent at block 670.
  • At [0097] block 672, the subroutine increments the radio time out register. Then the infrared obstacle detector reversal timer is decremented at block 674. The pass point input is debounced at block 676. The 125 millisecond prescaler is incremented at block 678. Then the prescaler is checked if it has reached 63 milliseconds at block 680. If yes, the fault blinking LED is updated at block 682. If no, the prescaler is checked if it has reached 125 ms at block 684. If yes, the 125 ms timer subroutine is executed at block 686. If no, the routine returns at block 688.
  • The 125 millisecond timer subroutine (block [0098] 690) is used to manage the power level of the motor 118. At block 692, the subroutine updates the RS-232 mode timer and exits the RS-232 mode timer if necessary. The same pair of wires is used for both wall control switches and RS-232 communication. If RS-232 communication is received while in the wall control mode, the RS-232 mode is entered. If four seconds passes since the last RS-232 word was received, then the RS-232 timer times out and reverts to the wall control mode. At block 694 the subroutine checks if the motor is set to be stopped. If yes, the subroutine skips to block 716 and sets the motor's power level to 0 percent. If no, the subroutine checks if the pre-travel safety light is flashing at block 696 (if the optional flasher module has been installed, a light will flash for 2 seconds before the motor is permitted to travel and then flash at a predetermined interval during motor travel). If yes, the subroutine skips to block 716 and sets the motor's power level to 0 percent.
  • If no, the subroutine checks if the [0099] microprocessor 300 is in the last phase of a limit training mode at block 698. If yes, the subroutine skips to block 710. If no, the subroutine checks if the microprocessor 300 is in another part of the limit training mode at block 700. If no, the subroutine skips to block 710. If yes, the subroutine checks if the minimum speed (as determined by the force settings) is greater than 40 percent at block 704. If no, the power level is set to 40 percent at block 708. If yes, the power level is set equal to the minimum speed stored in MinSpeed Register at block 706.
  • At [0100] block 710 the subroutine checks if the flag is set to slow down. If yes, the subroutine checks if the motor is running above or below minimum speed at block 714. If above minimum speed, the power level of the motor is decremented one step increment (one step increment is preferably 5% of maximum motor speed) at block 722. If below the minimum speed, the power level of the motor is incremented one step increment (which is preferably 5% of maximum motor speed) to minimum speed at block 720.
  • If the flag is not set to slow down at [0101] block 710, the subroutine checks if the motor is running at maximum allowable speed at block 712. If no, the power level of the motor is incremented one step increment (which is preferably 5% of maximum motor speed) at block 720. If yes, the flag is set for motor ramp-up speed complete.
  • The subroutine continues at [0102] block 724 where it checks if the period of the rectified AC power line (pin P24 of microprocessor 300) is greater than or equal to 9 ms. If no, the subroutine fetches the motor's phase control information (indexed from the power level) from the 60 Hz look-up table stored in ROM at block 728. If yes, the subroutine fetches the motor's phase control information (indexed from the power level) from the 50 Hz look-up table stored in ROM at block 726.
  • The subroutine tests for a user enable/disable of the infrared obstacle detector-controlled worklight feature at [0103] block 730. Then the user radio learning timers, ZZWIN (at the wall keypad if installed) and AUXLEARNSW (radio on air and worklight command) are updated at block 732. The software watchdog timer is updated at block 734 and the fault blinking LED is updated at block 736. The subroutine returns at block 738.
  • The 4 millisecond timer subroutine is used to check on various systems which do not require updating as often as more critical systems. Referring to FIGS. 12A and 12B, the subroutine is called at [0104] block 640. At block 750, the RPM safety timers are updated. These timers are used to determine if the door has engaged the floor. The RPM safety timer is a one second delay before the operator begins to look for a falling door, i.e., one second after stopping. There are two different forces used in the garage door operator. The first type force are the forces determined by the UP and DOWN force potentiometers. These force levels determine the speed at which the door travels in the UP and DOWN directions. The second type of force is determined by the decrease in motor speed due to an external force being applied to the door (an obstacle or the floor). This programmed or pre-selected external force is the maximum force that the system will accept before an auto-reverse or stop is commanded.
  • A [0105] block 752 the 0.5 second RPM timer is checked to see if it has expired. If yes, the 0.5 second timer is reset at block 754. At block 756 safety checks are performed on the RPM seen during the last 0.5 seconds to prevent the door from falling. The 0.5 second timer is chosen so the maximum force achieved at the trolley will reach 50 kilograms in 0.5 seconds if the motor is operating at 100 percent of power.
  • At [0106] block 758, the subroutine updates the 1 second timer for the optional light flasher module. In this embodiment, the preferred flash period is 1 second. At block 760 the radio dead time and dropout timers are updated. At block 762 the learn switch is debounced. At block 764 the status of the worklight is updated in accordance with the various light timers. At block 766 the optional wall control blink timer is updated. The optional wall control includes a light which blinks when the door is being commanded to auto-reverse in response to an infrared obstacle detector signal break. At block 768 the subroutine returns.
  • Further details of the asynchronous RPM signal interrupt, block [0107] 434, are shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B. This signal, which is provided to microprocessor 300 at pin P31, is used to control the motor speed and the position detector. Door position is determined by a value relative to the pass point. The pass point is set at 0. Positions above the pass point are negative; positions below the pass point are positive. When the door travels to the UP limit, the position detector (or counter) determines the position based on the number of RPM pulses to the UP limit number. When the door travels DOWN to the DOWN limit, the position detector counts the number of RPM pulses to the DOWN limit number. The UP and DOWN limit numbers are stored in a register.
  • At [0108] block 782 the RPM interrupt subroutine calculates the period of the incoming RPM signal. If the door is traveling UP, the subroutine calculates the difference between two successive pulses. If the door is traveling DOWN, the subroutine calculates the difference between two successive pulses. At block 784, the subroutine divides the period by 8 to fit into a binary word. At block 786 the subroutine checks if the motor speed is ramping up. This is the max force mode. RPM timeout will vary from 10 to 500 milliseconds. Note that these times are recommended for a DC motor. If an AC motor is used, the maximum time would be scaled down to typically 24 milliseconds. A 24 millisecond period is slower than the breakdown RPM of the motor and therefore beyond the maximum possible force of most preferred motors. If yes, the RPM timeout is set at 500 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) at block 790. If no, the subroutine sets the RPM timeout as the rounded-up value of the force setting in block 788.
  • At [0109] block 792 the subroutine checks for the direction of travel. This is found in the state machine register. If the door is traveling DOWN, the position counter is incremented at block 796 and the pass point debouncer is sampled at block 800. At block 804, the subroutine checks for the falling edge of the pass point signal. If the falling edge is present, the subroutine returns at block 814. If there is a pass point falling edge, the subroutine checks for the lowest pass point (in cases where more than one pass point is used). If this is not the lowest pass point, the subroutine returns at block 814. If it is the only pass point or the lowest pass point, the position counter is zeroed and the subroutine returns at block 814.
  • If the door is traveling UP, the subroutine decrements the position counter at [0110] block 794 and samples the pass point debouncer at block 798. Then it checks for the rising edge of the pass point signal at block 802. If there is no pass point signal rising edge, the subroutine returns at block 814. If there is, it checks for the lowest pass point at block 806. If no the subroutine returns at block 814. If yes, the subroutine zeroes the position counter and returns at block 814.
  • The motor state machine subroutine, block [0111] 620, is shown in FIG. 14. It keeps track of the state of the motor. At block 820, the subroutine updates the false obstacle detector signal output, which is used in systems that do not require an infrared obstacle detector. At block 822, the subroutine checks if the software watchdog timer has reached too high a value. If yes, a system reset is commanded at block 824. If no, at block 826, it checks the state of the motor stored in the motor state register located in EEPROM 302 and executes the appropriate subroutine.
  • If the door is traveling UP, the UP direction subroutine at [0112] block 832 is executed. If the door is traveling DOWN, the DOWN direction subroutine is executed at block 828. If the door is stopped in the middle of the travel path, the stop in midtravel subroutine is executed at block 838. If the door is fully closed, the DOWN position subroutine is executed at block 830. If the door is fully open, the UP position subroutine is executed at block 834. If the door is reversing, the auto-reverse subroutine is executed at block 836.
  • When the door is stopped in midtravel, the subroutine at [0113] block 838 is called, as shown in FIG. 15. In block 840 the subroutine updates the relay safety system (ensuring that relays K1 and K2 are open). The subroutine checks for a received wall command or radio command. If there is no received command, the subroutine updates the worklight status and returns. If yes, the motor power is set to 20 percent at block 844 and the motor state is set to traveling DOWN at block 846. The worklight status is updated and the subroutine returns at block 850. If the door is stopped in midtravel and a door command is received, the door is set to close. The next time the system calls the motor state machine subroutine, the motor state machine will call the DOWN direction subroutine. The door must close to the DOWN limit before it can be opened to the full UP limit.
  • If the state machine indicates the door is in the DOWN position (i.e. the DOWN limit position), the DOWN position subroutine, block [0114] 830, at FIG. 16 is called. When the door is in the DOWN position, the subroutine checks if a wall control or radio command has been received. If no, the subroutine updates the light and returns at block 858. If yes, the motor power is set to 20 percent at block 854 and the motor state register is set to show the state is traveling UP at block 856. The subroutine then updates the light and returns at block 858.
  • The UP direction subroutine, block [0115] 832, is shown in FIGS. 17A-17C. At block 860 the subroutine waits until the main loop refreshes the UP limit from EEPROM 302. Then it checks if 40 milliseconds have passed since closing of the light relay K3 at block 862. If not, the subroutine returns. If yes, the subroutine checks for flashing the warning light prior to travel at block 866 (only if the optional flasher module is installed). If the light is flashing, the status of the blinking light is updated and the subroutine returns at block 868. If not, the flashing is terminated, the motor UP relay is turned on at block 870. Then the subroutine waits until 1 second has passed after the motor was turned on at block 872. If no, the subroutine skips to block 888. If yes, the subroutine checks for the RPM signal timeout. If no, the subroutine checks if the motor speed is ramping up at block 876 by checking the value of the RAMPFLAG register in RAM (i.e., UP, DOWN, FULLSPEED, STOP). If yes, the subroutine skips to block 888. If no, the subroutine checks if the measured RPM is longer than the allowable RPM period at block 878. If no, the subroutine continues at block 888.
  • If the RPM signal has timed out at [0116] block 874 or the measured time period is longer than allowable at block 878, the subroutine branches to block 880. At block 880, the reason is set as force obstruction. At block 882, if the training limits are being set, the training status is updated. At block 884 the motor power is set to zero and the state is set as stopped in midtravel. At block 886 the subroutine returns.
  • At block [0117] 888 the subroutine checks if the door's exact position is known. If it is not, the door's distance from the UP limit is updated in block 890 by subtracting the UP limit stored in RAM from the position of the door also stored in RAM. Then the subroutine checks at block 892 if the door is beyond its UP limit. If yes, the subroutine sets the reason as reaching the limit in block 894. Then the subroutine checks if the limits are being trained. If yes, the limit training machine is updated at block 898. If no, the motor's power is set as zero and the motor state is set at the UP position in block 900. Then the subroutine returns at block 902.
  • If the door is not beyond its UP limit, the subroutine checks if the door is being manually positioned in the training cycle at [0118] block 904. If not, the door position within the slowdown distance of the limit is checked at block 906. If yes, the motor slow down flag is set at block 910. If the door is being positioned manually at block 904 or the door is not within the slow down distance, the subroutine skips to block 912. At block 912 the subroutine checks if a wall control or radio command has been received. If yes, the motor power is set at zero and the state is set at stopped in midtravel as block 916. If no, the system checks if the motor has been running for over 27 seconds at block 914. If yes, the motor power is set at zero and the motor state is set at stopped in midtravel at block 916. Then the subroutine returns at block 918.
  • Referring to FIG. 18, the auto-[0119] reverse subroutine block 836 is described. (Force reversal is stopping the motor for 0.5 seconds, then traveling UP.) At block 920 the subroutine updates the 0.5 second reversal timer (the force reversal timer described above). Then the subroutine checks at block 922 for expiration of the force-reversal timer. If yes, the motor power is set to 20 percent at block 924 and the motor state is set to traveling UP at block 926 and the subroutine returns at block 932. If the timer has not expired, the subroutine checks for receipt of a wall command or radio command at block 928. If yes, the motor power is set to zero and the state is set at stopped in midtravel at block 930, then the subroutine returns at block 932. If no, the subroutine returns at block 932.
  • The UP position routine, block [0120] 834, is shown in FIG. 19. Door travel limits training is started with the door in the UP position. At block 934, the subroutine updates the relay safety system. Then the subroutine checks for receipt of a wall command or radio command at block 936 indicating an intervening user command. If yes, the motor power is set to 20 percent at block 938 and the state is set at traveling DOWN in block 940. Then the light is updated and the subroutine returns at block 950. If no wall command has been received, the subroutine checks for training the limits at block 942. If no, the light is updated and the subroutine returns at block 950. If yes, the limit training state machine is updated at block 944. Then the subroutine checks if it is time to travel DOWN at block 946. If no, the subroutine updates the light and returns at block 950. If it is time to travel DOWN, the state is set at traveling DOWN at block 948 and the system returns at block 950.
  • The DOWN direction subroutine, block [0121] 828, is shown in FIGS. 20A-20D. At block 952, the subroutine waits until the main loop routine refreshes the DOWN limit from EEPROM 302. For safety purposes, only the main loop or the remote transmitter (radio) can access data stored in or written to the EEPROM 302. Because EEPROM communication is handled within software, it is necessary to ensure that two software routines do not try to communicate with the EEPROM at the same time (and have a data collision). Therefore, EEPROM communication is allowed only in the Main Loop and in the Radio routine, with the Main loop having a busy flag to prevent the radio from communicating with the EEPROM at the same time. At block 954, the subroutine checks if 40 milliseconds has passed since closing of the light relay K3. If no, the subroutine returns at block 956. If yes, the subroutine checks if the warning light is flashing (for 2 seconds if the optional flasher module is installed) prior to travel at block 958. If yes, the subroutine updates the status of the flashing light and returns at block 960. If no, or the flashing is completed, the subroutine turns on the DOWN motor relay K2 at block 962. At block 964 the subroutine checks if one second has passed since the motor is first turned on. The system ignores the force on the motor for the first one second. This allows the motor time to overcome the inertia of the door (and exceed the programmed force settings) without having to adjust the programmed force settings for ramp up, normal travel and slow down. Force is effectively set to maximum during ramp up to overcome sticky doors.
  • If the one second time has not passed, the subroutine skips to block [0122] 984. If the one second time limit has passed, the subroutine checks for the RPM signal time out at block 966. If no, the subroutine checks if the motor speed is currently being ramped up at block 968 (this is a maximum force condition). If yes, the routine skips to block 984. If no, the subroutine checks if the measured RPM period is longer than the allowable RPM period. If no, the subroutine continues at block 984.
  • If either the RPM signal has timed out (block [0123] 966) or the RPM period is longer than allowable (block 970), this is an indication of an obstruction or the door has reached the DOWN limit position, and the subroutine skips to block 972. At block 972, the subroutine checks if the door is positioned beyond the DOWN limit setting. If it is, the subroutine skips to block 990 where it checks if the motor has been powered for at least one second. This one second power period after the DOWN limit has been reached provides for the door to close fully against the floor. This is especially important when DC motors are used. The one second period overcomes the internal braking effect of the DC motor on shut-off. Auto-reverse is disabled after the position detector reaches the DOWN limit.
  • If the motor has been running for one second, at block [0124] 990, the subroutine sets the reason as reaching the limit at block 994. The subroutine then checks if the limits are being trained at block 998. If yes, the limit training machine is updated at block 1002. If no, the motor's power is set to zero and the motor state is set at the DOWN position in block 1006. In block 1008 the subroutine returns.
  • If the motor has not been running for at least one second at block [0125] 990, the subroutine sets the reason as early limit at block 1026. Then the subroutine sets the motor power at zero and the motor state as auto-reverse at block 1028 and returns at block 1030.
  • Returning to block [0126] 984, the subroutine checks if the door's position is currently unknown. If yes, the subroutine skips to block 1004. If no, the subroutine updates the door's distance from the DOWN limit using internal RAM in microprocessor 300 in block 986. Then the subroutine checks at block 988 if the door is three inches beyond the DOWN limit. If yes, the subroutine skips to block 990. If no, the subroutine checks if the door is being positioned manually in the training cycle at block 992. If yes, the subroutine skips to block 1004. If no, the subroutine checks if the door is within the slow DOWN distance of the limit at block 996. If no, the subroutine skips to block 1004. If yes, the subroutine sets the motor slow down flag at block 1000.
  • At [0127] block 1004, the subroutine checks if a wall control command or radio command has been received. If yes, the subroutine sets the motor power at zero and the state as auto-reverse at block 1012. If no, the subroutine checks if the motor has been running for over 27 seconds at block 1010. If yes, the subroutine sets the motor power at zero and the state at auto-reverse. If no, the subroutine checks if the obstacle detector signal has beer, missing for 12 milliseconds or more at block 1014 indicating the presence of the obstacle or the failure of the detector. If no, the subroutine returns at block 1018. If yes, the subroutine checks if the wall control or radio signal is being held to override the infrared obstacle detector at block 1016. If yes, the subroutine returns at block 1018. If no, the subroutine sets the reason as infrared obstacle detector obstruction at block 1020. The subroutine then sets the motor power at zero and the state as auto-reverse at block 1022 and returns at block 1024. (The auto-reverse routine stops the motor for 0.5 seconds then causes the door to travel up.)
  • The appendix attached hereto includes a source listing of a series of routines used to operate a movable barrier operator in accordance with the present invention. [0128]
  • While there has been illustrated and described a particular embodiment of the present invention, it will be appreciated that numerous changes and modifications will occur to those skilled in the art, and it is intended in the appended claims to cover all those changes and modifications which followed in the true spirit and scope of the present invention. [0129]
    APPENDIX
    PRO7000 DC Motor Operator
    Manual forces, automatic limits
    New learn switch for learning the limits
    Code based on Flex GDO
    Notes:
    Motor is controlled via two Form C relays to control direction
    Motor speed is controlled via a fet (2 IRF540's in parallel) with a
    phase control PWM applies.
    Wall control (and RS232) are P98 with a redundant smart button and
    command button on the logic board
    Flex GDO Logic Board
    Fixed AND Rolling Code Functionality
    Learn from keyless entry transmitter
    Posi-lock
    Turn on light from broken IR beam (when at up limit)
    Keyless entry temporary password based on number of hours or number
    of activations. (Rolling code mode only)
    GDO is initialized to a ‘clean slate’ mode when the memory is erased.
    In this mode, the GDO will receive either fixed or rolling codes.
    When the first radio code is learned, the GDO locks itself into that
    mode (fixed or rolling) until the memory is again erased.
    Rolling code derived from the Leaded67 code
    Using the 8K zilog 233 chip
    Timer interrupt needed to be 2X faster
    Revision history
    Revision 1.1:
     Changed light from broken IP beam to work in both fixed and rolling
     modes.
     Changed light from IR beam to work only on beam break, not on beam
     block.
    Revision 1.2:
     Learning rolling code formely erased fixed code. Mode is now
     determined by first transmitter learned after radio erase.
    Revision 1.3:
     Moved radio interrupt disable to reception of 20 bits.
     Changed mode of radio switching. Formely toggled upon radio error,
     now switches in pseudo-random fashion depending upon value of
     125 ms timer.
    Revision 1.4:
     Optimized portion of radio after bit value is determined. Used
     relative addressing to speed code and minimize ROM size.
    Revision 1.5:
     Changed mode of learning transmitters. Learn command is now
     light-command, learn light is now light-lock, and learn open/close/
     stop is lock-command. (Command was press light, press command,
     release light, release command, worklight was press light, press
     command,
     release command, release light, o/c/s was press lock, press command,
     release command, release lock. This caused DOG2 to reset
    Revision 1.6:
     Light button and light transmitter now ignored during travel.
     Switch data cleared only after a command switch is checked.
    Revision 1.7:
     Rejected fixed mode (and fixed mode test) when learning light and
    open/close/stop transmitters.
    Revision 1.8:
     Changed learn from wall control to work obly when both switches are
     held. Modified force pot. read routine (moved enabling of blank
     time and disabling of interrupts. Fixed mode now learns command
     with any combination of wall control switches.
    Revision 1.9:
     Changed PWM output to go from 0-50% duty cycle. This eliminated
     the problem of PWM interrupts causing problems near 100% duty cycle.
     THIS REVISION REQUIRES A HARDWARE CHANGE.
    Revision 1.9A:
     Enabled ROM chacksum. Cleaned up documentation.
    Revision 2.0:
     Blank tire noise immunity,. If noise signal is detected during blank time
     the data already received is not thrown out. The data is retained, and the
     noise pulse identified as such. The interrupt is enabled to contine to look
     for the sync pulse.
    Revision 2.0A:
     On the event that the noise pulse is of the same duration as the sync
     pulse the time between sync and first data pulse (inactive time) is
     measured The inactive time is 5.14 ms for billion code and 2.4 ms for
     rolling code. If it is determined that the previously received sync is
     indeed a noise pulse, the pulse is thrown out and the micro continules to
     lock for a sync pulse as in Rev. 2.0.
    Revision 2.1:
     To make the blank time more impervious to noise, the sync pulses are
     differentiated between. Fixed max width is 4.6 ms, roll max width is 2.3
     ms.
     This is simular to the inactive time check done in Rev. 2.0A.
    Revision 2.2:
     The worklight function; when the IP beam is broken and the door is at
     the up limit the light will turn on for 4.5 min. This revision allows
     the worklight function to be enabled and disabled by the user. The
     function will come enabled from the factor.
     To disable, with the light off press and hold the light button for 7 sec.
     The light will come on and after 5 sec. the function is disabled the light
     will turn off. To enable the function, turn the light on, release the
     button, then press and hold the light button down for 5 sec. The light
     will turn off and after the function has been enable in 5 sec.
     the light will turn on.
    Revision 3.0:
     Integrated in functionality for Siminor rolling code transmitter. The
     Siminor transmitter may be received whenever a C code transmitter may
     be received.
     Siminor transmitters are able to perform as a standard command or as a
     light control transmitter, but not as an open/close/stop transmitter.
    Revision 3.1:
     Modified handling of rolling code counter (in mirroring and adding) to
     improve efficiency and hopefully kill all short cycles when a radio is
     jammed on the
     air.
    PROD000
    Revision 0.1:
     Removed physical radio tests
     Disabled radio temporarily
     Put in sign bit test for limits
     Automatic limits working
    Revision 0.2:
     Provided for traveling up when too close to limit
    Revision 0.3:
     Changed force pot. read to new routine.
     Disabled T1 interrupt and all old force pot. code
     Disabled all RS232 output
    Revision 0.4:
     Added in (veerrrry) rough force into pot. read routine
    Revision 0.5:
     Changed EEPROM in comments to add in up limit, last operation, and
     down limit.
     Created OnePass register
     Added in limit read from nonvolatile when going to a moving state
     Added in limit read on power-up
     Created passcounter register to keep track of pass point(s)
     Installed basic wake-up routine to restore position based on last state
    Revision 0.6:
     Changed RPM time read to routine used in P98 to save RAM
     Changed operation of RPM forced up travel
     Implemented pass point for one-pass-point travel
    Revision 0.7:
     Changed pass point from single to multiple (no EEPROM support)
    Revision 0.8:
     Changed all CKIPRADIO loads from 0xFF to NOEECOMM
     Installed EEPROM support for multiple pass points
    Revision 0.9:
     Changed state machine to handle wake-up (i.e. always head towards
     the lowest pass point to re-orient the GDO)
    Revision 0.10:
     Changed the AC line input routine to work off full-wave rectified
     AC coming in
    Revision 0.11:
    Installed the phase control for motor speed control
    Revision 0.12:
     Installed traveling down if too near up limit
     Installed speed-up when starting travel
     Installed slow-down when ending travel
    Revision 0.13:
     Re-activated the C code
    Revision 0.14:
     Added in conditional assembly for Siminor radio codes
    Revision 0.15:
     Disabled old wall control code
     Changed all pins to conform with new layout
     Removed unused constants
     Commented out old wall control routine
     Changed code to run at 6 MHz
    Revision 0.16:
     Fixed bugs in Flex radio
    Revision 0.17:
     Re-enabled old wall control. Changed command charging time to 12 ms
     to fix FMEA problems with IR protectors.
    Revision 0.18:
     Turned on learn switch connected to EEPROM clock line
    Revision 0.19
     Eliminated unused registers
     Moved new registers out of radio group
     Re-enabled radio interrupt
    Revision 0.20
     Changed limit test to account for “lost” position
     Re-wrote pass point routine
    Revision 0.21
     Changed limit tests in state setting routines
     Changed criteria for looking for lost position
     Changed lost operation to stop until position is known
    Revision 0.22:
     Added in L_A_C state machine to learn the limits
      Installed learn-command to go into LAC mode
      Added in command button and learn button jog commands
      Disabled limit testing when in learn mode
      Added in LED flashing for in learn mode
      Added in EVERYTHING with respect to learning limits
    Note: LAC still isn't working properly!!!
    Revision 0.23:
     Added in RS232 functionality over wall control lines
    Revision 0.24:
     Touched up RS232 over wall control routine
     Removed 50 Hz force table
     Added in fixes to LAC state machine
    Revision 0.25:
     Added switch set and release for wall control (NOT smart switch,
     into RS232 commands (Turned debouncer set and release in to subs)
     Added smart switch into RS232 commands (smart switch is also a sub)
     Re-enabled pass point test in ‘:’ RS232 command
     Disabled smart switch scan when in RS232 mode
     Corrected relative reference in debouncer subroutines
     RS232 ‘F’ command still needs to be fixed
    Revision 0.26:
     Added in max. force operation until motor ramp-up is done
     Added in cleaning of slowdown flag in set_any routine
     Changed RPM timeout from 30 to 60 ms
    Revision 0.27:
     Switched phase control to off, then on (was on, then off) inside
     each half cycle of the AC line (for noise reduction)
     Changed from 40 ms unit max. period to 32 (will need further changes)
     Fixed bug in force ignore during ramp (previously jumped from down to
     up state machine)
     Added in complete force ignore at very slow part of ramp (need to
     change this to ignore when very close to limit)
     Removed that again
     Bug fix -- changed force skip during ramp-up. Before, it kept counting
     down the force ignore timer.
    Revision 0.28:
     Modified the wall control documentation
     Installed blinking the wall control on an IP reversal instead of the
     worklight
     Installed blinking the wall control when a pass point is seen
    Revision 0.29:
     Changed max. RPM timeout to 100 ms
     Fixed wall control blink bug
     Raised minimum speed setting
    NOTE: Forces still need to be set to accurate levels
    Revision 0.30:
     Removed ‘er’ before setteing of pcon register
     Bypassed slow-down to limit during learn mode
    Revision 0.31:
     Changed force ramp to a linear FORCE ramp, not a linear time ramp
      Installed a look-up table to make the ramp more linear.
     Disabled interrupts during radio pointer match
     Changed slowdown flag to a up-down-stop ramping flag
    Revision 0.32:
     Changed down limit to drive lightly into floor
     Changed down limit when learning to back off of floor for a few pulses
    Revision 0.33:
     Changed max. speed to ⅔ when a short door is detected
    Revision 0.34:
     Changed light timer to 2.5 minutes for a 50 Hz line, 4.5 minutes for
     a 60 Hz line. Currently, the light timer is 4.5 minutes WHEN THE
     UNIT FIRST POWERS UP.
     Fixed problem with learning RP set to and extended group
    Revision 0.35:
     Changed strting postion of pass point counter to 0x30
    Revision 0.36:
     Changed algorithm for finding down limit to cure stopping at the floor
     during the learn cycle
     Fixed bug in learning limits: Up limit was being updated from
     EEPROM during the learn cycle
     Changed method of checking when limit is reached: calculation for
     distance to limit is now ALWAYS performed
     Added in skipping of limit test when position is lost
    Revision 0.37:
     Revised minimum travel distance and short door constants to reflect
     approximately 10 RPM pulses/min
    Revision 0.38:
     Moved slowstart number closer to the limit
     Changed backoff number from 10 to 8
    Revision 0.39:
     Changed backoff number from 8 to 12
    Revision 0.40:
     Changed task switcher to unburden processor
     Consolidated tasks
    0 and 4
     Took extra unused code out of tasks 1, 3, 5, 7
     Moved auz light and 4 ms timer into task 6
     Put state machine into task 2 only
     Adjusted auto_delay, motdel, rpm_time_out, force_ignore,
     motor_timer, obs_count, for new state machine tick
     Removed force_pre prescaler (no longer needed with 4 ms state
     machine)
     Moved updating of obs_count to one ms timer for accuracy
     Changed autoreverse delay timer into a byte-wide timer because it was
     only storing an 8 bit number anyways . . .
     Changed flash delay and light timer constants to adjust for 4 ms tick
    Revision 0.41:
     Switched back to 4 MHz operation to account for the fact that Zilog's
     Z86733 OTP won't run at 6 MHz reliably
    Revision 0.42:
     Extended RPM timer so that it could measure from 0-524 ms with
     a resolution of 8 us
    Revision 0.43:
     Put in the new look-up table for the force pots (max RPM pulse period
     multiplied by 20 to scale it for the various speeds).
     Removed taskswitch because it was a redundant register
     Removed extra call to the auxlight routine
     Removed register ‘temp’ because, as far as I can tell, it does nothing
     Removed light_pre register
     Eliminated ‘phase’ register because it was never used
     Put in preliminary divide for scaling the force and speed
     Created speedlevel AND IDEAL speed registers, which are not yet used
    Revision 0.47:
     Undid the revision of revisions 0.44 through 0.46
     Changed ramp-up and ramp-down to an adaptive ramp system
     Changed force compare from subtract to a compare
     Removed force ignore during ramp (was a kludge)
     Changed max. RPM time out to 500 ms static
     Put WDT kick in just before main loop
     Fixed the word-wise T0EXT register
     Set default RPM to max. to fix problem of not ramping up
    Revision 0.48:
     Took out adaptive ramp
     Created look-ahead speed feedback in RPM pulses
    Revision 0.49:
     Removed speed feedback (again)
     NOTE: Speed feedback isn't necessarily impossible, but after all my
      efforts, I've concluded that the design time necessary ( a large
      amount isn't worth the benefit it gives, especially given the
      current time costraints of this project
    Revision 0.50:
     Fixed the force pot read to actually return a value of 0-64
     Set the msx. RPM period time out to be equivalent to the force setting
    Revision 0.51:
     Added in P2M_SHADOW register to make the following posible:
     Added in flashing warning light ‘with auto-detect)
    Revision 0.52:
     Fixed the variable worklight timer to have the correct value on
     power up
     Re-enabled the reason register and stackreason
     Enabled up limit to back off by one pulse if it appears to be
     crashing the up stop port.
     Set the door to ignore commands and radio when lost
     Changed start of down ramp to 220
     Changed backoff from 12 to 9
     Changed drive-past of down limit to 9 pulses
    Revision 0.53:
     Fixed RS232 ‘9’ and ‘F’ commands
     Implemented RS232 ‘K’command
     Removed ‘M’, ‘P’, and ‘S’ commands
     Set the learn LED to always turn off at the end of the
     learn limits mode
    Revision 0.54:
     Reversed the direction of the pot. read to correct the direction
     of the min. and max. forces when dialing the pots.
     Added in “U” command (currently does nothing)
     Aded in “V” command to read force pot. values
    Revision 0.55:
     Changed number of pulses added in to down limit from 9 to 16
    Revision 0.56:
     Changed backoff number from 16 back to 9 (not 8!)
     Changed minimum force/speed from 4/20 to 10/20
    Revision 0.57:
     Changed backoff number back to 16 again
     Changed minimum force/speed from 10/20 back to 4/20
     Changed learning speed from 10/20 to 20/20
    Revision 0.58:
     Changed learning speed from 20/20 to 12/20 (same as short door)
     Changed force to max. during ramp-up period
     Changed RPM timeout to a static vlaue of 500 ms
     Change drive-past of limit from 1″ to 2″ of trolley travel
     (Actually, changed the number from 10 pulses to 20 pulses)
     Changed start of ramp-up from 1 to 4 (i.e. the power level)
     Changed the alorithm when near the limit - the door will no
     longer avoid going toward the limit, even if it is too close
    Revision 0.59:
     Removed ramp-up bug from auto-reverse of GDO
    Revision 0.60:
     Added in check for pass point counter if −1 to find position when lost
     Change in waking up when lost. GDO now heads toward pass point
     only on first operation after a power outage. Heads down on all
     subsequent operations.
     Created the “limit unknown” fault and prevented the GDO from
     traveling whe the limits are not set at a reasonable value
     Cleared the fault code on entering learn limits mode
     Implemented RS232 ‘H’ command
    Revision 0.61:
     Changed limit test to look for trolley exactly at the limit position
     Changed search for pass point to erase limit memory
     Changed setup position to 2″ above the pass point
     Set the learn LED to turn off whenever the L_A_C is cleared
     Set the learn limits mode to shut off whenever the worklight times out
    Revision 0.62:
     Removed test for being exactly at down limit (it disabled the drive into
     the limit feature
     Fixed bug causing the GDO to ignore force when it should autoreverse
     Added in ignoring commands when lost and traveling up
    Revision 0.63:
     Installed MinSpeed register to vary minimum speed with force pot
     setting
     Created main loop routine to scale the min speed based on force pot.
     Changed drive-past of down limit from 20 to 30 pulses 2″ to 3″
    Revision 0.64:
     Changed learnin algorithm to utilize block. (Changed autoreverse to
     add in ½″ to position instead of backing trolley off of the floor)
     Enabled ramp-down when nearing the up limit in learn mode
    Revision 0.65:
     Put special case in speed check to enable slow down near the up limit
    Revision 0.66:
     Changed ramp-up: Ramping up of speed is now constant - the ramp-
     down is the only ramp affected by the force pot. setting
     Changed ramp-up and ramp-down tests to ensure that the GDO will get
     UP to the minimum speed when we are inside the ramp-down zone,
     (The above change necessitated this)
     Changed the down limit to add in 0.2″ instead of 0.5″
    Revision 0.67:
     Removed minimum travel test in set_arev_state
     Moved minimum distance of down limit from pass point from 5″ to 2″
     Disabled moving pass point when only one pass point has been set
    Revision 0.68:
     Set error in learn state if no pass point is seen
    Revision 0.69:
     Added in decrement of pass point counter in learn mode to kill bugs
     Fixed bug: Force pots were being ignored in the learn mode
     Added in filtering of the RPM (RPM _FILTER register and a routine in
     the one ms timer)
     Added in check of RPM filter inside RPM interrupt
     Added in polling RPM pin inside RPM interrupt
     Re-enabled stopping when in learn mode and position is lost
    Revision 0.70:
     Removed old method of filtering RPM
     Added in a “debouncer” to filter the RPM
    Revision 0.71:
     Changed “debouncer” to automatically vetor low
     whenever an RPM pulse is considered valid
    Revision 0.72:
     Changed number of pulses added in to down limit to 0. Since the actual
     down limit test checks for the position to be BEYOND the down limit
     this is the equivalent of adding one pulse into the down limit
    Revision 0.74:
     Undid the work of rev. 0.73
     Changed number of pulses added in to down limit to 1. Noting the
     comment in rev. 0.72, this mean that we are adding 2 pulses
     Changed learning speed to vary between 8/20 and 12/20, depending
     upon the force pot. setting
    Revision 0.75:
     Installed power-up chip ID on P22, P23, P24, and P25
     Note : ID is on P24, P23, and P22. P25 is a strobe to signal valid data
      First chip ID is 001, with strobe it's 0001.
     Changed set_any routine to re-enable the wall control just in case we
     stopped while the wall control was being turned off (to avoid disabling
     the wall control completely
     Changed speed during learn mode to be ⅔ speed for first seven seconds,
     then to slow down to the minimum speed to make the limit learning the
     same as operation during normal travel.
    Revision 0.76:
     Restored learning to operate only at 60% speed
    Revision 0.77:
     Set unit to reverse off of floor and subtract 1″ of travel
     Reverted to learning at 40%-60% of full speed
    Revision 0.78:
     Changed rampflag to have a constant for running at full speed
     USed the above change to simplify the force ignore routine
     Also used it to change the RPM time out. The time out is now set equal
     to the pot setting, except during the ramp up when it is set to 500 ms.
     Changed highest force pot setting to be exactly equal to 500 ms.
    Revision 0.79:
     Changed setup routine to reverse off block (yet again). Added in one
     pulse.
     Enabled RS232 version number return
     Enabled ROM checksum. Cleaned up ducumentation
    Revision 1.1:
     Tweaked light times for 8.192 ms prescale instead of 8.0 ms prescale
     Changed compare statement inside setvarlight to ‘uge’ for consistency
     Changed one-shot low time to 2 ms for power line
     Changed one-shot low time to truly count falling-edge-to-falling-edge.
    Revision 1.2:
     Eliminated testing for lost GDO in set_up_dir_state (is already taken
     care of by set_on_dir_state.
     Created special time for max. run motor timer in learn mode: 50
     seconds
    Revision 1.3:
     Fixed bug in set_any to fix stack imbalance
     Changed short door discrimination point to 78″
    Revision 1.4:
     Changed second ‘di’ to ‘ei’ in KnowSimCode
     Changed IR protector to ignore for first 0.5 second before travel
     Changed blinking time constant to take it back to 2 seconds before
     travel
     Changed blinking code to ALWAYS flash during travel, with pre-travel
     flash when module is properly detected
     Put in bounds checking on pass point counter to keep it in line
     Changed driving into down limit to consider the system list if floor not
     seen
    Revision 1.5:
     Changed blinking of wall control at pass point to be a one-shot timer
     to correct problems with bad passpoint connections and stopping at pass
     point to cause wall control ignore.
    Revision 1.6:
     Fixed blinking of wall control when indicating IP protector recersal
     to give the blink a true 50% duty cycle
     Changed blinker output to output a constant high instead of pulsing
     Changed P2S_POR to 1010 Indicate Siminor unit;
    Revision 1.7:
     Disabled Siminor Radio
     Changed P2S_POR to 1011 Indicate Lift-Master unit,
     Added in one more conditional assembly point to avoid use of simradio
     label
    Revision 1.8:
     Re-enabled Siminor Radio
     Changed P2S_POR back to 1010 Siminor
     Re-fixed blinking of wall control LED for protector reversal
     Changed blinking of wall control LED for indicating pass point
     Fixed error in calculating highest pass point value
     Fixed error in calculating lowest pass point value
    Revision 1.9:
     Lengthened blink time for indicating pass point
     Installed a max. travel distance when lost
      Removed skipping up limit test when lost
      Reset the position when lost and force reversing
     Installed sample of pass point signal when changing states
    Revision 2.0:
     Moved main loop test for max. travel distance (was causing a memory
     fault before)
    Revision 2.1:
     Changed limit test to use 11000000b instead of 10000000b to ensure
     only setting up of limit when we're actually close
    Revision 2.2:
     Changed minimum speed scanning to move it further down the pot.
     rotation. Formula is now \\force − 24/41 + 4, truncated to 12
     Changed max. travel test to be inside motor state mahine. Max travel
     test calculates for limit position differently when system is lost.
     Reverted limit test to use 10000000b
     Changed some jp's to jr's to conserve code space
     Changed loading of reason byte with 0 to clearing if reason byte (very
     desperate for space)
    Revision 2.3:
     Disabled Siminor Radio
     Changed P2S_POR to 1011 (Lift-Master)
    Revision 2.4:
     Re-enabled Siminor Radio
     Changed P2S_POR to 1010 (Siminor)
     Changed wall control LED to also flash during learn mode
     Changed reaction to single pass point near floor. If only one pass point
     is seen during the learn cycle, and it is too close to the floor, the
     learn cycle will now fail.
     Removed an ei from pass point when learning to avoid a race condition
    Revision 2.5:
     Changed backing off of up limit to only occur during learn cycle. Backs
     off by {fraction (1/2 )}″ if learn cycle force stops within ½″ of stop bolt.
     Removed considering system lost if floor not seen.
     Changed drive-past of down limit to 36 pulses (3″)
     Added in clearing of power level whenever motor gets stopped (to turn
     off the FET's sooner)
     Added in a 40 ms delay (using the same MOTDEL register as for the
     traveling states to delay the shut-off of the motor relay. This should
     enable the motor to discharge some energy before the relay has to break
     the current flow
     Created STOPNOFLASH label - it looks like it should have been there
     all along
     Moved incrementing MOTDEL timer into head of state machine to
     conserve space
    Revision 2.6:
     Fixed back-off of up limit to back off in the proper direction.
     Added in testing for actual stop state in back-off (before was always
     backing off the limit)
     Simplified testing for light being on in ‘set any’ routine; eliminated
     lights register
    Revision 2.7: (Test-only revision)
     Moved ei when testing for down limit
     Eliminated testing for negative number in radio time calculation
     Installed a primitive debouncer for the pass point (out of paranoia
     Changed a pass point in the down direction to correspond to a position
     of 1
     Installed a temporary echo of the RPM signal on the blinker pin
     Temporarily disabled POM checksum
     Moved three subroutines before address 0101 to save space (2.2B)
     Framed lock up using upforce and dnforce registers with di and ei to
     prevent corruption of upforce or dnforce while doing math (2.7C)
     Fixed error in definition of pot_count register (2.7C)
     Disabled actual number check of RPM perdod for debug (2.7D)
     Added in di at test_up_sw and test_dn_sw for ramping up period
     (2.7D)
     Set RPM_TIME_OUT to always be loaded to max value for debug
     (2.7E)
     Set RPM_TIME_OUT to round up by two instead of one (2.7F)
     Removed 2.7E revision (2.7F)
     Fixed RPM_TIME_OUT to round up in both the up and down
     direction(2.7G)
     Installed constant RS232 output of RPM_TIME_OUT register (2.7H)
     Enabled RS232 ‘U’ and ‘V’ commands (2.7I)
     Disabled constant output of 2.7H (2.7I)
     Set PS232 ‘U’ to output RPM_TIME_OUT (2.7I)
     Removed disable of actual RPM number check (2.7J)
     Removed pulsing to indicate RPM interrupt (2.7J)
     2.7J note -- need to remove ‘u’ command function
    Revision 2.8:
     Remove interrupt enable before resetting rpm_time_out. This will
     introduce roughly 30us of extra delay in time measurement, but should
     take care of
     nuisance stops.
     Removed push-ing and pop-ing of RP in tasks 2 and 6 to save stack
     space (2.8B)
     Removed temporary functionality for ‘u’ command (2.8 Release)
     Re-enabled ROM checksum (2.8 Release)
  • [0130]
    L_A_C State Machine
    73 77
    *******       ****
    *      *
    72 74*     76*
    Back to *    *
    70 Up Lim ----   ----
    71 ----  ----
    Error ******
    75
    Position
     the limit
    NON-VOL MEMORY MAP
    00 A0 D0 Multi-function transmitters
    01 A0 D0
    02 A1 D0
    03 A1 D0
    04 A2 D1
    05 A2 D1
    06 A3 D1
    07 A3 D1
    08 A4 D2
    09 A4 D2
    0A A5 D2
    0B A5 D2
    0C A6 D3
    0D A6 D3
    0E A7 D3
    0F A7 D3
    10 A8 D4
    11 A8 D4
    12 A9 D4
    13 A9 D4
    14 A10 D5
    15 A10 D5
    16 A11 D5
    17 A11 D5
    18 B D6
    19 B D6
    1A C D6
    1B C D6
    1C unused D7
    1D unused D7
    1E unused D7
    1F unused D7
    20 unused DTCP Keyless permanent 4 digit code
    21 unused DTCID Keyless ID code
    22 unused DTCR1 Keyless Roll value
    23 unused DTCR2
    24 unused DTCT Keyless temporary 4 digit code
    25 unused Duration Keyless temporary duration
    Upper byte = Mode; hours activations
    Lower byte = # of hours activations
    26 unused Radio type
    77665544 33221100
    00 = CMD 01 = LIGHT
    10 = OPEN/CLOSE/STOP
    27 unused Fixed/roll
    Upper word = fixed/roll byte
    Lower word = unsed
    28 CYCLE COUNTER 1ST 16 BITS
    29 CYCLE COUNTER 2ND 16 BITS
    2A VACATION FLAG
    Vacation Flag , Last Operation
    0000 XXXX in vacation
    1111 XXXX out of vacation
    2B A MEMORY ADDRESS LAST WRITTEN
    2C IRLIGHHTADDR 4-22-97
    2D Up Limit
    2E Pass point counter / Last operating state
    2F Down Limit
    3C-3F Force Back trace
    RS232 DATA
    REASON
    00 COMMAND
    10 RADIO COMMAND
    20 FORCE
    30 AUX OBS
    40 A REVERSE DELAY
    50 LIMIT
    60 EARLY LIMIT
    70 MOTOR MAX TIME, TIME OUT
    80 MOTOR COMMANDED OFF RPM CAUSING AREV
    90 DOWN LIMIT WITH COMMAND HELD
    A0 DOWN LIMIT WITH THE RADIO HELD
    B0 RELEASE OF COMMAND OR RADIO AFTER A FORCED
    UP MOTOR ON DUE TO RPM PULSE WITHG MOTOR OFF
    STATE
    00 AUTOREVERSE DELAY
    01 TRAVELING UP DIRECTION
    02 AT THE UP LIMIT AND STOPES
    03 ERROR RESET
    04 TRAVELING DOWN DIRECTION
    05 AT THE DOWN LIMIT
    06 STOPPED IN MID TRAVEL
    DIAG
    1) AOBS SHORTED
    2) AOBS OPEN / MISS ALIGNED
    3) COMMAND SHORTED
    4) PROTECTOR INTERMITTENENT
    5) CALL DEALER
    NO RPM IN THE FIRST SECOND
    6) RPM FORCED A REVERSE
    7) LIMITS NOT LEAPNET YET
    DOG 2
    DOG 2 IS A SECONDARY WATCHDOG USED TO
    RESET THE SYSTEM IF THE LOWEST LEVEL “MAINLOOP”
    IS NOT REACHED WITHIN A 3 SECOND
    Conditional Assembly
    GLOBALS ON ; Enable a symbol file
    Yes .equ 1
    No .equ 0
    TwoThirtyThree .equ Yes
    UseSiminor .equ Yes
    EQUATE STATEMENTS
    check_sum_value .equ 065H ; CRC checksum for ROM code
    TIMER_I_EN .equ 0CH ; TMR mask to start timer 1
    MOTORTIME .equ .27000 / 4 ; Max. run for otor = 22 sec (4 ms tick,
    LACTIME .equ (500 / 4; ; Delay before learning limits is 0.5 seconds
    LEARNTIME .equ (50000 / 4 ; Max. run for motor in learn mode
    PWM_CHARGE .equ 0CH ; PWM state for old force pots.
    LIGHT .equ 0FFH ; Flag for light on constantly
    LIGHT_ON .equ 10000000B ; P0 pin turning on worklight
    MOTOR_UP .equ 01000000B ; P0 pin turning on the up motor
    MOTOR_DN .equ 00100000B ; P0 pin turning on the down motor
    UP_OUT .equ 00110000B ; P3 pin otput for up force pot.
    DOWN_OUT .equ 001000000B ; P3 pin output for down force pot.
    DOWN_COMP .equ 00000001B ; P0 pin input for down force pot.
    UP_COMP .equ 00000010B ; P0 pin input for up force pot.
    FALSEIR .equ 00000001B ; P2 pin for false AOBS output
    LINSINFIN .equ 00010000B ; P2 pin for reading in AC line
    PPoint Port .equ p2 ; Port for pass point input
    PassPoint .equ 00011000B ; B_t mask for pass point input
    PhasePrt .equ p0 ; Port for phase control output
    PhaseHigh .equ 00010000B ; Pin for controlling FET's
    CHARGE_SW .equ 10000000B ; P3 Pin for charging the wall control
    DIS_SW .equ 01000000B ; P3 Pin for discharging the wall control
    SWITCHES1 .equ 00001000B ; PC Pin for first wall control input
    SWITCHES2 .equ 00000100B ; P0 Pin for second wall control input
    P01M_INIT .equ 00000101B ; set mode p00-p03 in p04-p07 out
    P2M_INIT .equ 01011100B ; P2M initialization for operation
    P2M_POP .equ 01000000B ; P2M initialization of output of onip ID
    P3M_INIT .equ 00000011B ; set port3 p30-p33 input ANALOG mode
    P01S_INIT .equ 10000000B ; Set init. state as worklight on, motor off
    P2S_INIT .equ 00000110B ; Init p2 to have LED off
    P2S_POR .equ 00101010B ; P2 init to output a chip ID (P25, P24, P23, P22;
    P3S_INIT .equ 00000000B ; Init p3 to have everything off
    BLINK_PIN .equ 00000000B ; Pin which controls flasher module
    P2M_ALLOUTS .equ 01111100B ; Pins which need to be refreshed to outputs
    P2M_ALLINS .equ 01011000B ; Pins which need to be refreshed to inputs
    RsPerHalf .equ 104 ; RS232 period 1200 Baud half time 416uS
    RsPer Full .equ 208 ; RS232 period full time 832us
    RsPer1P22 .equ 00 ; RS232 period 1.22 unit times 1.025ms (00 = 256)
    FLASH .equ 0FFH ;
    WORKLIGHT .equ LIGHT_ON ; Pin for toggling state of worklight
    PPOINTPULSES .equ 897 ; Number of RPM pulses between pass points
    SetupPos .equ (65535-20) ; Setup position -- 2” above pass point
    CMD_TEST .equ 00 ; States for old wall control routine
    WL_TEST .equ 01
    VAC_TEST .equ 02
    CHARGE .equ 03
    RSSTATUS .equ 04 ; Hold wall control okt. in RS232 mode
    WALLOFF .equ 05 ; Turn off wall control LED for blinks
    AUTO_REV .equ 00H ; States for GDO state machine
    UP_DIRECTION .equ 01H
    UP_POSITION .equ 02H
    DN_DIRECTION .equ 04H
    DN_POSITION .equ 05H
    STOP .equ 06H
    CMD_SW .equ 01H ; Flags for switches hit
    LIGHT_SW .equ 02H
    VAC_SW .equ 04H
    TRUE .equ 0FFH ; Generic constants
    FALSE .equ 00H
    FIXED_MODE .equ 10101010b ;Fixed mode radio
    ROLL_MODE .equ 01010101b ;Rolling mode radio
    FIXED_TEST .equ 00000000b ;Unsure of mode -- test fixed
    ROLL_TEST .equ 00000001b ;Unsure of mode -- test roll
    FIXED_MASK .equ FIXED_TEST ;Bit mask for fixed mode
    ROLL_MASK .equ ROLL_TEST ;Bit mask for rolling mode
    FIXTHR .equ 03H ;Fixed code decision threshold
    DTHR .equ 02H ;Rolling code decision threshold
    FIXSYNC . equ 08H ;Fixed code sync threshold
    DSYNC .equ 04h ;Rolling code sync threshold
    FIXBITS .equ 11 ;Fixed code number of bits
    DBITS .equ 21 ;Polling code number of bits
    EQUAL .equ 00 ;Counter compare result constants
    BACKWIN .equ FH ;
    FWDWIN .equ 80H
    OUTOFWIN .equ 0FFH
    AddressCounter .equ 27H
    AddressAPointer .equ 2BH
    CYCCOUNT .equ 28H
    TOUCHID .equ 21H ;Touch code ID
    TOUCHROLL .equ 22H ;Touch code roll value
    TOUCHPERM .equ 20H ;Touch code permanent password
    TOUCHTEMP .equ 24H ;Touch code temporary password
    DURAT .equ 25H ;Touch code temp. duration
    VERSIONNUM .equ 088H ;Version: PRO7000 V2.8
    ;4-22-97
    IRLIGHTADDR .EQU 20H ;work light feature on or off
    DISABLE .EQU 00H ;00 = disabled, FF = enabled
    ;
    RTYPEADDR .equ 26h ;Radio transmitter type
    VACATIONADDR .equ 2AH
    MODEADDR .equ 20H ;Rolling/Fixed mode in EEPROM
    ;High byte = don't care (now)
    ;Low byte = RadioMode flag
    UPLIMADDR .equ 2DH ;Address of up limit
    LASTSTATEADDR .equ 2EH ;Address of last state
    DNLIMADDR .equ 2FH ;Address of down limit
    NOEECOMM .equ 01111111b ;Flag: skip radio read/write
    NOINT .equ 10000000b ;Flag: skip radio interrupts
    RDROPTIME .equ 125 ;Radio drop-out time: 0.5s
    LRNOCS .equ 0AAH ;Learn open/close/stop
    BRECEIVED .equ 077H ;B code received flag
    LRNLIGHT .equ 0BBH ;Light command trans.
    LRNTEMP .equ 0CCH ;Learn touchcode temporary
    LRNDURTN .equ 0DDH ;Learn t.c. temp. duration
    REGLEARN .equ 0EEH ;Regular learn mode
    NORMAL .equ 00H ;Normal command trans.
    ENTER .equ 00H ;Touch code ENTER key
    POUND .equ 01H ;Touch code # key
    STAR .equ 02H ;Touch code * key
    ACTIVATIONS .equ 0AAH ;Number of activations mode
    HOURS .equ 055H ;Number of hours mode
    ;Flags for Ramp Flag Register
    STILL .equ 00h ; Motor not moving
    RAMPUP .equ 0AAH ; Ramp speed up to maximum
    RAMPDOWN .equ 0FFH ; Slow down the motor to minimum
    FULLSPEED .equ 0CCH ; Running at full speed
    UPSLOWSTART .equ 200 ; Distance (in pulses) from limit when slow-
    down
    DNSLOWSTART .equ 220 ; of GDO motor starts (for up and down
    direction)
    BACKOFF .equ 16 ; Distance (in pulses) to back trolley off of
    floor
    ; when learning limits by reversing off of
    floor
    SHORTDOOR .equ 936 ; Travel distance (in pulses) that
    discriminates a
    ; one piece door (slow travel) from a normal
    door
    ; (normal travel) (Roughly 76″
    PERIODS
    AUTO_REV_TIME .equ 124 ; (4 ms prescale)
    MIN_COUNT .equ 02H ; pwm start point
    TOTAL_PWM_COUNT .equ 03FH ; pwm end = start + 2*total − 1
    FLASH_TIME .equ 61 ; 0.25 sec flash time
    ; 4.5 MINUTE USA LIGHT TIMER
    USA_LIGHT_HI .equ 080H ; 4.5 MIN
    USA_LIGHT_LO .equ 0BEH ; 4.5 MIN
    ; 2.5 MINUTE EUROPEAN LIGHT TIMEP
    EURO_LIGHT_HI .equ 047H ; 2.5 MIN
    EURO_LIGHT_LO .equ 086H ; 2.5 MIN
    ONE_SEC .equ 0F4H ; WITH A /4 IN FRONT
    CMD_MAKE .equ 8 ; cycle count *10mS
    CMD_BREAK .equ (255-8)
    LIGHT_MAKE .equ 8 ; cycle count *11mS
    LIGHT_BREAK .equ (255-8)
    VAC_MAKE_OUT .equ 4 ; cycle cound *100mS
    VAC_BREAK_OUT .equ (255-4)
    VAC_MAKE_IN .equ 2
    VAC_BREAK_IN .equ (255-2)
    VAC_DEL .equ 8 ; Delay 16 ms for vacation
    CMD_DEL_EX .equ 6 ; Delay 12 ms ( 5*2 + 2)
    VAC_DEL_EX .equ 50 ; Delay 100 ms
    PREDEFINED REG
    ALL_ON_IMR .equ 00111101b ; turn on int for timers rpm auxobs radio
    RETURN_IMR .equ 00111100b ; return on the IMR
    RadioImr .equ 00000001b ; turn on the radio only
    GLOBAL REGISTERS
    STATUS .equ 04H ; CMD_TEST 00
    ; WL_TEST 01
    ; VAC_TEST 02
    ; CHARGE 03
    STATE .equ 05H ; state register
    LineCtr .equ 06H ;
    RampFlag .equ 0H ; Ramp up, ramp down, or stop
    AUTO_DELAY .equ 08H
    LinePer .equ 09H ; Period of AC line coming in
    MOTOR_TIMER_HI .equ 0AH
    MOTOR_TIMER_LO .equ 0BH
    MOTOR_TIMER .equ 0AH
    LIGHT_TIMER_HI .equ 0CH
    LIGHT_TIMER_LO .equ 0DH
    LIGHT_TIMER .equ 0CH
    AOBSF .equ 0EH
    PrevPass .equ 0FH
    CHECK_GRP .equ 10H
    check_sum .equ r0 ; check sum pointer
    rom_data .equ r1
    test_adr_hi .equ r2
    test_adr_lo .equ r3
    test_adr .equ rr2
    CHECK_SUM .equ CHECK_GRP+0 ; check sum reg for por
    ROM_DATA .equ CHECK_GRP+1 ; data read
    LIM_TEST_HI .equ CHECK_GRP−0 ; Compare registers for measuring
    LIM_TEST_LO .equ CHECK_GRP−1 ; distance to limit
    LIM_TEST .equ CHECK_GRP+0 :
    AUXLEARNSW .equ CHECK_GRP+2 ;
    RRTO .equ CHECK_GRP+3 ;
    RPM_ACOUNT .equ CHECK_GRP+4 ; to test for active rpm
    RS_COUNTEP .equ CHECK_GRP+5 ; rs232 byte counter
    RS232DAT .equ CHECK_GRP+6 ; rs232 data
    RADIO_CMI .equ CHECK_GRP+7 ; radio command
    R_DEAD_TIME .equ CHECK_GRP+8 ;
    FAULT .equ CHECK_GRP+9 ;
    VACFLAG .equ CHECK_GRP+10 ; VACATION mode flag
    VACFLASH .equ CHECK_GRP+11
    VACCHANGE .equ CHECK_GRP+12
    FAULTTIME .equ CHECK_GRP+13
    FORCE_IGNORE .equ CHECK_GRP+14
    FAULTCODE .equ CHECK_GRP+15
    TIMER_GROUP .equ 20H
    position_hi .equ r0
    position_lo .equ r1
    position .equ rr0
    up_limit_hi .equ r2
    up_limit_lo .equ r3
    up_limit .equ rr2
    switch_delay .equ r4
    obs_count .equ r6
    rscommand .equ r9
    rs_temp_hi .equ r10
    rs_temp_lo .equ r11
    rs_temp .equ rr10
    POSITION_HI .equ TIMER_GROUP+0
    POSITION_LO .equ TIMER_GROUP+1
    POSITION .equ TIMER_GROUP+2
    UP_LIMIT_HI .equ TIMER_GROUP+2
    UP_LIMIT_LO .equ TIMER_GROUP+3
    UP_LIMIT .equ TIMER_GROUP−2
    SWITCH_DELAY .equ TIMER_GROUP+4
    OnePass .equ TIMER_GROUP+5
    OBS_COUNT .equ TIMER_GROUP+6
    RsMode .equ TIMER_GROUP+7
    Divisor .equ TIMER_GROUP+8 ; Number to divide by
    RSCOMMAND .equ TIMER_GROUP+9
    RS_TEMP_HI .equ TIMER_GROUP+10
    RS_TEMP_LO .equ TIMER_GROUP+11
    RS_TEMP .equ TIMER_GROUP+10
    PowerLevel .equ TIMER_GROUP+12 ; Current step in 20-step phase ramp-up
    PhaseTMR .equ TIMER_GROUP+13 ; Timer for turning on and off phase control
    PhaseTime .equ TIMER_GROUP+14 ; Current time reload value for phase timer
    MaxSpeed .equ TIMER_GROUP+15 ; Maximum speed for this kind of door
    LEARN EE GROUP FOR LOOPS ECT
    LEARNEE_GRP .equ 30H ;
    TEMPH .equ LEARNEE_GRP ;
    TEMPL .equ LEARNEE_GRP+1 ;
    PSM_SHADOW .equ LEARNEE_GRP+2 ; Readable shadow of P2M register
    LEARNDB .equ LEARNEE_GRP+3 ; learn debouncer
    LEARNT .equ LEARNEE_GRP+4 ; learn timer
    ERASET .equ LEARNEE_GRP+5 ; erase timer
    MTEMPH .equ LEARNEE—GRP+6 ; memory temp
    MTEMPL .equ LEARNEE_GRP+7 ; memory temp
    MTEMP .equ LEARNEE_GRP+8 ; memory temp
    SERIAL .equ LEARNEE_GRP+9 ; data to & from nonvol memory
    ADDRESS .equ LEARNEE_GRP+10 ; address for the serial nonvol memory
    ZZWIN .equ LEARNEE_GRP+11 ; radio 00 code window
    T0_OFLOW .equ LEARNEE_GRP+12 ; Third byte of T0 counter
    T0EXT .equ LEARNEE_GRP+13 ; t0 extend dec'd every t0 int
    T0ENTWORD .equ LEARNEE_GRP+12 ; Word-wide t0 extension
    T125MS .equ LEARNEE_GRP+14 ; 125mS counter
    SKIPRADIO .equ LEARNEE_GRP+15 ; flag to skip radio read, write if
    ; learn or vacation talking to it
    temph .equ r0 ;
    temp1 .equ r1 ;
    learndb .equ r3 ; learn debouncer
    learnt .equ r4 ; learn timer
    eraset .equ r5 ; erase timer
    mtemph .equ r6 ; memory temp
    mtemp1 .equ r7 ; memory temp
    mtemp .equ r8 ; memory temp
    serial .equ r9 ; data to and from nonvol mem
    address .equ r10 ; addr for serial nonvol memory
    zzwin .equ r11 ;
    t0_oflow .equ r12 ; Overflow counter for T0
    t0ext .equ r13 ; t0extend dec'd every t0 int
    t0extword .equ rr12 ; Word-wide T0 extension
    t125ms .equ r14 ; 125mS counter
    skipradio .equ r15 ; flag to skip radio read, write if
    ; learn or vacation talking to it
    FORCE_GROUP .equ 40H
    dnforce .equ r0
    upforce .equ r1
    loopreg .equ r3
    up_force_hi .equ r4
    up_force_lo .equ r5
    up_force .equ rr4
    dn_force_hi .equ r6
    dn_force_lo .equ r7
    dn_force .equ rr6
    force_add_hi .equ r8
    force_add_lo .equ r9
    force_add .equ rr8
    up_temp .equ r10
    dn_temp .equ r11
    pot_count .equ r12
    force_temp_of .equ r13
    force_temp_hi .equ r14
    force_temp_lo .equ r15
    DNFORCE .equ 40H
    UPFORCE .equ 41H
    AOBSTEST .equ 42H
    LoopReg .equ 43H
    UP_FORCE_HI .equ 44H
    UP_FORCE_LO .equ 45H
    DN_FORCE_HI .equ 46H
    DN_FORCE_LO .equ 47H
    UP_TEMP .equ 4AH
    ON_TEMP .equ 4BH
    POT_COUNT .equ 40H
    FORCE_TEMP_OF .equ 40H
    FORCE_TEMP_HI .equ 4EH
    FORCE_TEMP_LO .equ 4FH
    RPM_GROUP .equ 50H
    rtypes2 .equ r0
    stackflag .equ r1
    rpm_temp_of .equ r2
    rpm_temp_hi .equ r3
    rpm_temp_hiword .equ rr2
    rpm_temp_lo .equ r4
    rpm_past_hi .equ r5
    rpm_past _lo .equ r6
    rpm_period_hi .equ r7
    rpm_period_lo .equ r8
    divcounter .equ r11 ; Counter for dividing RPM time
    rpm_count .equ r12
    rpm_time_out .equ r13
    RTypes2 .equ RPM_GROUP+2
    STACKFLAG .equ RPM_GROUP+1
    RPM_TEMP_OF .equ RPM_GROUP+2 ; Overflow for RPM Time
    RPM_TEMP_HI .equ RPM_GROUP+2 ;
    RPM_TEMP_HWORD .equ RPM_GROUP+2 ; High word of RPM Time
    RPM_TEMP_LO .equ RPM_GROUP+4
    RPM_PAST_HI .equ RPM_GROUP+5
    RPM_PAST_LO .equ RPM_GROUP+6
    RPM_PERIOD_HI .equ RPM_GROUP+7
    RPM_PERIOD_LO .equ RPM_GROUP+8
    DN_LIMIT_HI .equ RPM_GROUP+9 ;
    DN_LIMIT_LO .equ RPM_GROUP+10 ;
    DIVCOUNTER .equ RPM_GROUP+11 ; Counter for divinding RPM time
    RPM_FILTER .equ RPM_GROUP+11 ; DOUBLE MAPPED register for filtering signal
    RPM_COUNT .equ RPM_GROUP+12
    RPM_TIME_OUT .equ RPM_GROUP+13
    BLINK_HI .equ RPM_GROUP+14 ; Blink timer for flashing the
    BLINK_LO .equ RPM_GROUP+15 ; about-to-travel warning light
    BLINK .equ RPM_GROUP+14 ; Word-wise blink timer
    RADIO GROUP
    RadioGroup .equ 60H ;
    RTemp .equ RadioGroup ; radio temp storage
    RTempH .equ RadioGroup+1 ; radio temp storage high
    RTempL .equ RadioGroup+2 ; radio temp storage low
    RTimeAH .equ RadioGroup+3 ; radio active time high byte
    RTimeAL .equ RadioGroup+4 ; radio active time low byte
    RTimeIH .equ RadioGroup+5 ; radio inactive time high byte
    RTimeIL .equ RadioGroup+6 ; radio inactive time low byte
    Radio1H .equ RadioGroup+7 ; sync 1 code storage
    Radio1L .equ RadioGroup+8 ; sync 1 code storage
    RadioC .equ RadioGroup+9 ; radio word count
    PointerH .equ RadioGroup+10 ;
    PointerL .equ RadioGroup+11 ;
    AddValueH .equ RadioGroup+12 ;
    AddValueL .equ RadioGroup+13 ;
    Radio3H .equ RadioGroup+14 ; sync 3 code storage
    Radio3L .equ RadioGroup+15 ; sync 3 code storage
    rtemp .equ r0 ; radio temp storage
    rtemph .equ r1 ; radio temp storage high
    rtemp1 .equ r2 ; radio temp storage low
    rtimeh .equ r3 ; radio active time high byte
    rtimea1 .equ r4 ; radio active time low byte
    rtimeih .equ r5 ; radio inactive time high byte
    rtimei1 .equ r6 ; radio inactive time low byte
    radio1h .equ r7 ; sync 1 code storage
    radio11 .equ r8 ; sync 1 code storage
    radioc .equ r9 ; radio word count
    pointerh .equ r10 ;
    pointer1 equ r11 ;
    pointer .equ rr11 ; Overall pinter for ROM
    addvalueh .equ r12 ;
    addvalue1 .equ r13 ;
    radio3h .equ r14 ; sync 3 code storage
    radio31 .equ r15 ; sync 3 code storage
    w2 .equ rr14 ; For Siminor revision
    CounterGroup .equ 070h ; counter group
    TestReg .equ CounterGroup ; Test area when dividing
    BitMask .equ CounterGroup+01 ; Mask for transmitters
    LastMatch .equ CounterGroup+02 ; last matching code address
    LoopCount .equ CounterGroup+03 ; loop counter
    CounterA .equ CounterGroup+04 ; counter translation MSB
    CounterB .equ CounterGroup+05 ;
    CounterC .equ CounterGroup+06 ;
    CounterD .equ CounterGroup+07 ; countr translation LSB
    MirrorA .equ CounterGroup+08 ; back translation MSB
    MirrorB .equ CounterGroup+09 ;
    MirrorC .equ CounterGroup+010 ;
    MirrorD .equ CounterGroup+011 ; back translation LSB
    COUNT1H .equ CounterGroup+012 ; received count
    COUNT1L .equ CounterGroup+013
    COUNT3H .equ CounterGroup+014
    COUNT3L .equ CounterGroup+015
    loopcount .equ r3 ;
    countera .equ r4 ;
    counterb .equ r5 ;
    counterc .equ r6 ;
    counterd .equ r7 ;
    mirrora .equ r8 ;
    mirrorb .equ r9 ;
    mirrorc .equ r10 ;
    mirrord .equ r11 ;
    Radio2Group .equ 080H
    PREVFIX .equ Radio2Group + 0
    PREVTMP .equ Radio2Group + 1
    ROLLBIT .equ Radio2Group + 2
    RTimeDH .equ Radio2Group + 3
    RTimeDL .equ Radio2Group + 4
    RTimePH .equ Radio2Group + 5
    RTimePL .equ Radio2Group + 6
    ID13 B .equ Radio2Group + 7
    SW_B .equ Radio2Group + 8
    RADIOBIT .equ Radio2Group + 9
    RadioTimeOut .equ Radio2Group + 10
    RadioMode .equ Radio2Group + 11 ;Fixed or rolling mode
    BitThresh .equ Radio2Group + 12 ;Bit decision threshold
    SyncThresh .equ Radio2Group + 13 ;Sync pulse decision threshold
    MaxBits .equ Radio2Group + 14 ;Maximum number of bits
    RFlag .equ Radio2Group + 15 ;Radio flags
    prevfix .equ r0
    prevtmp .equ r1
    rollbit .equ r2
    id_b .equ r7
    sw_b .equ r8
    radiobit .equ r9
    radiotimeout .equ r10
    radiomode .equ r11
    rflag .equ r15
    OriginalGroup .equ 90H
    SW_DATA .equ OrginalGroup+0
    ONEP2 .equ OrginalGroup+1 ; 1.2 SEC TIMER TICK .125
    LAST_CMD .equ OrginalGroup+2 ; LAST COMMAND FROM
    ; = 55 WALL CONTROL
    ; = 00 RADIO
    CodeFlag .equ OrginalGroup+3 ; Radio code type flag
    ; FF = Learning open/close/stop
    ; 77 = b code
    ; AA = open/close/stop code
    ; 55 = Light control trasnmitter
    ; 00 = Command or unknown
    RPMONES .equ OrginalGroup+4 ; RPM Pulse One Sec. Disable
    RPMCLEAR .equ OrginalGroup+5 ; RPM PULSE CLEAR & TEST TIMEP
    FAREVFLAG .equ OrginalGroup+6 ; RPM FORCED AREV FLAG
    ; 88H FOR A FORCED REVERSE
    FLASH_FLAG .equ OrginalGroup+7
    FLASH_DELAY .equ OrginalGroup+8
    REASON .equ OrginalGroup-30 9
    FLASH_COUNTER .equ OrginalGroup+10
    RadioTypes .equ OrginalGroup+11 ; Types for one page of tx's
    LIGHT_FLAG .equ OrginalGroup+12
    CMD_DEB .equ OrginalGroup+13
    LIGHT_DEB .equ OrginalGroup+14
    VAC_DEB .equ OrginalGroup+15
    NextGroup .equ 0A0H
    SDISABLE .equ NextGroup+0 ; system disable timer
    PRADIO3H .equ NextGroup+1 ; 3 mS code storage high byte
    PRADIO3L .equ NextGroup+2 ; 3 mS code storage low byte
    PRADIO1H .equ NextGroup+3 ; 1 mS code storage high byte
    PRADIO1L .equ NextGroup+4 ; 1 mS code storage low byte
    RTO .equ NextGroup+5 ; radio time out
    ;RFlag .equ NextGroup+6 ; radio flags
    EnableWorkLight .equ NextGroup+6 ; 4-22-97 work light function on or off?
    RINFILTER .equ NextGroup+7 ; radio input filter
    LIGHT1S .equ NextGroup+8 ; light timer for 1second flash
    DOG2 .equ NextGroup+9 ; second watchdog
    FAULTFLAG .equ NextGroup+10 ; flag for fault blink, no rad. blink
    MOTDEL .equ NextGroup+11 ; motor time delay
    PPOINT_DEB .equ NextGroup+12 ; Pass Point debouncer
    DELAYC .equ NextGroup+13 ; for the time delay for command
    L_A_C .equ NextGroup+14 ; Limits are changing register
    CMP .equ NextGroup+15 ; Counter compare result
    BACKUP_GRP .equ 0B0H
    PCounterA .equ BACKUP_GRP
    PCounterB .equ BACKUP_GRP+1
    PCounterC .equ BACKUP_GRP+2
    PCounterD .equ BACKUP_GRP+3
    HOUR_TIMER .equ BACKUP_GRP+4
    HOUR_TIMES_HI .equ BACKUP_GRP+4
    HOUR_TIMER_LO .equ BACKUP_GRP+5
    PassCounter .equ BACKUP_GRP+6
    STACKREASON .equ BACKUP_GRP+7
    FirstRun .equ BACKUP_GRP+8 ; Flag for first operation after power-up
    MinSpeed .equ BACKUP_GRP+9
    BRPM_COUNT .equ BACKUP_GRP+10
    BRPM_TIME_OUT .equ BACKUP_GRP+11
    BFORCE_IGNORE .equ BACKUP_GRP+12
    BAUTC_DELAY .equ BACKUP_GRP+13
    BCMD_DEB .equ BACKUP_GRP+14
    BSTATE .equ BACKUP_GRP+15
    ; Double-mapped registers for M6800 test
    COUNT_HI .equ BRPM_COUNT
    COUNT_LO .equ BRPM_TIME_OUT
    COUNT .equ BFORCE_IGNORE
    REGTEMP .equ BAUTO_DELAY
    REGTEMP2 .equ BCM2_DEB
    ; Double-mapped registers for Siminor Code Reception
    CodeT0 .equ COUNT1L ; Binary radio code received
    CodeT1 .equ Radio1L
    CodeT2 .equ MirrorC
    CodeT3 .equ MirrorD
    CodeT4 .equ COUNT3H
    CodeT5 .equ COUNT3L
    Ix .equ COUNT1H ; Index per Siminor's code
    W1High .equ AddValueH ; Word 1 per Siminor's code
    W1Low .equ AddValueL ; description
    w1high .equ addvalueh
    w1low .equ addvaluel
    W2High .equ Radio3H ; Word 2 per Siminor's code
    W2Low .equ Radio3L ; description
    w2high .equ radio3h
    w2low .equ radio3l
    STACKTOP .equ 238 ; start of the stack
    STACKEND .equ 0C0H ; end of the stack
    RS2321P .equ P0 ; RS232 input port
    RS232IM .equ SWITCHES1 ; RS232 mask
    csh .equ 10000000B ; chip select high for the 93c46
    csl .equ ˜csh ; chip select low for 93c46
    clockh .equ 01000000B ; clock high for 93c46
    clockl .equ ˜clockh ; clock low for 93c46
    doh .equ 00100000B ; data out high for 93c46
    dol .equ ˜doh ; data out low for 93c46
    ledh .equ 00000010B ; turn the led pin high “off
    ledl .equ ˜ledh ;turn the led pin low “on
    psmask .equ 01000000B ; mask for the program switch
    csport .equ P2 ; chip select port
    dioport .equ P2 ; data i/o port
    clkport .equ P2 ; clock port
    ledport .equ P2 ; led port
    psport .equ P2 ; program switch port
    WATCHDOG_GROUP .equ 0FH
    pcon .equ r0
    smr .equ r11
    wdtmr .equ r15
    ; .IF TwoThirtyThree
    ;
    ;WDT .macro
    ; .byte 5fH
    ; .endm
    ;
    ; .ELSE
    ;
    ;MDT .macro
    ; xcr F1, #00101101b ; Kick external watchdog
    ; .endm
    ;
    ; .ENDIF
    FILL .macro
    .byte 0ffh
    .endm
    FILL10 .macro
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    .endm
    FILL100 .macro
    FILL10
    FILL10
    FILL10
    FILL10
    FILL10
    FILL10
    FILL10
    FILL10
    FILL10
    .endm
    FILL1000 .macro
    FILL100
    FILL100
    FILL100
    FILL100
    FILL100
    FILL100
    FILL100
    FILL100
    FILL100
    FILL100
    .endm
    TRAP .macro
    jp start
    jp start
    jp start
    jp start
    jp start
    .endm
    TRAP10 .macro
    TRAP
    TRAP
    TRAP
    TRAP
    TRAP
    TRAP
    TRAP
    TRAP
    TRAP
    TRAP
    .endm
    SetRpToRadio2Group .macro
    .byte 031H
    .byte 08CH
    .endm
    Interrupt Vector Table
    .org 0000H
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    .word RADIO_INT ;IRQ0
    .word 000CH ;IRQ1, P3.3
    .word RPM ;IRQ2, P3.1
    .word AUX_OBS ;IRQ3, P3.0
    .word TIMEPVD ;IRQ4, T0
    .word RS232 ;IRQ5, T1
    .ELSE
    .word RADIO_INT ;IRQ0
    .word RADIO_INT ;IRQ1, P3.3
    .word RPM ;IRQ2, P3.1
    .word AUX_OBS ;IRQ3, P3.0
    .word TIMERUD ;IRQ4, T0
    .word 000CH ;IRQ5, T1
    .ENDIF
    .page
    .org 000CH
    jp Start ;jmps to start at location 0101, 0202 etc
    RS232 DATA ROUTINES
    RS_COUNTER REGISTER:
    0000XXXX - 0011XXXX Input byte counter (inputting bytes 1-4)
    00XX0000 Waiting for a start bit
    00XX0001 -XXXX1001 Input bit counter (Bits 1-9, including stop)
    00XX1111 Idle -- whole byte received
    1000XXXX - 1111XXXX Output byte counter (outputting bytes 1-8)
    1XXX0000 Tell the routine to output a byte
    1XXX0001 - 1XXX1001 Outputting a byte (Bits 1-9, including stop)
    1XXX1111 Idle -- whole byte output
    OutputMode:
    tm RS_COUNTER, #00001111B ; Check for outputting start bit
    jr z, OutputStart ;
    tcm RS_COUNTER, #00001001B ; Check for outputting stop bit
    jr z, OutputStop ; (bit 9), if so, don't increment
    OutputData:
    scf ; Set carry to ensure high stop bit
    rrc RS232DAT ;Test the bit for output
    jr c, OutputHigh ;
    OutputLow:
    and p3, *˜CHAPSE_SW ; Turn off the pull-up
    cr P3, *DIS_SW ; Turn on the pull-down
    jr DataBitDone ;
    OutputStart:
    ld T1,#RsPerFull ; Set the timer to a full bit period
    ld TMR, #00001110B ; Load the full time period
    and p3, #˜CHARGE_SW ; Send a start bit
    or P3, #DIS_SW ;
    inc RS_COUNTER ; Set the counter to first bit
    iret ;
    OutputHigh:
    and p3, #˜DIS_SW ; Turn off the pull-down
    or P3, #CHARGE_SW ; Turn on the pull-up
    DataBitDone:
    inc RS_COUNTER ; Advance to the next data bit
    iret ;
    OutputStop:
    and p3, #˜DIS_SW ; Output a stop (high) bit
    or P3, #CHARGE_SW ;
    or RS_COUNTER, #00001111B ; Set the flag for word being done
    cp RS_COUNTER, #11111111B ; Test for last output byte
    jr nz, MoreOutput ; If not, wait for more output
    clr RS_COUNTER ; Start waiting for input bytes
    MoreOutput:
    RSExit:
    iret ;
    RS232:
    cp RsMode, #00 ; Check for in RS232 mode,
    jr nz, InRsMode ; If so, keep receiving data
    cp STATUS, #CHARGE ; Else, only receive data when
    jr nz, WallModeBad ; charging the wall control
    InRsMode:
    tcm RS_COUNTER, #00001111B ; Test for idle state
    jr z, RSExit ; If so, don't do anything
    tm RS_COUNTER, #11000000B ; test for input or output mode
    jr nz, OutputMode
    RSInput:
    tm RS_COUNTER, #00001111B ; Check for waiting for start
    jr z, WaitForStart ; If so, test for start bit
    tcm RS_COUNTER, #00001001B ; Test for receiving the stop bit
    jr z, StopBit ; If so, end the word
    scf ; Initially set the data in bit
    tm RS232IP, #RS232IM ; Check for high or low bit at input
    jr nz, GotRsBit ; If high, leave carry high
    rcf ; Input bit was low
    GotRsBit:
    rrc RS232DAT ; Shift the bit into the byte
    inc RS_COUNTER ; Advance to the next bit
    iret
    Stopbit:
    tm RS232IP,#RS232IM ; Test for a valid stop bit
    jr z, DataBad ; If invalid, throw out the word
    DataGood:
    tm RS_COUNTER, #11110000B ; If we're not reading the first word,
    jr nz, IsData ; then this is not a command
    ld RSCOMMAND, RS232DAT ; Load the new command word
    IsData:
    or RS_COUNTER, #00001111B ; Indicate idle at end of word
    iret
    WallModeBad:
    clr RS_COUNTER ; Reset the RS232 state
    DataBad:
    and RS_COUNTER, #00110000B ; Clear the byte counter
    iret
    WaitForStart:
    tm RS232IP,#RS232IM ; Check for a start bit
    jr nz, NoStartBit ; If high, keep waiting
    inc RS_COUNTER ; Set to receive bit 1
    ld T1, #RsPer1P22 ; Long time until next sample
    ld TMR, #00001110B ; Load the timer
    ld T1, #RsPerFull ; Sample at 1X afterwords
    iret ;
    NoStartBit:
    ld T1, #RsPerHalf ; Sample at 2X for start bit
    iret
    Set the worklight timer to 4.5 minutes for 60Hz line
    and 2.5 minutes for 50 Hz line
    SetVarLight:
    cp LinePer, #36 ; Test for 50Hz or 60Hz
    jr uge, EuroLight ; Load the proper table
    USALight:
    ld LIGHT_TIMER_HI,#USA_LIGHT_HI ; set the light period
    ld LIGHT_TIMER_LO,#USA_LIGHT_LO ;
    ret ; Return
    EuroLight:
    ld LIGHT_TIMER_HI,#EURO_LIGHT_HI ; set the light period
    ld LIGHT_TIMER_LO,#EURO_LIGHT_LO ;
    ret ; Return
    THIS THE AUXILARY OBSTRUCTION INTERRUPT ROUTINE
    AUX_OBS:
    ld OBS_COUNT, #11 ; reset pulse counter (no obstruction)
    and imr,#11110111b ; turn off the interupt for up to 500uS
    ld AOBSTEST,#11 ; reset the test timer
    or AOBSF,#00000010B ; set the flag for got a aobs
    and AOBSF,#11011111B ; Clear the bad aobs flag
    iret ; return from int
    Test for the presence of a blinker module
    LookForFlasher:
    and P2M_SHADOW, #˜BLINK_PIN ;Set high for autolatch test
    ld P2M, P2M_SHADOW ;
    or P2, #BLINK_PIN ;
    or P2M_SHADOW, #BLINK_PIN ;Look for Flasher module
    ld P2M, P2M_SHADOW ;
    ret
    ; Full 41 bytes of unused memory
    FILL10
    FILL10
    FILL10
    FILL10
    FILL
    REGISTER INITILISATION
    .org 0011H ; address has both bytes the same
    start:
    START: di ; turn off the interrupt for init
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    ld RP,#WATCHDOG_GROUP
    ld wdtmr,#00001111B ; rc dog 100mS
    .ELSE
    clr p1
    .ENDIF
    WDT ; kick the dog
    clr RP ; clear the register pointer
    PORT INITILIZATION
    ld p0,#P01S_INIT ; RESET all ports
    ld P2,#P2S_POR ; Output the chip ID code
    ld P3,#P3S_INIT ;
    ld P01M,#P01M_INIT ; set mode p00-p03 out p04-p07in
    ld P3M,#P3M_INIT ; set port3 p30-p33 input analog mode
    ; p34-p37 outputs
    ld P2M,#P2M_POR ; set port 2 mode for chip ID out
    Internal RAM Test and Reset All RAM = mS
    srp #0F0h ; point to control group use stack
    ld r15,#4 ;r15= pointer (minimum of RAM)
    write_again:
    WDT ; KICK THE DOG
    ld r14,#1
    write_again1:
    ld @r15,r14 ;write 1,2,4,8,10,20,40,80
    cp r14,@r15 ;then compare
    jr ne,system_error
    rl r14
    jr nc,write_again1
    clr Εr15 ;write RAM(r5)=0 to memory
    inc r15
    cp r15,#240
    jr ult,write_again
    Checksum Test
    CHECKSUMTEST:
    srp #CHECK_GRP
    ld test_adr_hi,#01FH
    ld test_adr_lo,#0FFH ;maximum address=fffh
    add_sum:
    WDT ; KICK THE DOG
    idc rom_data,@test_adr ;read ROM code one by one
    add checkp_sum,rom_dat ;add it to checksum register
    decw test_addr ;increment ROM address
    jr nz,add_sum ;address=0 ?
    cp check_sum,#check_sum_value
    jr z,system_ok ;check final checksum = 00 ?
    system_error:
    and ledport,#ledl ; turn on the LED to indicate fault
    jr system_error
    .byte 256-check_sum_value
    system_ok
    WDT ; kick the dog
    ld STACKEND,#STACKTOP ; start at the top of the stack
    SETSTACKLOOP:
    ld @STACKEND,#01H ; set the value for the stack vector
    dec STACKEND ; next address
    cp STACKEND,#STACKEND ; test for the last address
    jr nz,SETSTACKLOOP ; loop till done
    CLEARDONE:
    ld STATE,#06 ; set the state to stop
    ld BSTATE,#06 ;
    ld OnePass,STATE ; Set the one-shot
    ld STATUS,#CHARGE ; set start to charge
    ld SWITCH_DELAY,#CMD_DEL_EX ; set the delay time to cmd
    ld LIGHT_TIMER_HI,#USA_LIGHT_HI ; set the light period
    ld LIGHT_TIMER_LO,#USA_LIGHT_LO ; for the 4.5 min timer
    ld RPMONES,#244 ; set the hold off
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP ;
    ld learndb,#0FFH ; set the learn debouncer
    ld zzwin,learndb ; turn off the learning
    ld CMD_DEE,learnoo ; in case of shorted switches
    ld BCMD_DEB,learndb ; in case of shorted switches
    ld VAC_DEB,learndb ;
    ld LIGHT_DEB,learndb ;
    ld ERASET,learndb ; set the erase timer
    ld learnt,learndb ; set the learn timer
    ld RTO,learndb ; set the radio time out
    ld AUXLEARNSW,learndb ; turn off the aux learn switch
    ld RRTO,learndb ; set the radio timer
    STACK INITILIZATION
    clr 254
    1D 255,#238 ; set the start of the stack
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    .ELSE
    clr P1
    .ENDIF
    TIMER INITILIZATION
    ld pre0,#00000101b ; set the prescaler to /1 for 4MHz
    ld PRE1,#00010011B ; set the prescaler to /4 for 4MHz
    clr T0 ; set the counter to count FF through 0
    ld T1,#RsPerHalf ; set the period to rs232 period for start bit sample
    ld TMR,#00001111B ; turn on the timers
    PORT INITILIZATION
    lD P0,#P01S_INIT ; RESET all ports
    ld P2,#P2S_INIT ;
    ld P3,#P3S_INIT ;
    ld P01M,#P01M_INIT ; set mode p00-p03 out p04-p07in
    ld P3M,#P3M_INIT ; set port3 p30-p33 input analog mode
    ; p34-p37 outputs
    ld P2M_SHADOW,#P2M_INIT ; Shadow P2M for read ability
    ld P2M,#P2M_INIT ; set port 2 mode
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    .ELSE
    clr p1
    .ENDIF
    READ THE MEMORY 2X AND GET THE VACFLAG
    ld SKIPRADIO,#NOEECOMM ;
    ld ADDRESS,#VACTIONADDR ; set non vol address to the VAC flag
    call READMEMORY ; read the value 2X 1X INIT 2ND read
    call READMEMORY ; read the value
    ld VACFLAG,MTEMPH ; save into volital
    WakeUpLimits:
    ld ADDRESS, #UPLIMADDR ; Read the up and down limits into memory
    call READMEMORY ;
    ld UP_LIMIT_HI, MTEMPH ;
    ld UP_LIMIT_LO, MTEMPL ;
    ld ADDRESS, #DNLIMADDR ;
    call READMEMORY ;
    ld DN_LIMIT_HI, MTEMPH ;
    ld DN_LIMIT_LO, MTEMPL ;
    WDT ; Kick the dog
    WakeUpState:
    ld ADDRESS, #LASTSTATEADDR ; Read the previous operating state into memory
    call READMEMORY ;
    ld STATE, MTEMPL ; Load the state
    ld PassCounter, MTEMPH ; Load the pass point couter
    cp STATE, #UP_POSITION ; If at up limit, set position
    jr z, WakeUpLimit ;
    cp STATE, #DN_POSITION ; If at down limit, set position
    jr z, WakeOnLimit ;
    WakeUpLost:
    ld STATE, #STOP ; Set state as stopped in mid travel
    ld POSITION_HI, #07FH ; Set position as lost
    ld POSITION_LO, #080H ;
    jr GotWakeUp ;
    WakeUpLimit:
    ld POSITION_HI, UP_LIMIT_HI ; Set position as at the up limit
    ld POSITION_LO, UP_LIMIT_LO ;
    jr GotWakeUp
    WakeDnLimit:
    ld POSITION_HI, DN_LIMIT_HI ; Set position as at the down limit
    ld POSITION_LO, DN_LIMIT_LO ;
    GotWakeUp:
    ld BSTATE, STATE ; Back up the state and
    ld OnePass, STATE ; clear the one-shot
    SET ROLLING/FIXED MODE FROM NON-VOLATILE MEMORY
    call SetRadioMode ; Set the radio mode
    jr SETINTEPPUPTS ; Continue on
    SetRadioMode:
    ld SKIPRADIO, #NCEECOMM ; Set skip radio flag
    ld ADDRESS, #MODEADDR ; Point to the radio mode flag
    call READMEMORY ; REad the radio mode
    ld RadioMode, MTEMPL ; Set the proper radio mode
    clr SKIPRADIO ; Re-enable the radio
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; Do we want rolling numbers
    jr nz, StartRoll
    call FixedNums
    ret
    StartRoll:
    call RollNums
    ret
    INITERRUPT INITILIZATION
    SETINTERRUPTS:
    ld IPR,#00011010B ; set the priority to timer
    ld IMR,#ALL_ON_IMR ; turn on the interrupt
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    ld IRQ,#01000000B ; set the edge clear int
    .ELSE
    ld IRQ,#00000000b ; Set the edge, clear ints
    .ENDIF
    ei ; enable interrupt
    RESET SYSTEM REG
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    ld RP,#WATCHDOG_GROUP
    ld smr,#00100010B ; reset the xtal / number
    ld pcon,#01111110B ; reset the pcon no comparator output
    ; no low emi mode
    clr RP ; Reset the RP
    .ENDIF
    ld PRE0,#00000101B ; set the prescaler to / 1 for 4Mhz
    WDT ; Kick the dog
    MAIN LOOP
    MAINLOOP:
    cp PrevPass, PassCounter ;Compare pass point counter to backup
    jr z, PassPointCurrent ;If equal, EEPROM is up to date
    PassPointChanged:
    ld SKIPRADIO, #NOEECOMM ; Disable radio EEPROM communications
    ld ADDRESS, #LASTSTATEADDR ; Point to the pass point storage
    call READMEMORY ; Get the current GDO state
    di ; Lock in the pass point state
    ld MTEMPH, PassCounter ; Store the current pass point state
    ld PrevPass, PassCounter ; Clear the one-shot
    ei :
    call WRITEMEMORY ; Write it back to the EEPROX
    clr SKIPRADIO
    PassPointCurrent:
    ;
    ;4-22-97
    CP EnableWorkLight, #10000000B ;is the debouncer set? if so write and
    ; give feedback
    JR NE,LightOpen
    TM p0,#LIGHT_ON
    JR NZ,GetRidOfIt
    LD MTEMPL,#0FFH ;turn on the IR beam work light function
    LD MTEMPH,#0FFH
    JR CommitToMem
    GetRidOfIt:
    LD MTEMPL,#00H ;turn off the IR beam work light function
    LD MTEMPH,#00H
    CommitToMem:
    LD SKIPRADIO,#NOEECOMM ;write to memory to store if enabled or not
    LD ADDRESS,#IRLIGHTADDR ;set address for write
    CALL WRITEMEMORY
    CLR SKIPRADIO
    XOR p0,#WORKLIGHT ; toggle current state of work light for feedback
    LD EnableWorklight,#01100000B
    LightOpen:
    cp LIGHT_TIMER_HI,#0FFH ; if oight timer not done test beam break
    jr nz,TestBeamBreak
    tm p0,#LIGHT_ON ; if the light is off test beam break
    jr nz,LightSkip
    TestBeamBreak:
    tm AOBSF,#10000000b ; Test for broken beam
    jr z,LightSkip ; if no pulses Staying blocked
    ; else we are intermittent
    ;4-22-97
    LD SKIPRADIO,#NOEECOMM ;Turn off radio interrupt to read from e2
    LD ADDRESS,#IRLIGHTADDR ;
    CALL READMEMORY
    CLR SKIPRADIO ; don't forget to zero the one shot
    CP MTEMPL,#DISABLED ;Does e2 report that IR work light function
    EQ,LightSkip ;is Disabled? If so jump over light on and
    CP STATE,#2 ; test for the up limit
    JR nz,LightSkip ; if not goto output the code
    call SetVarLight ; Set worklight to proper time
    or p0,#LIGHT_ON ; turn on the light
    LightSkip:
    ;4-22-97
    AND AOBSF,#01111111B ;Clear the one shot,for IR beam
    ;break detect.
    cp HOUR_TIMER_HI, #010H ; If and hour has passed,
    jr ult, NoDecrement ; then decrement the
    cp HOUR_TIMER_LO, #020H ; temporary password timer
    jr ult, NoDecrement ;
    clr HOUR_TIMER_HI ; Reset hour timer
    clr HOUR_TIMER_LO ;
    ld SKIPRADIO, #NOEECOMM ; Disable radio EE read
    ld ADDRESS, #DURAT ; Load the temporary password
    call READMEMORY ; duration from non-volatile
    cp MTEMPH, #HOURS ; If not in timer mode,
    jr nz, NoDecrement2 ; then don't update
    cp MTEMPL, #00 ; If timer is not done,
    jr z, NoDecrement2 ; decrement it
    dec MTEMPL ; Update the number of hours
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    NoDecrement:
    tm AOBSF, #01000000b ; If the poll radio mode flag is
    jr z, NoDecrement2 ; set, poll the radio mode
    call SetRadioMode ; Set the radio mode
    and AOBSF, #10111111b ; Clear the flag
    NoDecrement2:
    clr SKIPRADIO ; Re-enable radio reads
    and AOBSF,#00100011b ; Clear the single break flag
    clr DOG2 ; clear the second watchdog
    ld P01M,#P01M_INIT ; set mode p00-p03 out p04-p07in
    ld P3M,#P3M_INIT ; set port3 p30-p33 input analog mode
    ; p34-p37 outputs
    or P2M_SHADOW,#P2M_ALLINS ; Refresh all the P2M pins which have are
    and P2M_SHADOW,#P2M_ALLOTS ; always the same when we get here
    ld P2M,P2M_SHADOW ; set port 2 mode
    cp VACCHANGE,#0AAH ; test for the vacation change flag
    jr nz,NOVACCHG ; if no change the skip
    cp VACFLAG,#0FFH ; test for in vacation
    jr z,MCLEARVAC ; if in vac clear
    ld VACFLAG,#0FFH ; set vacation
    jr SETVACCHANGE ; set the change
    MCLEARVAC:
    clr VACFLAG ; clear vacation mode
    SETVACCHANGE:
    clr VACCHANGE ; one shot
    ld SKIPRADIO,#NOEECOMM ; set skip flag
    ld ADDRESS,#VACATIONADDR ; set the non vol address to the VAC flag
    ld MTEMPH,VACFLAG ; store the vacation flag
    ld MTEMPL,VACFLAG ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ; write the value
    clr SKIPRADIO ; clear skip flag
    NOVACCHG:
    cp STACKFLAG,#0FFH ; test for the change flag
    jr nz,NOCHANGEST ; if no change skip updating
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; If we're in learn mode
    jr uge, SkipReadLimits ; then don't refresh the limits!
    cp STATE, #UP_DIRECTION ; If we are going to travel up
    jr z, ReadUpLimit ; then read the up limit
    cp STATE, #DN_DIRECTION ; If we are going to travel down
    jr z, ReadDnLimit ; then read the down limit
    jr SkipReadLimits ; No limit on this travel . . .
    ReadUpLimit:
    ld SKIPRADIO, #NOEECOMM ; Skip radio EEPROM reads
    ld ADDRESS, #UPLIMADDR ; Read the up limit
    call READMEMORY ;
    di ;
    ld UP_LIMIT_HI, MTEMPH ;
    ld UP_LIMIT_LO, MTEMPL ;
    clr FirstRun ; Calculate the highest possible value for pass count
    add MTEMPL, #10 ; Bias back by 1” to provide margin of error
    adc MTEMPH, #00 ;
    CalcMaxLoop:
    inc FirstRun ;
    add MTEMPL, #LOW(PPOINTPULSES) ;
    adc MTEMPH, #HIGH(PPOINTPULSES) ;
    jr nc, CalcMaxLoop ; Count pass points until value goes positive
    GotMaxPPoint:
    ei ;
    clr SKIPRADIO ;
    tm PassCounter, #01000000b ; Test for a negative pass point counter
    jr z, CounterGood1 ; If not, no lower bounds check needed
    cp DN_LIMIT_HI, #HIGHT(PPOINTPULSES - 35) ; If the down limit is low enough,
    jr ugt, CounterIsNeg1 ; then the counter can be negative
    jr ult, ClearCount ; Else, it should be zero
    cp DN_LIMIT_LO, #LOW(PPOINTPULSES - 35)
    jr uge, CounterIsNeg1 ;
    ClearCount:
    and PassCounter, #10000000b ; Reset the pass point counter to zero
    jr CounterGood1 ;
    CounterIsNeg1:
    or PassCounter, #01111111b ; Set the pass point counter to −1
    CounterGood1:
    cp UP_LIMIT_HI, #0FFH ; Test to make sure up limit is at a
    jr nz, TestUpLimit2 ; a learned and legal value
    cp UP_LIMIT_LO, #0FFH ;
    jr z, LimitIsBad ;
    jr LimitsAreDone ;
    TestUpLimit2:
    cp UP_LIMIT_HI, #0D0H ; Look for up limit set to illegal value
    jr ule, LimitIsBad ; If so, set the limit fault
    jr LimitsAreDone ;
    ReadDnLimit:
    ld SKIPRADIO, #NOEECOMM ; Skip radio EEPROM reads
    ld ADDRESS, #DNLIMADDR ; Read the down limit
    call READMEMORY ;
    di ;
    ld DN_LIMIT_HI, MTEMPH ;
    ld DN_LIMIT_LO, MTEMPH ;
    ei ;
    clr SKIPRADIO ;
    cp DN_LIMIT_HI, #00H ; Test to make sure down limit is at a
    jr nz, TestDownLimit2 ; a learned and legal value
    cp DN_LIMIT_LO, #00H ;
    jr z, LimitIsBad ;
    jr LimitsAreDone ;
    TestDownLimit2:
    cp DN_LIMIT_HI, #020H ; Look for down limit set to illegal value
    jr ult, LimitsAreDone ; If not, proceed as normal
    LimitIsBad:
    ld FAULTCODE, # ; Set the “no limits” fault
    call SET_STOP_STATE ; Stop the GDO
    jr LimitsAreDone ;
    SkipReadLimits:
    LimitsAreDone:
    ld SKIPRADIO, #NOEECOMM ; Turn off the radio read
    ld ADDRESS, #LASTSTATEADDR ; Write the current state and pass count
    call READMEMORY ;
    ld MTEMPH, PassCounter ; DON'T update the pass point here!
    ld MTEMPL, STATE ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    clr SKIPRADIO ;
    ld OnePass, STATE ; Clear the one-shot
    cp L_A_C, #077H ; Test for successful learn cycle
    jr nz, DontWriteLimits ; If not, skip writing limits
    WriteNewLimits:
    cp STATE, #STOP ;
    jr nz, WriteUpLimit ;
    cp LIM_TEST_HI, #00 ; Test for (force) stop witin 0.5″ of
    jr nz, WriteUpLimit ; the original up limit position
    cp LIM_TEST_LO, #16 ;
    jr ugt, WriteUpLimit ;
    BackOffUpLimit: ;
    add UP_LIMIT_LO, # ; Back off the up limit by 0.5″
    add UP_LIMIT_HI, #00 ;
    WriteUpLimit:
    ld SKIPRADIO, #NOEECOMM ; Skip radio EEPROM reads
    ld ADDRESS, #UPLIMADDR ; Read the up limit
    di ;
    ld MTEMPH, UP_LIMIT_HI ;
    ld MTEMPL, UP_LIMIT_LO ;
    ei ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    WriteDnLimit:
    ld ADDRESS, #DNLIMADDR ; Read the up limit
    di ;
    ld MTEMPH, DN_LIMIT_HI ;
    ld MTEMPL, DN_LIMIT_LO ;
    ei ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    WritePassCount:
    ld ADDRESS, #LASTSTATEADDR ; Write the current state and pass count
    ld MTEMPH, PassCounter ; Update the pass point
    ld MTEMPL, STATE ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    clr SKIPRADIO ;
    clr L_A_C ; Leave the learn mode
    or ledport,#ledh ; turn off the LED for program mode
    DontWriteLimits:
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP ; set the register pointer
    clr STACKFLAG ; clear the flag
    ld SKIPRADIO, #NOEECOMM ; set skip flag
    ld address,#CYCCOUNT ; set the non vol address to the cycle c
    call READMEMORY ; read the value
    inc mtemp1 ; increase the counter lower byte
    jr nz,COUNTER1DONE ;
    inc mtemph ; increase the counter high byte
    jr nz,COUNTER2DONE ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ; store the value
    inc address ; get the next bytes
    call READMEMORY ; read the data
    inc mtemp1 ; increase the counter low byte
    jr nz,COUNTER2DONE ;
    inc mtemph ; increase the vounter high byte
    COUNTER2DONE:
    call WRITEMEMORY ; save the value
    ld address,#CYCCOUNT ;
    call READMEMORY ; read the data
    and mtemph,#00001111B ; find the force address
    or mtemph,#30H ;
    ld ADDRESS,MTEMPH ; set the address
    ld mtemp1,DNFORCE ; read the forces
    ld mtemph,UPFORCE ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ; write the value
    jr CDONE ; done set the back trace
    COUNTER1DONE:
    call WRITEMEMORY ; got the new address
    CDONE:
    clr SKIPRADIO ; clear skip flag
    NOCHANGEST:
    call LEARN ; do the learn switch
    di
    cp BRPM_COUNT_RPM_COUNT
    jr z,TESTRPM
    RESET:
    jp START
    TESTRPM:
    cp BRPM_TIME_OUT,RPM_TIME_OUT
    jr nz,RESET
    cp BFORCE_IGNORE,FORCE_IGNORE
    jr nz,RESET
    ei
    di
    cp BAUTO_DELAY,AUTO_DELAY
    jr nz,REESET
    cp BCMD_DEB,CMD_DEB
    jr nz,RESET
    cp BSTATE,STATE
    jr nz,RESET
    ei
    TESTRS232:
    SRP #TIMER_GROUP
    tcm RS_COUNTER, #00001111B ; If we are at the end of a word,
    jp nz, SIPRS232 ; then handle the RS232 word
    cp rscommand,#‘V’ ;
    jp ugt,ClearRS232 ;
    cp rscommand,#‘0’ ; test for in range
    jp ult,ClearRS232 ; if out of range skip
    cp rscommand,#‘<’ ; If we are reading
    jr nz,NotRs3C ; go straight there
    call GotRs3C ;
    jp SIPRS232 ;
    NotRs3C:
    cp rscommand,#‘>’ ; If we are writing EEPROM
    jr nz,NotRs3E ; go straight there
    call GotRs3E ;
    jp SKIPRS232 ;
    NotRs3E:
    ld rs_temp_hi,#HIGH (RS232JumpTable-(3*‘0’)) ; address pointer to table
    ld rs_temp_lo,#LOW (RS232JumpTable-(3*‘0’)) ; Offset for ASCII adjust
    add rs_temp_lo,rscommand ; look up the jump 3x
    adc rs_temp_hi,#00 ;
    add rs_temp_lo,rscommand ; look up the jump 3x
    adc rs_temp_hi,·00 ;
    add rs_temp_lo,rscommand ; look up the jump 3x
    adc rs_temp_hi,#00 ;
    call @rs_temp ; call this address
    jp SKIPRS232 ; done
    RS232JumpTable:
    jp GotRs30
    jp GotRs31
    jp GotRs32
    jp GotRs33
    jp GotRs34
    jp GotRs35
    jp GotRs36
    jp GotRs37
    jp GotRs38
    jp GotRs39
    jp GotRs3A
    jp GotRs3B
    jp GotRs3C
    jp GotRs3D
    jp GotRs3E
    jp GotRs3F
    jp GotRs40
    jp GotRs41
    jp GotRs42
    jp GotRs43
    jp GotRs44
    jp GotRs45
    jp GotRs46
    jp GotRs47
    jp GotRs48
    jp GotRs49
    jp GotRs4A
    jp GotRs4B
    jp GotRs4C
    jp GotRs4D
    jp GotRs4E
    jp GotRs4F
    jp GotRs50
    jp GotRs51
    jp GotRs52
    jp GotRs53
    jp GotRs54
    jp GotRs55
    jp GotRs56
    ClearRS232:
    and RS_COUNTER, #11110000b ; Clear the RS232 state
    SKIPRS232:
    UpdateForceAndSpeed:
    ; Update the UP force from the look-up table
    srp #FORCE_GROUP ; Point ot the proper registers
    ld force_add_hi, #HIGH(force_table) ; Fetch the proper unscaled
    ld force_add_lo, #LOW(force_table) ; value from the ROM table
    di ;
    add force_add_lo, upforce ; Offset to point to the
    adc force_add_hi, #00 ; proper place in the table
    add force_add_lo, upforce ; x2
    adc force_add_hi, #00 ;
    add force_add_lo, upforce ; x3 (three bytes wide)
    adc force_add_hi, #00 ;
    ei ;
    ldc force_temp_of, @force_add ; Fetch the ROM bytes
    incw force_add ;
    ldc force_temp_hi, @force_add ;
    incw force_add ;
    ldc force_temp_lo, @force_add ;
    ld Divisor, PowerLevel ; Divide by our current force level
    call ScaleTheSpeed ; Scale to get our proper force number
    di ; Update the force registers
    ld UP_FORCE_HI, force_temp_hi ;
    ld UP_FORCE_LO, force_temp_lo ;
    ei ;
    ; Update the DOWN force from the look-up table
    ld force_add_hi, #HIGH(force_table) ; Fetch the proper unscaled
    ld force_add_lo, #LOW(force_table) value from the ROM table
    di ;
    add force_add_lo, dnforce ; Offset to point to the
    adc force_add_hi, #00 ; proper place in the table
    add force_add_lo, dnforce ; x2
    adc force_add_hi, #00 ;
    add force_add_lo, dnforce ; x3 (three bytes wide)
    adc force_add_hi, #00 ;
    ei ;
    ldc force_temp_of, @force_add ; Fetch the ROM bytes
    incw force_add ;
    ldc force_temp_hi, @force_add ;
    incw force_add ;
    ldc force_temp_lo, @force_add ;
    ld Divisor, PowerLevel ; Divide by our current force level
    call ScaleTheSpeed ; Scale to get our proper force number
    di ; Update the force registers
    ld DN_FORCE_HI, force_temp_hi ;
    ld DN_FORCE_LO, force_temp_lo ;
    ei ;
    ; Scale the minumum speed based on force setting
    cp STATE, #DN_DIRECTION ; If we're traveling down,
    jr z, SetDownMinSpeed ; then use the down force pot for min. speed
    SetUpMinSpeed:
    di ; Disable interrupts during update
    ld MinSpeed, UPFORCE ; Scale up force pot
    jr MinSpeedMath ;
    SetDownMinSpeed:
    di ;
    ld MinSpeed, DNFORCE ; Scale down force pot
    MinSpeedMath:
    sub MinSpeed, #24 ; pot level - 24
    jr nc, UpStep2 ; truncate off the negative number
    clr MinSpeed ;
    UpStep2:
    rcf ; Divide by four
    rrc MinSpeed ;
    rcf ;
    rrc MinSpeed ;
    add MinSpeed, #4 ; Add four to find the minimum speed
    cp MinSpeed, #12 ; Perform bounds check on minium speed
    jr ule, MinSpeedOkay ; Truncate if necessary
    ld MinSpeed, #12 ;
    MinSpeedOkay:
    ei ; Re-enable interrupts
    ; Make sure the worklight is at the proper time on power-up
    cp LinePer, #36 ; Test for a 50 Hz system
    jr ult, TestRadioDeadTime ; if not, we don't have a problem
    cp LIGHT_TIMER_HI, #0FFH ; If the light timer is running
    jr z, TestRadioDeadTime ; and it is greater than
    cp LIGHT_TIMER_HI, #EURO_LIGHT_HI ; the European time, fix it
    jr ule, TestRadioDeadTime ;
    call SetVarLight ;
    TestRadioDeadTime:
    cp R_DEAD_TIME, #25 ; test for too long dead
    jp nz,MAINLOOP ; if not loop
    clr RadioC ; clear the radio counter
    clr RFlag ; clear the radio flag
    jp MAINLOOP ; loop forever
    Speed scaling (i.e. Division) routine
    ScaleTheSpeed:
    clr TestReg
    ld loopreg, #24 ; Loop for all 24 bits
    DivideLoop:
    rcf ; Rotate the next bit into
    rlc force_temp_lo ; the test field
    rlc force_temp_hi ;
    rlc force_temp_of ;
    rlc TestReg ;
    cp TestReg, Divisor ; Test to see if we can subtract
    jr ult, BitIsDone ; If we can't, we're all done
    sub TestReg, Divisor ; Subtract the divisor
    or force_temp_lo, #00000001b ; Set the LSB to mark the subtract
    BitIsDone:
    djnz loopreg, DivideLoop ; Loop for all bits
    DivideDone:
    ; Make sure the result is under our 500 ms limit
    cp force_temp_of, #00 ; Overflow byte must be zero
    jr nz, ScaleDown ;
    cp force_temp_hi, #0F4H ;
    jr ugt,ScaleDown ;
    jr ult, DivideIsGood ; If we're less, then we're okay
    cp force_temp_lo, #024H ; Test low byte
    jr ugt,ScaleDown ; if low byte is okay,
    DivideIsGood:
    ret ; Number is good
    ScaleDown:
    ld force_temp_hi, #0F4H ; Overflow is never used anyway
    ld force_temp_lo, #024H ;
    ret
    RS232 SUBROUTINES
    “0”
    Set Command Switch
    GotRs30:
    ld LAST_CMD,#0AaH ; set the last command as rs wall cmd
    call CmdSet ; set the command switch
    jp NoPos
    “1”
    Clear Command Switch
    GotRs31:
    call CmdRel ; release the command switch
    jp NoPos
    “2”
    Set Worklight switch
    GotRs32:
    call LightSet ; set the light switch
    jp NoPos
    “3”
    Clear Worklight Switch
    GotRs33:
    clr LIGHT_DEB ; Release the light switch
    jp NoPos
    “4”
    Set Vacation Switch
    GotRs34:
    call VacSet ; Set the vacation switch
    jp NoPos
    “5”
    Clear Vacation Switch
    GotRs35:
    clr VAC_DEB ; release the vacation switch
    jp NoPos
    “6”
    Set smart switch
    GotRs36:
    call SmartSet
    jp NoPos
    “7”
    Clear Smart switch set
    GotRs37:
    call SmartRelease
    jp NoPos
    “8”
    Return Present state and reason for that state
    GotRs38:
    ld RS232DAT,STATE
    or RS232DAT,STACKREASON
    jp LastPos
    “9”
    Return Force Adder and Fault
    GotRs39:
    ld RS232DAT,FAULTCODE ; insert the fault code
    jp LastPos
    “:”
    Status Bits
    GotRs3A:
    clr RS232DAT ; Reset data
    tm P2, #01000000b ; Check the strap
    jr z, LookForBlink ; If none, next check
    or RS232DAT, #00000001b ; Set flag for strap high
    LookForBlink:
    call LookForFlasher ;
    tm P2, #BLINK_PIN ; If flasheer is present,
    jr nz, ReadLight ;
    or RS232DAT,#00000010b ; then idicate it
    ReadLight:
    tm P0,#00000010B ; read the light
    jr z,C3ADone
    or RS232DAT,#00000100b
    C3ADone:
    cp CodeFlag, #REGLEARN ; Test for being in a learn mode
    jr ult, LookForPass ; If so, set the bit or RS232DAT,#00010000b ;
    or RS232DAT,#000100000b ;
    LookForPass:
    tm PassCounter,#01111111b ; Check for above pass point
    jr z, LookForProt ; If so, set the bit
    tcm PassCounter,#01111111b ;
    jr z, LookForProt ;
    or RS232DAT,#00100000b ;
    LookForProt:
    tm ACBSF, #10000000b ; Check for protector break/block
    jr nz, LookForVac ; If blocked, don't set the flag
    or RS232DAT,#01000000b ; Set flag for protector signal good
    LookForVac:
    cp VACFLAG,#00B ; test for the vacation mode
    jp nz,LastPos
    or RS232DAT,#00001000b
    jp LastPos
    “;”
    Return L_A_C
    GotRs3B:
    ld RS232DAT,L_A_C ; read the L_A_C
    jr LastPos
    “<”
    Read a word of data from an EEPROM address input by the user
    GotRs3C:
    cp RS_COUNTER, #010H ; If we have only received the
    jr ult, FirstByte ; first word, wait for more
    cp RS_COUNTER, #080H ; If we are outputting,
    jr ugt, OutputSecond ; output the second byte
    SecondByte:
    ld SKIPRADIO, #0FFH ; Read the memory at the specified
    ld ADDRESS, RS232DAT ; address
    call READMEMORY ;
    ld RS232DAT, MTEMPH ; Store into temporary registers
    ld RS_TEMP_LO, MTEMPL ;
    clr SKIPRADIO ;
    jp MidPos ;
    OutputSecond:
    ld RS232DAT, RS_TEMP_LO ; Output the second byte of the read
    jp LastPos ;
    FirstByte:
    inc RS_COUNTER ; Set to receive second word
    ret ;
    “=”
    Exit learn limits mode
    GotRs3D:
    cp L_A_C, #00 ; If not in learn mode,
    jp z, NoPos ; then don't touch the learn LED
    clr L_A_C ; Reset the learn limits state machine or leaport,#ledn ; turn off the LED for program mode
    or ledport,#ledh ; turn off the LED for program mode
    jp NoPos ;
    “>”
    Write a word of dat ato the address input by the user
    GotRs3E:
    cp RS_COUNTER, #01FH ;
    jr z, SecondByteW ;
    cp RS_COUNTER, #02FH ;
    jr z, ThirdByteW ;
    cp RS_COUNTER, #03FH ;
    jr z, FourthByteW ;
    FirstByteW:
    DataDone:
    inc RS_COUNTER ; Set to receive next byte
    ret
    SecondByteW:
    ld RS_TEMP_HI, RS232DAT ; Store the address
    jr DataDone ;
    ThirdByteW:
    ld RS_TEMP_LO, RS232DAT ; Store the high byte
    jr DataDone ;
    FourthByteW:
    cp RS_TEMP_HI, #03FH ; Test for illegal address
    jr ugt, FailedWrite ; If so, don't write
    ld SKIPRADIO, #0FFH ; Turn off radio reads
    ld ADDRESS, RS_TEMP_HI ; Load the address
    ld MTEMPH, RS_TEMP_LO ; and the data for the
    ld MTEMPL, RS232DAT ; EEPROM write
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    clr SKIPRADIO ; Re-enable radio reads
    ld RS232DAT, #00H ; Flag write okay
    jp LastPos ;
    FailedWrite:
    ld RS232DAT, #0FFH ; Flag bad write
    jp LastPos
    “?”
    ; Suspend all communication for 30 seconds
    GotRs3F:
    clr RSCOMMAND ; Throw out any command currently
    ;running
    jp NoPos ; Ignore all RS232 data
    “@”
    ; Force Up State
    GotRs40:
    cp STATE, #DN_DIRECTION ; If traveling down, make sure that
    jr z, dontup ; the door autoreverses first
    cp STATE, #AUTO_REV ; If the door is autoreversing or
    jp z, NoPos ; at the up limit, don't let the
    cp STATE, #UP_POSITION ; up direction state be set
    jp z, NoPos ;
    ld REASON, #00H ; Set the reason as command
    call SET_UP_DIR_STATE
    jp NoPos
    dontup:
    ld REASON, #00H ; Set the reason as command
    call SET_AREV_STATE ; Autoreverse the door
    jp NoPos ;
    “A”
    Force Down State
    GotRs41:
    cp STATE, #5h ; test for the down position
    jp z,NoPos ;
    clr REASON ; Set the reason as command
    call SET_DN_DIR_STATE
    jp NoPos
    “B”
    Force Stop State
    GotRs42:
    clr REASON ; Set the reason as command
    call SET_STOP_STATE
    jp NoPos
    “C”
    Force Up Limit State
    GotRs43:
    clr REASON ; Set the reason as command
    call SET_UP_POS_STATE
    jp NoPos
    “D”
    Force Down Limit State
    GotRs44:
    clr REASON ; Set the reason as command
    call SET_DN_POS_STATE
    jp NoPos
    “E”
    Return min. force during travel
    GotRs45:
    ld RS232DAT,MIN_RPM_HI ; Return high and low
    cp RS_COUNTER,#090h ; bytes of min. force read
    jp ult,MidPos ;
    ld RS232DAT,MIN_RPM_LO ;
    jp LastPos ;
    “F”
    Leave RS232 mode -- go back to scanning for wall control switches
    GotRs46:
    clr RsMode ; Exit the rs232 mode
    ld STATUS, #CHARGE ; Scan for switches again
    clr RS_COUNTER ; Wait for input again
    ld rscommand,#0FFH ; turn off command
    ret
    “G”
    (No Function)
    GotRs47:
    jp NoPos
    “H”
    45 Second search for pass point the setup for the door
    GotRs48:
    ld SKIPRADIO, #0FFH ; Disable radio EEPROM reads / writes
    ld MTEMPH, #0FFH ; Erase the up limit and down limit
    ld MTEMPL, #0FFH ; in EEPROM memory
    ld ADDRESS, #UPLIMADDR ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    ld ADDRESS, #DNLIMADDR ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    ld UP_LIMIT_HI, #HIGH(SetupPos) ; Set the dorr to travel
    ld UP_LIMIT_LO, #LOW SetupPos) ; to the setup position
    ld POSITION_HI, #040H ; Set the current position to unknown
    and PassCounter, #10000000b ; Reset to activate on first pass point seen
    call SET_UP_DIR_STATE ; Force the door to travel
    ld OnePass, STATE ; without a limit refresh
    jp NoPos
    “I”
    Return radio drop-out timer
    GotRs49:
    clr RS232DAT ; Initially say no radio on
    cp RTO,#RDROPTIME ; If there's no radio on,
    jp uge, LastPos ; then broadcast that
    com RS232DAT ; Set data to FF
    jp LastPos
    “J”
    Return current position
    GotRs4A:
    ld RS232DAT,POSITION_HI
    cp RS_COUNTER,#090H ; Test for no words out yet
    jp ult, MidPos ; If not, transmit high byte
    ld RS232DAT,POSITION_LO
    jp LastPos
    “K”
    Set radio Received
    GotRs4B:
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; If we were positioning the up limit,
    jr ult, NormalRSRadio ; then start the learn cycle
    jr z, FirstRSLearn ;
    cp L_A_C, #071H ; If we had an error,
    jp nz, NoPos ; re-learn, otherwise ignore
    ReLearnRS:
    ld L_A_C, #072H ; Set the re-learn state
    call SET_UP_DIR_STATE ;
    jp NoPos ;
    FirstRSLearn:
    ld L_A_C, #073H ; Set the learn state
    call SET_UP_POS_STATE ; Start from the “up limit”
    jp NoPos
    NormalRSRadio:
    clr LAST_CMD ; mark the last command as radio
    ld RADIO_CMD,#0AAH ; set the radio command
    jp NoPos ; return
    “L”
    Direct-connect sensitivity test -- toggle worklight for any code
    GotRs4C:
    clr RTO ; Reset the drop-out timer
    ld CodeFlag, #SENS_TEST ; Set the flag to test sensitivity
    jp NoPos
    “M”
    GotRs4D:
    jp NoPos
    “N”
    If we are within the first 4 seconds and RS232 mode is not yet enabled,
    then echo the nybble on P30 - P33 on all other nybbles
    (A.K.A. The 6800 test)
    GotRs4E:
    cp SDISABLE, #32 ; If the 4 second init timer
    jp ult, ExitNoTest ; is done, don't do the test
    di ; Shut down all other GDO operations
    ld COUNT_HI, #002H ; Set up to loop for 512 iterations,
    clr COUNT_LO ; totaling 13.056 milliseconds
    ld P01M, #00000100b ; Set all possible pins or micro.
    ld P2M, #00000000b ; to outputs for testing
    ld P3M, #00000001b ;
    WDT ; Kick the dog
    TimingLoop:
    clr REGTEMP ; Create a byte of identical nybbles
    ld REGTEMP2, P3 ; from P30 - P33 to write to all ports
    and REGTEMP2, #00001111b ;
    or REGTEMP, REGTEMP2 ;
    swap REGTEMP2 ;
    or REGTEMP, REGTEMP2 ;
    ld P0, REGTEMP ; Echo the nybble to all ports
    ld P2, REGTEMP ;
    ld P3, REGTEMP ;
    decw COUNT ; Loop for 512 iterations
    jr nz, TimingLoop ;
    jp START ; When done, reset the system
    “O”
    Return max, force during travel
    GotRs4F:
    ld RS232DAT,P32_MAX_HI ; Return high and low
    cp RS_COUNTER,#090h ; bytes of max. force read
    jp ult,MidPos ;
    ld RS232DAT,P32_MAX_LO ;
    jp LastPos ;
    “P”
    Return the measured temperature range
    GotRs50:
    jr NoPos
    “Q”
    Return address of last memory matching
    radio code received
    GotRs51:
    ld RS232DAT, RTEMP ; Send back the last matching address
    jr LastPos ;
    “R”
    Set Rs232 mode -- No ultra board present
    Return Version
    GotRs52:
    clr UltraBrd ; Clear flag for ultra board present
    SetIntoRs232:
    ld RS232DAT,#VERSIONNUM ; Initially return the version
    cp RsMode,#00 ; If this is the first time we're
    jr ugt, LockedInNoCR l looking RS232, signal it
    ld RS232DAT,#0BBH ; Return a flag for initial RS232 lock
    LockedInNoCR:
    ld RsMode,#32
    jr LastPos
    “S”
    Set Rs232 mode -- Ultra board present
    Return Version
    GotRs53:
    jr NoPos
    “T”
    Range test -- toggle worklight whenever a good memory-matching code
    is received
    GotRs54:
    clr RTO ; Reset the drop-out timer
    ld CodeFlag, #RANGETEST ; Set the flag to test sensitivity
    jr NoPos
    “U”
    (No Function)
    GotRs55:
    jr NoPos
    “V”
    Return current values of up and down force pots
    GotRs56:
    ld RS232DAT,UPFORCE ; Return values of up and down
    cp PS_COUNTER,#090h ; force pots.
    jp ult,MidPos ;
    ld RS232DAT,DNFORCE ;
    jr LastPos
    MidPos:
    cr RS_COUNTER, #10000000B ; Set the output mode
    inc RS_COUNTER ; Transmit the next byte
    jr RSDone ; exit
    LastPos:
    ld RS_COUNTER, #11110000B ; set the start flag for last byte
    ld rscommand,#0FFH ; Clear the command
    jr RSDone ; Exit
    ExitNoTest:
    NoPos:
    clr RS_COUNTER ; Wait for input again
    ld rscommand,#0FFH ; turn off command
    RSDone:
    ld RsMode,#32 ;
    ld STATUS, #RSSTATUS ; Set the wall control to RS232
    or P3, #CHARGE_SW ; Turn on the pull-ups
    and P3, #˜DIS_SW ;
    ret
    Radio interrupt from a edge of the radio signal
    RADIO_INT:
    push RP ; save the radio pair
    srp #RadioGroup ; set the register pointer
    ld rtemph,T0EXT ; read the upper byte
    ld rtemp1,T0 ; read the lower byte
    tm IRQ,#00010000B ; test for pending int
    jr z,RTIMEOK ; if not then ok time
    tm rtemp1,#10000000B ; test for timer reload
    jr z,RTIMEOK ; if not reloaded then ok
    dec rtemph ; if reloaded then dec high for sync
    RTIMEOK:
    clr R_DEAD_TIME ; clear the dead time
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    and IMR,#11111110B ; turn off the radio interrupt
    .ELSE
    and IMR,#11111100B ; Turn off the radio interrupt
    .ENDIF
    ld RTimeDH,PTimePH ; find the difference
    ld RTimeDL,RTimePL ;
    sub RTimeDL,rtemp1 ;
    sbc RTimeDH,rtemph ; in past time and the past time in temp
    RTIMEDONE:
    tm P3,#00000100B ; test the port for the edge
    jr nz,ACTIVETIME ; if it was the active time then branch
    INACTIVETIME:
    cp RINFILTER,#0FFH ; test for active last time
    jr z,GOINACTIVE ; if so continue
    jp RADIO_EXIT ; if not the return
    GOINACTIVE:
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    or IRQ,#01000000B ; set the bit setting direction to pos edge
    .ENDIF
    clr RINFILTER ; set flag to inactive
    ld rtimeih,RTimeDH ; transfer difference to inactive
    ld rtimeil,RTimeDL ;
    ld RTimePH,rtemph ; transfer temp into the past
    ld RTimePL,rtempl ;
    CP radioc,#01H ;inactive time after sync bit
    JP Z,RADIO_EXIT ;exit if it was not sync
    TM RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ;If in fixed mode,
    JR z, FixedBlank ;no number counter exists
    CP rtimeih,#0AH ;s.56ms for rolling code mode
    JP ULT,RADIO_EXIT ;pulse ok exit as normal
    CLR radioc ;if pulse is longer, bogus sync, restart sync search
    jp RADIO_EXIT ; return
    FixedBlank:
    CP rtimeih,#014H ; test for the max width 5.16ms
    JP ULT,RADIO_EXIT ;pulse ok exit as normal
    CLR radioc ;if pulse is longer, bogus sync, restart sync search
    jp RADIO_EXIT ; return
    ACTIVETIME:
    cp RINFILTER,#00H ; test for active last time
    jr z,GOACTIVE ; if so continue
    jr RADIO_EXIT ; if not the return
    GOACTIVE:
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    and IRQ,#00111111B ; clear bit setting direction to neg edge
    .ENDIF
    ld RINFILTER,#0FFH ;
    ld rtimeah,RTimeDH ; transfer difference to active
    ld rtimeal,RTimeDL ;
    ld RTimePH,rtemph ; transfer temp into the past
    ld RTimePL,rtempl ;
    GotBothEdges:
    ei ; enable the interrupts
    cp radioc,#1 ; test for the blank timing
    jp ugt,INSIG ; if not then in the middle of signal
    .IF UseSiminor
    JP z, CheckSiminor ; Test for a Siminor tx on the first bit
    .ENDIF
    inc radioc ; set the counter to the next number
    TM RFlag,#001000000B ;Has a valid blank time occured
    JR NZ,BlankSkip
    cp RadioTimeOut,#10 ; test for the min 10 ms blank time
    jr ult,ClearJump ; if not then clear the radio
    OP RFlag,#00100000B ;blank time valid! no need to check
    BlankSkip:
    cp rtimeah,#00h ; test first the min sync
    pr z,JustNoise ; if high byte 0 then clear the radio
    SyncOk:
    TM RadioMode,#ROLL_MASK ;checking sync pulse with,fix or Roll
    JR z,Fixedsync
    CP rtimeah,#09h ;time for roll 1/2 fixed, 2.3ms
    JR uge,JustNoise
    JR SET1
    Fixedsync: cp rtimeah,#012h ; test of the max time 4.6mS
    jr uge,JustNoise ; if not clear
    SET1:
    clr PREVFIX ;Clear the previous “fixed” bit
    cp rtimeah, SyncThresh ; test for 1 or three time units
    jr uge,SYNC3FLAG ; set the sync 3 flag
    SYNCLFLAG:
    tm RFlag, #01000000b ;Was a sync 1 word the last received?
    jr z, SETADCODE ; if not, then this is an A (or D code
    SETBCCODE:
    ld radio3h, radio1h ;Store the last sync 1 word
    ld radio31, radio11
    or RFlag, #00000110b ;Set the B/C Code flags
    and RFlag, #11110111b ;Clear the A/D Code Flag
    jr BCCODE
    JustNoise:
    CLR radioc ;Edge was noise keep waiting for sync bit
    JP RADIO_EXIT
    SETADCODE:
    or RFlag, #00001000b
    BCCODE:
    or RFlag,#01000000b ; set the sync 1 memory flag
    clr radio1h ; clear the memory
    clr radio11 ;
    clr COUNT1H ; clear the memory
    clr COUNT1L ;
    jr DONESET1 ; do the 2X
    SYNC3FLAG:
    and RFlag,#10111111b ; set the sync 3 memory flag
    clr radio3h ; clear the memory
    clr radio3l ;
    clr COUNT3H ; clear the memory
    clr COUNT3L ;
    clr ID_B ; Clear the ID bits
    DONESET1:
    RADIO_EXIT:
    and SKIPRADIO, # LOW:˜NOINT) ;Re-enable radio ints
    pop rp
    iret ; done return
    ClearJump:
    or P2,#10000000b ; turn of the flag bit for clear radio
    jp ClearRadio ; clear the radio signal
    .IF UseSiminor
    SimRadio:
    tm rtimeah, #10000000b ; Test for inactive greater than active
    jr nz, SimBitZero ; If so, binary zero received
    SimBitOne:
    scf ; Set the bit
    jr RotateInBit ;
    SimBitZero:
    rcf
    RotateInBit:
    rrc CodeT0 ; Shift the new bit into the
    rrc CodeT1 ; radio word
    rrc CodeT2 ;
    rrc CodeT3 ;
    rrc CodeT4 ;
    rrc CodeT5 ;
    inc radioc ; increase the counter
    cp radioc, # 49 - 129 ; Test for all 48 bits received
    jp ugt, CLEARRADIO ;
    jp z, KnowSimCode ;
    jp RADIO_EXIT ;
    CheckSiminor:
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; If not in a rolling mode,
    jr z, INSIG ; then it can't be a Siminor transmitter
    cp RadioTimeOut, #35 ; If the blank time is linger than 35 ms,
    jr ugt, INSIG ; then it can't be a Siminor unit
    or RadioC, #10000000b ; Set the flag for a Siminor signal
    clr ID_B ; No ID bits for Siminor
    .ENDIF
    INSIG:
    AND RFlag,#11011111B ;clear blank time good flag
    cp rtimeih,#014H ; test for the max width 5.16
    jr uge,ClearJump ; if too wide clear
    cp rtimeih,#00h ; test for the min width
    jr z,ClearJump ; if high byte is zero, pulse too narrow
    ISigOk:
    cp rtimeah,#014H ; test for the max width
    jr uge,ClearJump ; if too wide clear
    cp rtimeah,#00h ; if greater then 0 then signal ok
    jr z,ClearJump ; if too narrow clear
    ASigOk:
    sub rtimeal,rtimeil ; find the difference
    sbc rtimeah,rtimeih
    .IF UseSiminor
    tm RadioC, #10000000b ; If this is a Siminor code,
    jr nz, SimRadio ; then handle it appropriately
    .ENDIF
    tm rtimeah,#10000000b ; find out if neg
    jr nz,NEGDIFF2 ; use 1 for ABC or D
    jr POSDIFF2
    POSDIFF2:
    cp rtimeah, BitThresh ; test for 3/2
    jr ult,BITIS2 ; mark as a 2
    jr BITIS3
    NEGDIFF2:
    com rtimeah ; invert
    cp rtimeah, BitThresh ; test for 2/1
    jr ult,BIT2COMP ; mark as a 2
    jr BITIS1
    BITIS3:
    ld RADIOBIT,#2h ; set the value
    jr GOTRADBIT
    BIT2COMP:
    com rtimeah ; invert
    BITIS2:
    ld RADIOBIT,#1h ; set the value
    jr GOTRADBIT
    BITIS1:
    com rtimeah ; invert
    ld RADIOBIT, #0h ; set the value
    GOTRADBIT:
    clr rtimeah ; clear the time
    clr rtimeal
    clr rtimeih
    clr rtimeil
    ei ; enable interrupts --REDUNDANT
    ADDRADBIT:
    SetRpToRadio2Group ;Macro for assembler error
    srp #Radio2Group ; -- this is what it does
    tr rflag,#01000000b ; test for radio 1 / 3
    jr nz,ROLING ;
    RC3INC:
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ;If in fixed mode,
    jr z, Radio3F ; no number counter exists
    tm RadioC,#00000001b ; test for even odd number
    jr nz,COUNT3INC ; if EVEN number counter
    Radio3INC: ; else radio
    call GETTRUEFIX ;Get the true fixed bit
    cp RadioC,#14 ; test the radio coutner for the specials
    jr uge,SPECIAL_BITS ; save the special bits seperate
    Radio3R:
    Radio3F:
    srp #RadioGroup
    di ; Disable interrupts to avoid pointer collision
    ld pointerh,#Radio3H ; get the pointer
    ld pointerl,#Radio3L ;
    jr AddAll
    SPECIAL_BITS:
    cp RadioC,#20 ; test for the switch id
    jr z,SWITCHID ; if so then branch
    ld RTempH,id_b ; save the special bit
    add id_b,RTempH ; *3
    add id_b,RTempH ; *3
    add id_b,radiobit ; add in the new value
    jr Radio3R
    SWITCHID:
    cp id_b,#18 ; If this was a touch code,
    jr uge, Radio3R ; then we already have the ID bit
    ld sw_b,radiobit ; save the switch ID
    jr Radio3R
    RC1INC:
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ;If in fixed mode, no number counter
    jr z, Radio1F
    tm RadioC,#00000001b ; test for even odd number
    jr nz,COUNT1INC ; if odd number counter
    Radio1INC: ; else radio
    call GETRUEFIX ;Get the real fixed code
    cp RadioC, #02 ;If this is bit 1 of the 1ms code,
    jr nz, Radio1F ;then see if we need the switch ID bit
    tm rflag, #00010000b ;If this is the first word received,
    jr z, SwitchBit1 ;then save the switch bit regardless
    cp id_b, #16 ;If we have a touch code,
    jr ult, Radio1F ;then this is our switch ID bit
    SwitchBit1:
    ld sw_b, radiobit ;Save touch code ID bit
    Radio1F:
    srp #RadioGroup
    di ; Disable interrupts to avoid pinter collision
    ld pinterh,#Radio1H ; get the pointer
    ld pointer1,#Radio1L ;
    jr AddAll
    GETTRUEFIX:
    ; Chamberlain proprietary fixed code
    ; bit decryption algorithm goes here
    ret
    COUNT3INC:
    ld rollbit, radiobit ;Store the rolling bit
    srp #RadioGroup
    di ; Disable interrupts to avoid pinter collision
    ld pointerh,#COUNT3H ; get the pointer
    ld pointer1,#COUNT3L ;
    jr AddAll
    COUNT1INC:
    ld rollbit, radiobit ;Store the rolling bit
    srp #RadioGroup
    di ; Disable interrupts to avoid pointer collision
    ld pointerh,#COUNT1H ; get the pointers
    ld pointer1,#COUNT1L ;
    jr AddAll
    AddAll:
    ld addvalueh,@pointerh ; get the value
    ld addvaluel,@pointerl ;
    add addvaluel,@pointerl ; addx2
    adc addvalueh,@pointerh ;
    add addvaluel,@pointerl ; add x3
    adc addvalueh,@pointerh, ;
    add addvalue1,RADIOBIT ; add in new number
    adc addvalueh,#00h ;
    ld @pointerh,addvalueh ; save the value
    ld @pointerl,addvaluel ;
    ei ; Re-enable interrupts
    ALLADDED:
    inc radioc ; increase the counter
    FULLWORD?:
    cp radioo, MaxBits ; test for full (10/20 bit) word
    jp nz,RRETURN ; if not then return
    ;;;;;Disable interrupts until word is handled
    or SKIPRADIO, #NOINT ; Set the flag to disable radio interrupts
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    nad IMR,#11111110B ; turn off the radio interrupt
    .ELSE
    and IMR,#11111100B ; Turn off the radio interrupt
    .ENDIF
    clr RadioTimeOut ; Reset the blank time
    cp RADIOBIT, #00H ; If the last bit is zero,
    jp z, ISCCODE ; then the code is the obsolete C code
    and RFlag,#11111101B ; Last digit isn't zero, clear B code flag
    ISCCODE:
    tm RFlag,#00010000B ; test flag for previous word receiverd
    jr nz,KNOWCODE ; If the second word received
    FIRST20:
    or RFlag,#00010000B ; set the flag
    clr radioo ; clear the radio counter
    jp RRETURN ; return
    .IF UseSiminor
    KnowSimCode:
    ; Siminor proprietary rolling code decryption algorithm goes here
    ld radiolh, #0FFH ; Set the code to be incompatible with
    clr MirrorA ; the Chamberlain rolling code
    clr MirrorB ;
    jp CounterCorrected ;
    .ENDIF
    KNOWCODE:
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ;If not in rolling mode,
    jr z, CounterCorrected ; forget the number counter
    ; Chamberlain proprietary counter decryption algorithm goes here
    CounterCorrected:
    srp #RadioGroup ;
    clr RRTO ; clear the got a radio flag
    tm SKIPRADIO,#NOEECOMM ; test for the skip flag
    jp nz,CLEARRADIO ; if skip flag is active then donot look at EE mem
    cp ID_B, #18 ;If the ID bits total more than 18,
    jr ult, NoTCode ;
    or RFlag, #00000100b ;then indicate a touch code
    NoTCode:
    ld ADDRESS,#VACATIONADDR ; set the non vol address to the VAC flag
    call READMEMORY ; read the value
    ld VACFLAG,MTEMPH ; save into volital
    cp CodeFlag,#REGLEARN ; test for in learn mode
    jp nz,TESTCODE ; if out of learn mode then test for matching
    STORECODE:
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ;If we are in fixed mode,
    jr z, FixedOnly ;then don't compare the counters
    CompareCounters:
    cp PCounterA, MirrorA ; Test for counter match to previous
    jp nz, STORENOTMATCH ; if no match, try again
    cp PCounterB, MirrorB ; Test for counter match to previous
    jp nz, STORENOTMATCH ; if no match, try again
    cp PCounterC, MirrorC ; Test for counter match to previous
    jp nz, STORENOTMATCH ; if no match, try again
    cp PCounterD, MirrorD ; Test for counter match to previous
    jp nz, STORENOTMATCH ; if no match, try again
    FixedOnly:
    cp PRADIO1H,radiolh ; test for the match
    jp nz,STORENOTMATCH ; if not a match then loop again
    cp PRADIO1Lradioll ; test for the match
    jp nz,STORENOTMATCH ; if not a match then loop again
    cp PRADIO3H,radio3h ; test for the match
    jp nz,STORENOTMATCH ; if not a match then loop again
    cp PRADIO3L,radio3l ; test for the match
    jp nz,STORENOTMATCH ; if not a match then loop again
    cp AUXLEARNSW, #116 ; If learn was not from wall control,
    jr ugt, CMDONLY ; then learn a command only
    CmdNotOpen:
    tm CMD_DEB, #10000000b ; If the command switch is held,
    jr nz, CmdOrOOS ; then we are learning command or o/c/s
    CheckLight:
    tm LIGHT_DEB, #10000000b ; If the light switch and the lock
    jp z, CLEARRADIO2 ; switch are being held,
    tm VAC_DEB, #10000000b ; then learn a light trans.
    jp z, CLEARRADIO2 ;
    LearningLight:
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; Only learn a light trans. if we are in
    jr z, CMDONLY ; the rolling mode.
    ld CodeFlag, #LRNLIGHT ;
    ld BitMask, #01010101b ;
    jr CMDONLY
    CmdOrOCS:
    tm LIGHT_DEB, #10100000b ; If the light switch isn't being held,
    jr nz, CMDONLY ; then see if we are learning o/c/s
    CheckOCS:
    tm VAC_DEB, #10000000b ; If the vacation switch isn't held,
    jp z, CLEARRADIO222 ; then it must be a normal command
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; Only learn an o/c/s if we are in
    jr z, CMDONLY ; the rolling mode.
    tm RadioC, #10000000b ; If the bit for siminor is et,
    jr nz, CMDONLY ; then don't learn as an o/c/s Tx
    ld CodeFlag, #LRNOCS ; Set flag to learn o/c/s
    ld BitMask, #10101010b ;
    CMDONLY:
    call TESTCODES ; test the code to see if in memory now
    cp ADDRESS, #0FFh ; If the code isn't in memory
    jr z, STOREMATCH ;
    WriteOverOCS:
    dec ADDRESS ;
    jp READYTOWRITE ;
    STOREMATCH:
    cp RadioMode, #ROLL_TEST ; If we are not testing a new mode,
    jr ugt, SameRadioMode ; then don't switch
    ld ADDRESS, #MODEADDR ; Fetch the old radio mode,
    call READMEMORY ; change only the low order
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; byte, andd write in its new value.
    jr nz, SetAsRoll ;
    SetAsFixed:
    ld RadioMode, #FIXED_MODE ;
    call FixedNums ; Set the fixed thresholds permanetly
    jr WriteMode
    SetAsRoll:
    ld RadioMode, #ROLL_MODE ;
    call RollNums ; Set the rolling thresholds permanently
    WriteMode:
    ld MTEMPL, RadioMode ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    SameRadioMode:
    tm RFlag, #00000010B ; If the flag for the C code is set,
    jp nz, CCODE ; then set the C Code address
    tm RFlag,#00100100B ; test for the b code
    jr nz,BCODE ; if a B code jump
    ACODE:
    ld ADDRESS,#2BH ; set the address to read the last written
    call READMEMORY ; read the memory
    inc MTEMPH ; add 2 to the last written
    inc MTEMPH ;
    tr RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; If the radio is in fixed mode,
    jr z, FixedMem ; then handle the fixed mode memory
    RollMem:
    inc MTEMPH ; Add another 2 to the last written
    inc MTEMPH
    and MTEMPH,#11111100B ; Set to a multiple of four
    cp MTEMPH,#1FH ; test for the last address
    jr ult, GOTAADDRESS ; If not the last address jump
    jr AddressZero ; Address is now zero
    FixedMem:
    and MTEMPH,#11111110B ; set the address on a even number
    cp MTEMPH,#17H ; test for the last address
    jr ult,GOTAADDRESS ; if not the last address jump
    AddressZero:
    ld MTEMPH,#00 ; set the address to 0
    GOTAADDRESS:
    ld ADDRESS,#2BH ; set the address to write the last written
    ld RTemp,MTEMPH ; save the address
    LD MTEMPL,MTEMPH ; both bytes same
    call WRITEMEMORY ; write it
    ld ADDRESS,rtemp ; set the address
    jr READYTOWRITE ;
    CCODE:
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; If in rolling code mode,
    jp nz, CLEARRADIO ; then HOW DID WE GET A C CODE?
    ld ADDRESS, #01AH ; Set the C code address
    jr READYTOWRITE ; Store the C code
    BCODE:
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; If in fixed mode,
    jr z, BFixed ; handle normal touch code
    BRoll:
    cp SW_B, #ENTER ; If the user is trying to learn a key
    jp nz, CLEARRADIO ; other than enter, THROW IT OUT
    ld ADDRESS, #20H ; Set the address for the rolling touch code
    jr READYTOWRITE
    BFixed:
    cp radio3h,#90H ; test for the 00 code
    jr nz,BCODEOK ;
    cp radio3l,#29H ; test for the 00 code
    jr nz,BCODEOK ;
    jp CLEARRADIO ; SKIP MAGIC NUMBER
    BCODEOK:
    ld ADDRESS,#18H ; set the address for the B code
    READYTOWRITE:
    call WRITECODE ; write the code in radio1 and radio3
    NOFIXSTORE:
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; If we are in fixed mode,
    jr z, NOWRITESTORE ; then we are done
    inc ADDRESS ; point to the counter address
    ld Radio1H, MirrorA ; Store the counter into the radio
    ld Radio1L, MirrorB ; for the writecode routine
    ld Radio3H, MirrorC ;
    ld Radio3L, MirroD ;
    call WRITECODE
    call SetMask
    com BitMask
    ld ADDRESS, #RTYPEADDR ; Fetch the radio types
    call READMEMORY
    tm RFlag, #10000000b ; Find the proper byte of the type
    jr nz, UpByte
    LowByte:
    and MTEMPL, BitMask ; Wipe out the proper bits
    jr MaskDone ;
    UpByte:
    and MTEMPH, BitMask ;
    MaskDone:
    com BitMask ;
    cp CodeFlag, #LRNLIGHT ; If we are learing a light jr z, LearnLight ; set eh appropriate bits
    cp CodeFlag, #LRNOCS ; If we are learning an o/c/s,
    jr z, LearnOCS ; set the appropriate bits
    Normal:
    clr BitMask ; Set the proper bits as command
    jr BMReady
    LearnLight:
    and BitMask, #01010101b ; Set the proper bits as worklight
    jr BMReady ; Bit mask is ready
    LearnOCS:
    cp SW_B, #02H ; If ‘open’ switch is not being held,
    jp nz, CLEARRADIO2 ; then don't accept the transmitter
    and BitMask,#10101010b ; Set the proper bits as open/close/stop
    BMReady:
    tm RFlag, #10000000b ; Find the proper byte of the type
    jr nz, UpByt2 ;
    LowByt2:
    or MTEMPL, BitMask ; Write the transmitter type in
    jr MaskDon2 ;
    UpByt2:
    or MTEMPH, BitMask ; Write the transmitter type in
    MaskDon2:
    call WRITEMEMORY ; Store the transmitter types
    NOWRITESTORE:
    xor p0,#WORKLIGHT ; toggle light
    or leadport,#ledh ; turn off the LED for program mode
    ld LIGHT1S,#244 ; turn on the 1 second blink
    ld LEARNT,#0FFH ; set learnmode timer
    clr RTO ; disallow cmd from learn
    clr CodeFlag ; Clear any learning flags
    jp CLEARRADIO
    STORENOTMATCH:
    ld PRADIO1H,radio1h ; transfer radio into past
    ld PRADIO1L,radio1l ;
    ld PRADIO3H,radio3h ;
    ld PRADIO3L,radio3l ;
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; If we are in fixed mode,
    jp z, CLEARRADIO ; get the next code
    ld PCounterA, MirrorA ; transfer counter into past
    ld PCounterB, MirrorB ;
    ld PCounterC, MirrorC ;
    ld PCounterD, MirrorD ;
    jp CLEARRADIO
    TESTCODE:
    cp ID_B, #18 ; If this was a touch code,
    jp uge, TCReceived ; handle appropriately
    tm RFlag, #00000100b ; If we have received a B code,
    jr z, AorDCode ; then check for the learn mode
    cp ZZWIN, #64 ; Test 0000 learn window
    jr ugt, AorDCode ; if out of window no learn
    cp Radio1H, #90H ;
    jr nz, AorDCode ;
    cp Radio1L, #29H ;
    jr nz, AorDCode ;
    ZZLearn:
    push RP
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP
    call SETLEARN
    pop RP
    jp CLEARRADIO
    AorDCode:
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; Test for in learn limits mode
    jr uge, FS1 ; If so, don't blink the LED
    cp FAULTFLAG,#0FFH ; test for a active fault
    jr z,FS1 ; if a avtive fault skip led set and reset
    and ledport,#ledl ; turn on the LED for flashing from signal
    FS1:
    call TESTCODES ; test the codes
    cp +T+L,15 L_A_C, #070H ; Test for in learn limits mode
    jr uge, FS2 ; If so, don't blink the LED
    cp FAULTFLAG,#0FFH ; test for a active fault
    jr z,FS2 ; if a avtive fault skip led set and reset
    cr ledport,#ledh ; turn off the LED for flashing from signal
    FS2:
    cp ADDRESS,#0FFH ; test for the not matching state
    jr nz,GOTMATCH ; if matching the send a command if needed
    jp CLEARRADIO ; clear the radio
    SimRollCheck:
    inc ADDRESS ; Point to the rolling code
    ; (note: High word always zero)
    inc ADDRESS ; Point to rest of the counter
    call READMEMORY ; Fetch lower word of counter
    ld CounterC, MTEMPH ;
    ld CounterD, MTEMPL ;
    cp CodeT2, CounterC ; If the two counters are equal,
    jr nz, UpdateSCode ; then don't activate
    cp CodeT3, Counter D ;
    jr nz, UpdateSCode ;
    jp CLEARRADIO ; Counters equal -- throw it out
    UpdateSCode:
    ld MTEMPH, CodeT2 ; Always update the counter if the
    ld MTEMPL, CodeT3 ; fixed portions match
    call WRITEMEMORY
    sub CodeT3, CounterD ; Compare the two codes
    sbc CodeT2, CounterC ;
    tm CodeT2, #10000000b ; If the result is negative,
    jp nz, CLEARRADIO ; then don't activate
    jp MatchGoodSim ; Match good -- handle normally
    GOTMATCH:
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; If we are in fixed mode,
    jr z, MatchGood2 ; then the match is already valid
    tm RadioC, #10000000b ; If this was a Siminor transmitter,
    jr nz, SimRollCheck ; then test the roll in its own way
    tm BitMask, #10101010b ; If this was NOT an open/close/stop trans,
    jr z, RollCheckB ; then we must check the rolling value
    cp SW_B, #02 ; If the o/c/s had a key other than ‘2’
    jr nz, MatchGoodOCS ; then don't check / update the roll
    RollCheckB:
    call TestCounter ; Rolling mode -- compare the counter values
    cp CMP, #EQUAL ; If the code is equal,
    jp z, NOTNEWMATCH ; then just keep it
    cp CMP, #FWDWIN ; If we are not in forward window,
    jp nz, CheckPast ; then forget the code
    MatchGood:
    ld Radio1H, MirrorA ; Store the coutner into memory
    ld Radio1L, MirrorB ; to keep the roll current
    ld Radio3H, MirrorC ;
    ld Radio3L, MirrorD ;
    dec ADDRESS ; Line up the address for writing
    call WRITECODE
    MatchGoodOCS:
    MatchGoodSim:
    or RFlag,#00000001B ; set the flag for recieving without error
    cp RTO,#RDPOPTIME ; test for the timer time out
    jp ult,NOTNEWMATCH ; if the timer is active then donor reissure cma
    cp ADDRESS, #23H ; If the code was the rolling touch code,
    jr z, MatchGood2 ; then we already know the transmitter type
    call SetMask ; Set the mask bits properly
    ld ADDRESS, #RTYPEADDR ; Fetch the transmitter config. bits
    call READMEMORY ;
    tm RFlag, #10000000b ; If we are in the upper word,
    jr nz, Upper D ; check the upper transmitters
    LowerD:
    and BitMask, MTEMPL ; Isolate out transmitter
    jr TransType ; Check out transmitter type
    UpperD:
    and BitMask, MTEMPH ; Isolate our transmitter
    TransType:
    tm BitMask, #01010101b ; Test for light transmitter
    jr nz, LightTrans ; Execute light transmitter
    tm BitMask, #10101010b ; Test for Open/Close/Stop Transmitter
    jr nz, OCSTrans ; Execute open/close/stop transmitter
    ; Otherwise, standard command transmitter
    MatchGood2:
    or RFlag, #00000001B ; set the flag for recieving without error
    cp RTO,#RDROPTIME ; test fro the timer time out
    jp ult, NOTNEWMATCH ; if the timer is active then donot reissure cmd
    TESTVAC:
    cp VACFLAG,#00B ; test for the vacation mode
    jp z,TSTSDISABLE ; if not in vacation mode test the system disable
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ;
    jr z, FixedB
    cp ADDRESS,#23H ; If this was a touch code,
    jp nz, NOTNEWMATCH ; then do a command
    jp TSTSDISABLE ;
    FixedB:
    cp ADDRESS,#19H ; test for the B code
    jp nz,NOTNEWMATCH ; if not a B not a match
    TSTSDISABLE:
    cp SDISABLE,#32 ; test for 4 second
    jp ult,NOTNEWMATCH ; if 6 s ot up not a new code
    clr RTO ; clear the radio timeout
    cp ONEP2,#10 ; test for the 1.2 second time out
    jp nz,NOTNEWMATCH ; if the timer is active then skip the command
    RADIOCOMMAND:
    clr RTO ; clear the radio timeout tm RFlag,#00000100b ; test for a B code
    jr z,BDONTSET ; if not a b code donot set flag
    zzwinclr:
    clr ZZWIN ; flag got matching B code
    ld CodeFlag,#BRECEIVED ; flag for aobs bypass
    BDONTSET:
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; If we were positioning the up limit,
    jr ult, NormalRadio ; then start the learn cycle
    jr z, FirstLearn ;
    cp L_A_C, #071H ; If we had an error,
    jp nz, CLEARRADIO ; re-learn, otherwise ignore
    ReLearning:
    ld L_A_C, #072H ; Set the re-learn state
    call SET_UP_DIR_STATE ;
    jp CLEARRADIO ;
    FirstLearn:
    ld L_A_C, #073H ; Set the learn state
    call SET_UP_POS_STATE ; Start from the “up limit”
    jp CLEARRADIO ;
    NormalRadio:
    clr LAST_CMD ; mark the last command as radio
    ld RADIO_CMD,#0AAH ; set the radio command
    jp CLEARRADIO ; return
    LightTrans:
    clr RTO ; Clear the radio timeout
    cp ONEP2,#00 ; Test for the 1.2 sec. time out
    jp nz, NOTNEWMATCH ; If it isn't timed out, leave
    ld SW_DATA, #LIGHT_SW ; Set a light command
    jp CLEARRADIO ; return
    OCSTrans:
    cp SDISABLE, #32 ; Test for 4 second system disable
    jp ult, NOTNEWMATCH ; if not done not a new code
    cp VACFLAG, #00H ; If we are in vacation mode,
    jp nz, NOTNEWMATCH ; don't obey the transmitter
    clr RTO ; Clear the radio timeout
    cp ONEP2, #00 ; test for the 1.2 second timeout
    jp nz, NOTNEWMATCH ; If the timer is active the skip command
    cp SW_B, #02 ; If the open button is pressed,
    jr nz, CloseOrSTop ; then process it
    OpenButton:
    cp STATE, #STOP ; If we are stopped of
    jr z, OpenUp ; at the down limit, then
    cp STATE, #DN_POSITION ; begin to move up
    jr z, OpenUp ;
    cp STATE, #DN_DIRECTION ; If we are moving down,
    jr nz, OCSExit ; then autoreverse
    ld REASON, #010H ; Set the reason as radio
    call SET_ARVE_STATE ;
    jr OCSExit ;
    OpenUp:
    ld REASON, #010H ; Set the reason as radio
    call SET_UP_DIR_STATE ;
    OCSExit:
    jp CLEARRADIO ;
    CloseOrSTop:
    cp SW_B, #01 ; If the stop button is pressed,
    jr no, CloseButton ; then process it
    StopButton:
    cp STATE, #UP_DIRECTION ; If we are moving or in
    jr z, StopIt ; the autoreverse state,
    cp STATE, #DN_DIRECTION ; then stop the door
    jr z, StopIt ;
    cp STATE, #AUTO_REV ;
    jr z, StopIt
    jr OCSExit
    StopIt:
    ld REASON, #010H ; Set the reason as radio
    call SET_STOP_STATE
    jr OCSExit
    CloseButton:
    cp STATE, #UP_POSITION ; If we are at the up limit
    jr z, CloseIt ; or stopped in travel,
    cp STATE, #STOP ; then send the door down
    jr z, CloseIt ;
    jr OCSExit
    CloseIt:
    ld REASON, #010H ; Set the reason as radio
    call SET_DN_DIR_STATE
    jr OCSExit
    SetMask:
    and RFlag, #01111111bv ; Reset the page 1 bit
    tm ADDRESS, #11110000b ; If our address is on page 1,
    jr z, InLowerByte ; then set the proper flag
    or RFlag, #10000000b ;
    InLowerByte:
    tm ADDRESS, #00001000b ; Binary search to set the
    jr z, ZeroOrFour ; proper bits in the bit mask
    EightOrTwelve:
    ld BitMask, #11110000b
    jr LSNybble
    ZeroOrFour:
    ld BitMask, #00001111b ;
    LSNybble:
    tm ADDRESS, #00000100b
    jr z, ZeroOrEight
    FourOrTwelve:
    and BitMask, #11001100b ;
    ret
    ZeroOrEight:
    and BitMask, #00110011b ;
    ret
    TESTCODES:
    ld ADDRESS, #RTYPEADDR ; Get the radio types
    call READMEMORY ;
    ld RadioTypes, MTEMPL ;
    ld RTypes2, MTEMPH ;
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ;
    jr nz, RollCheck ;
    clr RadioTypes ;
    clr RTypes2
    RollCheck:
    clr ADDRESS ; start address is 0
    NEXTCODE:
    call SetMask ; Get the approprite bit mask
    and +T+L,15 BitMask, RadioTypes ; Isolate the current transmitter types
    HAVEMASK:
    call READMEMORY ; read the word at this address
    cp MTEMPH, radioln ; test for the match
    jr nz,NOMATCH ; if not matching then do next address
    cp MTEMPL,radioll ; test for the match
    jr nz,NOMATCH ; if not matching then do next address
    inc ADDRESS ; set the second half of the code
    call READMEMORY ; read the word at this address
    tm BitMask, #10101010b ; If this is an Open/Close/Stop trans.,
    jr nz/ CheckOCS1 ; then do the different check
    cp CodeFlag, #LRNOCS ; If we are in open/clsoe/stop learn mode,
    jr z, CheckOCS1 ; then do the different check
    cp MTEMPH,radio3h ; test for the match
    jr nz,NOMATCH2 ; if not matching then do the next address
    cp MTEMPL,radio3; ; test for the match
    jr nz,NOMATCH2 ; if not matching then do the next address
    ret ; return with the address of the match
    CheckOCS1:
    sub MTEMPL, radio3l ; Subtract the radio from the memory
    sbc MTEMPH, radio3h ;
    cp CodeFlag, #LRNOCS ; If we are trying to learn open/close/stop,
    jr nz, Positive ; then we must complement to be postitive
    com MTEMPL ;
    com MTEMPH ;
    add MTEMPL, #1 ; Switch from ones complement to 2's
    adc MTEMPH, #0 ; complement
    Positive:
    cp MTEMPH, #00 ; We must be within 2 to match properly
    jr nz, NOMATCH2 ;
    cp MTEMPL, #02 ;
    jr ugt, NOMATCH2 ;
    ret ; Return with the address of the match
    NOMATCH:
    inc ADDRESS ; set the address to the next code
    NOMATCH2:
    inc ADDRESS ; set the address to the next code
    tm RadioMode, #ROLL_MASK ; If we are in fixed mode,
    jr z, AtNextAdd ; then we are at the next address inc ADDRESS ; Roll mode -- advance past the counter
    inc ADDRESS ; Roll mode -- advance past the counter
    inc ADDRESS ;
    cp ADDRESS, #10H ; If we are on the second page
    jr nz, AtNextAdd ; then get the other tx. types
    ld RadioTypes, RTypes2 ;
    AtNextAdd:
    cp ADDRESS,#22H ; test for the last address
    jr ult,NEXTCODE ; if not the last address then try again
    GOTNOMATCH:
    ld ADDRESS,#0FFH ; set the no match flag
    ret ; and return
    NOTNEWMATCH:
    clr RTO ; reset the radio time out
    and RFlag,#00000001B ; clear radio flags leaving recieving w/o error
    clr radioc ; clear the radio bit counter
    ld LEARNT,#0FFH ; set the learn timer “turn off” and backup
    jp RADIO_EXIT ; return
    CheckPast:
    ; Proprietary algorithm for maintaining
    ; rolling code counter
    ; Jumps to either MatchGood, UpdatePast or CLEARRADIO
    UpdatePast:
    ld LastMatch, ADDRESS ; Store the last fixed code received
    ld PCounterA, MirrorA ; Store the last counter received
    ld PCounterB, MirrorB ;
    ld PCounterC, MirrorC ;
    ld PCounterD, MirrorD ;
    CLEARRADIO2:
    ld LEARNT, #0FFH ; Turn off the learn mode timer
    clr CodeFlag
    CLEARRADIO:
    .IF TwoThirtyThree
    and IRQ,#00111111B ; clear the bit setting directio to neg edge
    .ENDIF
    ld PINFILTER,#0FFH ; set flag to active
    CLEARRADIOA:
    tm RFlag,#00000001B ; test for receiving without error
    jr z,SKIPRTO ; if flag not se then donot clear timer
    clr RTO ; clear radio timer
    SKIPRTO:
    clr radioc ; clear the radio counter
    clr RFlag ; clear the radio flag
    clr ID_B ; Clear the ID bits
    jp RADIO_EXIT ; return
    TCReceived:
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; Test for in learn limits mode
    jr uge, TestTruncate ; If so, don't blink the LED
    cp FAULTFLAG, #0FFH ; If no fault
    jr z, TestTruncate ; turn on the led
    and ledport, #ledl ;
    jr TestTruncate ; Truncate off most significant digit
    TruncTC:
    sub RadiolL, #0E3h ; Subtract out 3^ 9 to truncate
    sbc RadiolH, #04Ch ;
    TestTruncate:
    cp RadiolH, #04Ch ; If we are greater than 3^ 9,
    jr ugt, TruncT0 ; truncate down
    jr ult, GotT0 ;
    cp Radio1L, #0E3h ;
    jr uge, TruncT0 ;
    GotTC:
    ld ADDRESS, #TOUCHID ; Check to make sure the ID code is good
    call READMEMORY ;
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; Test for in learn limits mode
    jr uge, CheckID ; If so, don't blink the LED
    cp FAULTFLAG, #0FFH ; If no fault,
    jr z, CheckID ; turn off the LED
    or ledport, #ledh ;
    CheckID:
    cp MTEMPH, Radio3H ;
    jr nz, CLEARRADIO ;
    cp MTEMPL, Radio3L ;
    jr nz, CLEARRADIO ;
    call TestCounter ; Test the rolling code counter
    cp CMP, #EQUAL ; If the counter is equal,
    jp z, NOTNEWMATCH ; then call it the same code
    cp CMP, #FWDWIN ;
    jr nz, CLEARRADIO ;
    ; Counter good -- update it
    ld COUNT1H, Radiolh ; Back up radio code
    ld COUNT1L, RadiolL ;
    ld RadioH, MirrorA ;Write the counter
    ld RadioL, MirrorB ;
    ld Radio3H, MirrorC ;
    ld Radio3L, MirrorD ;
    dec ADDRESS
    call WRITECODE
    ld Radio1H, COUNT1H ; Restore the radio code
    ld Radio1L, COUNT1L ;
    cp CodeFlag, #NORMAL ; Find and jump to current mode
    jr z, NormT0 ;
    cp CodeFlag, #LRNTEMP ;
    jp z, LearnTMP ;
    cp CodeFlag, #LPNDUPIN ;
    jp z, LearnDur ;
    jp CLEARRADIO ;
    NormTC:
    ld ADDRESS, #TOUCHPERM ; Compare the four-digit touch
    call READMEMORY ; code to our permanent password
    cp Radio1H, MTEMPH ;
    jr nz, CheckTCTemp ;
    cp Radio1L, MTEMPL ;
    jr nz, CheckTCTemp ;
    cp SW_B, #ENTER ; If the ENTER key was pressed,
    jp z, RADIOCOMMAND ; issue a B code radio command
    cp SW_B, #POUND ; If the user pressed the pound key,
    jr z, TCLearn ; enter the learn mode
    ; Star key pressed -- start 30 s timer
    clr LEARNT ;
    ld FLASH COUNTER, #06h ; Blink the worklight three
    ld FLASH_DELAY, #FLASH_TIME ; times quickly
    ld FLASH_FLAG, #0FFH ;
    ld CodeFlag, #LRNTEMP ; Enter learn temporary mode
    jp CLEARRADIO ;
    TCLearn:
    ld FLASH_COUNTER, #04h ; Blink the worklight two
    ld FLASH_DELAY, #FLASH TIME ; times quickly
    ld FLASH FLAG, #0FFH ;
    push RP ; Enter learn mode
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP
    call SETLEARN
    pop RP
    jp CLEARADIO
    CheckTCTemp:
    ld ADDRESS, #TOUCHTEMP ; Compare the four-digit touch
    call READMEMORY ; code to our temporary password
    cp Radio1H, MTEMPH ;
    jp nz, CLEARRADIO ;
    cp Radio1L, MTEMPL ;
    jp nz, CLEARRADIO ;
    cp STATE, #DN_POSITION ; If we are not at the down limit,
    jp nz, RADIOCOMMAND ; issue a command regardless
    ld ADDRESS, #DUPAT ; If the duration is at zero,
    call READMEMORY ; then don't issue a command
    cp MTEMPL, #00 ;
    jp z, CLEARRADIO ;
    cp MTEMPH, #ACTIVATIONS ; If we are in number of activations
    jp nz, RADIOCOMMAND ; mode, then decrement the
    dec MTEMPL ; number of activations left
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    jp RADIOCOMMAND
    LearnTMP:
    cp SW_B, #ENTER ; If the user pressed a key other
    jp nz, CLEARRADIO ; then enter, reject the code
    ld ADDRESS, #TOUCHPERM ; If the code entered matches the
    call READMEMORY ; permanent touch code,
    cp Radio1H, MTEMPH ; then reject the code as a
    jp nz, TempGood ; temporary code
    cp Radio1L, MTEMPL ;
    jp z, CLEARRADIO ;
    TempGood:
    ld ADDRESS, #TOUCHTEMP ; Write the code into temp.
    ld MTEMPH, Radio1H ; code memory
    ld MTEMPL, Radio1L ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    ld FLASH COUNTER, #08h ; Blink the worklight four
    ld FLASH_DELAY, #FLASH_TIME ; times quickly
    ld FLASH_FLAG, #0FFH ;
    ; Start 30 s timer
    clr LEARNT
    ld CodeFlag, #LRNDURTN ; Enter learn duration mode
    jp CLEARRADIO ;
    LearnDur:
    cp Radio1H, #00 ; If the duration was > 255,
    jp nz, CLEARRADIO ; reject the duration entered
    cp SW_B, #POUND ; If the user pressed the pound
    jr z, NumDuration ; key, number of activations mode
    cp SW_B, #STAR ; If the star key was pressed,
    jr z, HoursDur ; enter the timer mode
    jp CLEARRADIO ; Enter pressed -- reject code
    NumDuration:
    ld MTEMPH, #ACTIVATIONS ; Flag number of activations mode
    jr DurationIn ;
    HoursDur:
    ld MTEMPH, #HOURS ; Flag number of hours mode
    DurationIn:
    ld MTEMPL, Radio1l ; Load on duration
    ld ADDRESS, #DURAT ; Write duration and mode
    call WRITEMEMORY ; into nonvolatile memory
    ; Give worklight one long blink
    xcr P0, #WORKLIGHT ; Give the light one blink
    ld LIGHTS, #244 ; Lasting one second
    clr CodeFlag ; Clear the learn flag
    jp CLEARRADIO
    Test Rolling Code Counter Subroutine
    Note: CounterA-D will be used as temp registers
    TestCounter:
    push RP
    srp #CounterGroup
    inc ADDRESS Point to the rolling code counter
    call READMEMORY ; Fetch lower word of counter
    ld countera, MTEMPH
    ld counterb, MTEMPL
    inc ADDRESS ; Point to rest of the counter
    call READMEMORY ; Fetch upper word of counter
    ld countero, MTEMPH
    ld countera, MTEMPL
    Subtract old counter (countera-d) from current
    counter (mirrora-d) and store in countera-d
    com countera ; Obtain twos complement of counter
    com counterb
    com counterc
    com counterd
    add counterd, #01H
    adc counterc, #00H
    adc counterb, #00H
    adc countera, #00H
    add counterd, mirrord ; Subtract
    adc counterc, mirrorc
    adc counterb, mirrorb
    adc countera, mirrora
    If the msb of counterd is negative, check to see
    if we are inside the negative window
    tm counterd, #10000000B
    jr z, ChecckFwdWin
    CheckBackWin:
    cp countera, #0FFH ; Check to see if we are
    jr nz, OutOfWindow ; less than −0400H
    cp counterb, #0FFH ; (i.e. are we greater than
    jr nz, OutOfWindow ; 0xFFFFFC00H
    cp counterd, #0FCH ;
    jr ult, OutOfWindow ;
    InBacKWin:
    ld CMP, #BACKWN ; Return in back window
    jr CompDone
    CheckFwdWin:
    cp countera, #00H ; Check to see if we are less
    jr nz, Out Of Window ; than 0O00 32″1 = 1024
    cp counterb, #00h ; activations
    jr nz, OutOf Window ;
    cp counterd, #0CH ;
    jr uge, OufOfWindow
    cp counterd, #00H
    jr nz, InFwdWin
    cp counterd, #00H
    jr nz, InFwdwin
    CountersEqual:
    ld CMP, #EQUAL ;Return equal counters
    jr CompDone
    InFwdWin:
    ld CMP, #FWDWN ;Return in forward window
    jr CompDone
    OutOfWindow
    ld CMP, #OUTOFWIN ;Return out of any window
    CompDone:
    pop RP
    ret
    Clear interrupt
    ClearRadio:
    cp RadioMode, #ROLL_TEST ;If in fixed or rolling mode,
    jr ugt, MODEDONE ; then we cannot switch
    tm T125MS, #00000001b ; If our ‘coin toss’ was a zero,
    jr z, SETROLL ; set as the rolling mode
    SETFIXED:
    ld RadioMode, #FIXED_TEST
    call FixedNums
    jp MODEDONE
    SETROLL:
    ld RadioMode, ROLL_TEST
    call RollNums
    MODEDONE:
    clr RadioTimeOut ; clear radio timer
    clr RadioC ; clear the radio counter
    clr RFlag ; clear the radio flags
    RRETURN:
    pop RP ; reset the RP
    iret ; return
    FixedNums:
    ld BitThresn, #FIXTHH
    ld SyncThresh, #FIXSYNC
    ld MaxBits, #FIXBITS
    ret
    RollNums:
    ld BitThresh, #DTHP
    ld SyncThresh, #DSYNC
    ld MaxBits, #DBITS
    ret
    rotate mirror LoopCount * 2 then add
    RotateMirrorAdd:
    rcf ; clear the carry
    rlc mirrord ;
    rlc mirrorc ;
    rlc mirrorb ;
    rlc mirrora ;
    djnz loopcount,RotateMirrorAdd ; loop till done
    Add mirror to counter
    AddMirrorToCounter:
    add counterd,mirrord ;
    adc counterc,mirrorc ;
    adc counterb,mirrorb ;
    adc countera,mirrora ;
    ret
    LEARN DEBOUNCES THE LEARN SWITCH 80mS
    TIMES OUT THE LEARN MODE 30 SECONDS
    DEBOUNCES THE LEARN SWITCH FOR ERASE 6 SECONDS
    LEARN:
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP ; set the register pointer
    cp STATE, *DN_POSITION ; test for motor stoped
    jr z,TESTLEARN ;
    cp STATE, #UP_POSITION ; test for motor stoped
    jr z,TESTLEARN ;
    cp STATE,#STOP ; test for motor stoped
    jr z,TESTLEARN ;
    cp L_A_C,#074H ; Test for traveling
    jr z,TESTLEARN ;
    ld learnt,#0FFH ; set the learn timer
    cp learnt,#240 ; test for the learn 30 second timeout
    jr nz,ERASETEST ; if not then test erase
    jr learnoff ; if 30 seconds then turn off the learn mode
    TESTLEARN:
    cp learndb,#236 ; test for the debounced release
    jr nz,LEARNNOTRELEASED ; if debouncer not released then jump
    LEARNRELEASED:
    SmartRelease:
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; Test for in learn limits mode
    jr nz, NormLearnBreak ; If not, treat the break as normal
    ld REASON, #00H ; Set the reason as command
    call SET_STOP_STATE ;
    NormLearnBreak:
    clr LEARNDB ; clear the debouncer
    ret ; return
    LEARNNOTRELEASED:
    cp CodeFlag,#LRNTEMP ;test for learn mode
    jr uge,INLEARN ; if in learn jump
    cp learndb,#20 ; test for debounce period
    jr nz,ERASETEST ; if not then test the erase period
    SETLEARN:
    call SmartSet ;
    ERASETEST:
    cp LA_C, #070H ; Test for in learn limits mode
    jr uge,ERASERELEASE ; If so, DON'T ERASE THE MEMORY
    cp learndb,#0FFH ; test for learn button active
    jr nz,ERASERELEASE ; if button released set the erase timer
    cp eraset,#0FFH ; test for timer active
    jr nz,ERASETIMING ; if the timer active jump
    clr eraset ; clear the erase timer
    ERASETIMING:
    cp eraset,#48 ; test for the erase period
    jr z,ERASETIME ; if timed out the erase
    ret ; else we return
    ERASETIME:
    or ledport,#ledh ; turn off the led
    ld Skipradio,#NOEECOMM ; set the flag to skip the radio read
    call CLEARCODES ; clear all codes in memory
    clr skipradio ; reset the flag to skip radio
    ld learnt,#0FFH ; set the learn timer
    clr CodeFlag
    ret ; return
    SmartSet:
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; Test for in learn limits mode
    jr nz, NormLearnMake1 ; If not, treat normally
    ld REASON, #00H ; Set the reason as command
    call SET_DN_NOBLINK ;
    jr LearnMakeDone ;
    NormlearnMake1:
    cp L_A_C, #074H ; Test for traveling down
    jr nz, NormLearnMake2 ; If not, treat normally
    ld L_A_C, #075H ; Reverse off false floor
    ld REASON, #00H ; Set the reason as command
    call SET_AREV_STATE ;
    jr LearnMakeDone ;
    NormLearnMake2:
    clr LEARNT ; clear the learn timer
    ld CodeFlag, #REGLEARN ; Set the learn flag
    and ledport,#ledl ; turn on the led
    clr VACFLAG ; clear vacation mode
    ld ADDRESS,#VACATIONADDR ; set the non vol address for vacation
    clr MTEMPH ; clear the data for cleared vacation
    clr MTEMPL ;
    ld SKIPRADIO,#NOEECOMM ; set the flag
    call WRITEMEMORY ; write the memory
    clr SKIPRADIO ; clear the flag
    LearnMakeDone:
    ld LEARNDB,#0FFH ; set the debouncer
    ret
    ERASERELEASE:
    ld eraset,#0FFH ; turn off the erase timer
    cp learndb,#236 ; test for the debounced release
    jr z,LEARNRELEASE: ; if debouncer not released then jump
    ret ; return
    INLEARN:
    cp learndb,#20 ; test for the debounce period
    jr nz,TESTLEARNTIMER ; if not then test the learn timer for.time 0ut
    ld learnd,#0FFH ; set the learn db
    TESTLEARNTIMER:
    cp learnt,#240 ; test for the learn 30 second timeout
    jr nz, ERASETEST ; if not then test erase
    learnoff:
    or ledport,#ledh ; turn off the led
    ld learnt,#0FFh ; set the learn timer
    ld learndb,#0FFH ; set the learn debounce
    clr CodeFlag ; Clear ANY code types
    jr ERASETEST ; test the erase timer
    WRITE WORD TO MEMORY
    ADDRESS IS SET IN REG ADDRESS
    DATA IS IN REG MTEMPH AND MTEMPL
    RETURN ADDRESS IS UNCHANGED
    WRITEMEMORY:
    push RP ; SAVE THE RP
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP ; set the register pointer
    call STARTB ; output the start bit
    ld serial,#11110000B ; set byte to enable write
    call SERIALOUT ; output the byte
    and csport,#osl ; reset the chip select
    call STARTB ; output the start bit
    ld serial,#01000000B ; set the byte for write
    or serial,address ; or in the address
    call SERIALOUT ; output the byte
    ld serial,mtemph ; set the first byte to write
    call SERIALOUT ; output the byte
    ld serial,mtempl ; set the second byte to write
    call SERIALOUT ; output the byte
    call ENDWRITE ; wait for the ready status
    call STARTB ; output the start bit
    ld serial,#00000000B ; set byte to disable write
    call SERIALOUT ; output the byte
    and csport,#csl ; reset the chip select
    or P2M_SHADOW,#clockh ; Change program switch back to read
    ld P2M,P2M_SHADOW ;
    pop RP ; reset the RP
    ret
    READ WORD FROM MEMORY
    ADDRESS IS SET IN REG ADDRESS
    DATA IS RETURNED IN REG MTEMPH AND MTEMPL
    ADDRESS IS UNCHANGED
    READMEMORY:
    push RP ;
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP ; set the register pointer
    call STARTB ; output the start bit
    ld serial,#1000000DB ; preamble for read
    or serial,address ; or in the address
    call SERIALOUT ; output the byte
    call SERIALIN ; read the first byte
    ld mtemph,serial ; save the value in mtemph
    call SERIALIN ; read the second byte
    ld mtempl,serial ; save the value in mtempl
    and csport,#csl ; reset the chip select
    or P2M_SHADOW,#clockh ; Change program switch back to read
    ld P2M, P2M_SHADOW ;
    pop RP
    ret
    WRITE CODE TO 2 MEMORY ADDRESS
    CODE IS IN RADIO1H RADIO1L RADIO3H RADIO3L
    WRITECODE:
    push RP ;
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP ; set the register pointer
    ld mtemph,Radio1H ; transfer the data from radio 1 to the temps
    ld mtemp1,Radio1L ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ; write the temp bits
    inc address ; next address
    ld mtemph,Radio3H ; transfer the data from radio 3 to the temps
    ld mtempl,Radio3L ;
    call WRITEMEMORY ; write the temps
    pop RP ;
    ret ; return
    CLEAR ALL RADIO CODES IN THE MEMORY
    CLEARCODES:
    push RP ;
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP ; set the register pointer
    ld MTEMPH,#0FFH ; set the codes to illegal codes
    ld MTEMPL,#0FFH ;
    ld address,#00H ; clear address 0
    CLEARC:
    call WRITEMEMORY ; “A0”
    inc address ; set the next address
    cp address,#(AddressCounter - 1) ; test for the last address of radio
    jr ult,CLEARC
    clr mtemph ; clear data
    clr mtempl
    call WRITEMEMORY ; Clear radio types
    ld address,#AddressAPointer ; clear address F
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    ld address,#MODEADDR ;Set EEPROM memcry as fixed test
    call WRITEMEMORY ;
    ld RadioMode, #FIXED TEST ;Revert to fixed mode testing
    ld BitThresh, #FIXTHR
    ld SyncThresh, #FIXSYNC
    ld MaxBits, #FIXBITS
    CodesCleared:
    pop RP ;
    ret ; return
    START BIT FOR SERIAL NONVOL
    ALSO SETS DATA DIRECTION AND AND CS
    STARTB:
    and P2M_SHADOW, #(clockl & dol) ; Set output mode for clock line and
    ld P2M,P2M_SHADOW ; I/O lines
    and csport,#csl ;
    and clkport,#clockl ; start by clearing the bits
    and dioport,#dol ;
    or csport,#csn ; set the chip select
    or dioport,#doh ; set the data out high
    cr clkport,#clockh ; set the clock
    and clkport,#clockl ; reset the clock low
    and dioport,#dol ; set the data low
    ret ; return
    END OF CODE WRITE
    ENDWRITE:
    and csport,#csl ; reset the chip select
    nop ; delay
    cr csport,#csn ; set the chip select
    P2M_SHADOW, #con ; Set the data line to input
    ld P2M,P2M_SHADOW ; set port 2 mode forcing input mode data
    ENDWRITELOOP:
    ld temph,dioport ; read the port
    and temph,#aoh ; mask
    jr z,ENDWRITELOOP ; if the bit is low then loop until done
    and csport,#csl ; reset the chip select
    or P2M_SHADOW, #clockh ; Reset the clock line to read smart button
    and P2M_SHADOW, #dol ; Set the data line back to output
    ld P2M,P2M_SHADOW ; set port 2 mode forcing output mode
    ret
    SERIAL OUT
    OUTPUT THE BYTE IN SERIAL
    SERIALOUT:
    and P2M_SHADOW,#(dol & clockl) ; Set the clock and data lines to outputs
    ld P2M,P2M_SHADOW ; set port 2 mode forcing output mode data
    ld templ,#8H ; set the count for eight bits
    SERIALOUTLOOP:
    rcl serial ; get the bit to output into the carry
    jr nc,ZEROOUT ; output a zero if no carry
    ONEOUT:
    or dioport,#doh ; set the data out high
    or clkport,#clockh ; set the clock high
    and clkport,#clockl ; reset the clock low
    and dioport,#dol ; reset the data out low
    djnz texnpl,SERIALOUTLOOP
    ; loop till done
    ret ; return
    ZEROOUT:
    and dioport,#dol ; reset the data out low
    or clkport,#clockh ; set the clock high
    and clkport,#clockl ; reset the clock low
    and dioport,#dol ; reset the data out low
    djnz templ,SERIALOUTLOOP
    ; loop till done
    ret ; return
    SERIAL IN
    INPUTS A BYTE TO SERIAL
    SERIALIN:
    or P2M_SHADOW, #doh ; Force the data line to input
    ld P2M,P2M_SHADOW ; set port 2 mode forcing input mode data
    ld templ,#8H ; set the count for eight bits
    SERIALINLOOP:
    or clkport,#clockh ; set the clock high
    rcf ; reset the carry flag
    ld temph,dioport ; read the port
    and temph,#doh ; mask out the bits
    jr z,DONTSET
    scf ; set the carry flag
    DONTSET:
    rlc serial ; get the bit into the byte
    and clkport,#clockl ; reset the clock low
    djnz temp1,SERIALINLOOP
    ; loop till done
    ret ; return
    TIMER UPDATE FROM INTERUPT EVERY 0.256mS **
    SkipPulse:
    tm SKIPRADIO, #NOINT ;If the ‘no radio interrupt’
    jr nz, NoPulse ;flag is set, just leave
    or IMR,#RadioImr ; turn on the radio
    NoPulse:
    iret
    TIMERUD:
    tm SKIPRADIO, #NOINT ;If the ‘no radio interrupt’
    jr nz, NoEnable ;flag is set, just leave
    or IMR,#RadioImr ; turn on the radio
    NoEnable:
    decw TOEXITWORD ; decrement the T0 extension
    T0ExtDone:
    tm P2, #LINEINPIN ; Test the AC line in
    jr z, LowAC ; If it's low, mark zero crossing
    HighAC:
    inc LineCtr ; Count the high time
    jr LineDone ;
    LowAC:
    cp LineCtr, #08 ; If the line was low before
    jr ult, HighAC ; then one-shot the edge of the line
    ld LinePer, LineCtr ; Store the high time
    clr LineCtr ; Reset the counter
    ld PhaseTMR, PhaseTime ; Reset the timer for the phase control
    LineDone:
    cp PowerLevel, #20 ; Test for at full wave of phase
    jr uge, PhaseOn ; If not, turn off at the start of the phase
    cp PowerLevel, #00 ; If we're at the minimum,
    jr z, PhaseOff ; then never turn the phase control on
    dec PhaseTMR ; Update the timer for phase control
    jr mi, PhaseOn ; If we are past the zero point, turn on the line
    PhaseOff:
    and PhasePrt, #˜PhaseHigh ; Turn off the phase control
    jr PhaseDone
    PhaseOn:
    cr PhasePrt, #PhaseHigh ; Turn on the phase control
    PhaseDone:
    tm P3, #0000010b ; Test the RPM in pin
    jr nz, IncRPMDB ; If we're high, increment the filter
    DecRPMDB:
    cp RPM_FILTER, #00 ; Decrement the value of the filter if
    jr z, RPMFiltered ; we're not already at zero
    dec RPM_FILTER ;
    jr RPMFiltered ;
    IncRPMDB:
    inc RPM_FILTER ; Increment the value of the filter
    jr nz, RPMFiltered ; and back turn if necessary
    dec RPM_FILTER ;
    RPMFiltered:
    cp RPM_FILTER, #12 ; If we've seen 2.5 ms of high time
    jr z, VectorRPMHigh ; then vector high
    cp RPM_FILTER, #255 - 12 ; If we've seen 2.5 ms of low time
    jr nz, TaskSwitcher ; then vector low
    VectorRPMLow:
    clr RPM_FILTER ;
    jr TaskSwitcher ;
    VectorRPMHigh:
    ld RPM_FILTER, #0FFH ;
    TaskSwitcher
    tm T0EXT, #00000001b ; skip everyother pulse
    jr nz,SkipPulse
    tm T0EXT,#00000010b ; Test for odd numbered task
    jr nz,TASK1357 ; If so do the 1ms timer undate
    tm T0EXT,#00000100b ; Test for task 2 or 6
    jr z, TASK04 ; If not, then go to Tasks 0 and 4
    tm T0EXT,#00001000b ; Test for task 6
    jr nz, TASK6 ; If so, jump
    ; Otherwise, we must be in task 2
    TASK2:
    or IMP,#RETURN_IMR ; turn on the interrupt
    ei
    call STATEMACHINE ; do the motor function
    iret
    TASK04:
    or IMR,#RETURN_IMR ; turn on the interrupt
    ei
    push rp ; save the rp
    srp #TIMER_GROUP ; set the rp for the switches
    call switches ; test the switches
    pop rp
    iret
    TASK6:
    or IMR,#RETURN_IMR ; turn on the interrupt
    ei
    call TIMER4MS ; do the four ms timer
    iret
    TASK1357:
    push RP
    or IMR,#RETURN_IMR ; turn on the interrupt
    ei
    ONEMS:
    tm p0,#DOWN_COMP ; Test down force pot.
    jr nz,HigherDn Average too low -- output pulse
    LowerDn:
    and p3,#(˜DOWN_OUT) ; take pulse output low
    jr DnPotDone
    HigherDn:
    or p3,#DOWN_OUT ; Output a high pulse
    inc DN_TEMP ; Increase measured duty cycle
    DnPotDone:
    tm p0,#UP_COMP ; Test the up force pot.
    jr nz,HigherUp ; Average too low -- output pulse
    LowerUp:
    and P3,#(˜UP_OUT) ; Take pulse output low
    jr UpPotDone ;
    HigherUp:
    or P3,#UP_OUT ; Output a high pulse
    inc UP_TEMP ; Increase measured duty cycle
    UpPotDone:
    inc POT_COUNT ; Incremet the total period for
    jr nz, GoTimer ; duty cycle measurement
    rcf ; Divide the pot values by two to obtain
    rrc UP_TEMP ; a 64-level force range
    rcf ;
    rrc DN_TEMP ;
    cr ; Subtract from 63 to reverse the direction
    ld UPFORCE, #63 ; Calculate pot. values every 255
    sub UPFORCE, UP_TEMP ; counts
    ld DNFORCE, #63 ;
    sub DNFORCE, DN_TEMP ;
    ei ;
    clr UP_TEMP ; counts
    clr DN_TEMP ;
    GoTimer:
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP ; set the register pointer
    dec AOBSTEST ; decrease the aobs test timer
    jr nz,NOFAIL ; if the timer not at 0 then it didnot fail
    ld AOBSTEST,#11 ; if it failed reset the timer
    tm AOBSF,#00100000b ; If the aobs was blocked before,
    jr nz, BlockedBeam ; don't turn on the light
    or AOBSF,#100000001b ; Set the break edge flag
    BlockedBeam:
    or AOBSF,#00000000b ; Set the single break flag
    NOFAIL:
    inc RadioTimeOut
    cp OBS_COUNT, #00 ; Test for protector timed out
    jr z, TEST125 ; If it has failed, then don't decrement
    dec OBS_COUNT ; Decrement the timer
    PPointDeb:
    di ; Disable ints while debouncer being modified (16us)
    tm PPointPort, #PassPoint ; Test for pass point being seen
    jr nz, IncPPDeb ; If high, increment the debouncer
    DecPPDeb:
    and PPOINT_DEB,#00000011b ; Debounce 3-0
    jr z, PPDebDone ; If already zero, don't decrement
    dec PPOINT_DEB ; Decrement the debouncer
    jr PPDebDone ;
    IncPPDeb:
    inc PPOINT_DEB ; Increment 0-3 debouncer
    and PPOINT_DEB, #00000011B ;
    jr nz, PPDebDone ; If rolled over,
    ld PPOINT_DEB, #00000011B ; keep it at the max.
    PPDebDone:
    ei ; Re-enable interrupts
    TEST125:
    inc t125ms ; increment the 125 mS timer
    cp t125ms,#125 ; test for the time out
    jr z,ONE25MS ; if true the jump
    cp t125ms,#63 ; test for the other timeout
    jr nz,N125
    call FAULTS
    N125:
    pop RP
    iret
    ONE25MS:
    cp RsMode, #00 ; Test for not in RS232 mode
    jr z, CheckSpeed ; If not, don't update RS timer
    dec RsMode ; Count down RS232 time
    jr nz, CheckSpeed ; If not done yet, don't clear wall
    ld STATUS, #CHARGE ; Revert to charging wall control
    CheckSpeed:
    cp RampFlag, #STILL ; Test for still motor
    jr z, StopMotor ; If so, turn off the FET's
    tm BLINK_HI, #10000000b ; If we are flashing the warning light,
    jr z, StopMotor ; then don't ramp up the motor
    cp L_A_C, #076H ; Special case -- use the ramp-down
    jr z, NormalRampFlag ; when we're going to the learned up limit
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; If we're learning limits,
    jr uge, RunReduced ; then run at a slow speed
    NormalRampFlag:
    cp RampFlag, #RAMPDOWN ; Test for slowing down
    jr z, SlowDown ; If so, slow to minimum speed
    SpeedUp:
    cp PowerLevel, MaxSpeed ; Test for at max. speed
    jr uge, SetAtFull ; If so, leave the duty cycle alone
    RampSpeedUp:
    inc PowerLevel ; Increase the duty cycle of the phase
    jr SpeedDone ;
    Slowdown:
    cp PowerLevel, MinSpeed ; Test for at min. speed
    jr ult, RampSpeedup ; If we're below the minimum, ramp up to it
    jr z, SpeedDone ; If we're at the minimum, stay there
    dec PowerLevel ; Increase the duty cycle of the phase
    jr SpeedDone
    RunReduced:
    ld RampFlag, #FULLSPEED ; Flag that we're not ramping up
    cp MinSpeed, #8 ; Test for high minimum speed
    jr ugt, PowerAtMin ;
    ld PowerLevel, #8 ; Set the speed at 40%
    jr SpeedDone
    PowerAtMin:
    ld PowerLevel, MinSpeed ; Set power at higher minimum
    jr SpeedDone ;
    StopMotor:
    clr PowerLevel ; Make sure that the motor is stopped (FMEA
    protection)
    jr SpeedDone ;
    SetAtFull:
    ld RampFlag, #FULLSPEED ; Set flag for done with ramp-up
    SpeedDone:
    cp LinePer, #36 ; Test for 50Hz or 60Hz
    jr uge, FiftySpeed ; Load the proper table
    SixtySpeed:
    di ; Disable interrupts to avoid pointer collizion
    srp #RadioGroup ; Use the radio pointers to do a ROM fetch
    lc pointerh, ##HIGH SPEED_TABLE_60) ; Point to the force look-up table
    ld pointerl, #LOW(SPEED_TABLE_60) ;
    add pointerl, PowerLevel ; Offset for current phase step
    adc pointerh, #00H ;
    ldc addvalueh, @pointer ; Fetch the ROM data for phase control
    ld PhaseTime, addvalueh ; Transfer to the proper register
    ei ; Re-enable interrupts
    jr WorkCheck ; Check the worklight toggle
    FiftySpeed:
    ai ; Disable interrupts to avoid pointer collision
    src #RadioGroup ; Use the radio pointers to do a ROM fetch
    ld pointerh, #HIGH (SPEED_TABLE_50) ; Point to the force look-up table
    ld pointerl, #LOW(SPEED_TABLE_50) ;
    add pointerl, PowerLevel ; Offset for current phase step
    adc pointerh, #00H ;
    ldc addvalueh, @pointer ; Fetch the ROM data for phase control
    ld PhaseTime, addvalueh ; Transfer to the proper register
    ei ; Re-enable interrupts
    WorkCheck:
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP ; Re-set the RP
    ;4-22-97
    CP EnableWorkLight,#01100000B
    JR EQ,DontInc ;Has the button already been held for 10s?
    INC EnableWorkLight ;Work light function is added to every
    ;125ms if button is light button is held
    ;for 10s will iniate change, if not held
    ;down will be cleared in switch routine
    DontINC: cp AUXLEARNSW,#0FFh ; test for the rollover postion
    jr z,SKIPAUXLEARNSW ; if so then skip
    inc AUXLEARNSW ; increase
    SKIPAUXLEARNSW:
    cp ZZWIN,#0FFH ; test for the roll position
    jr z,TESTFA ; if so skip
    inc ZZWIN ; if not increase the counter
    TESTFA:
    call ; call the fault blinker
    clr T125MS ; reset the timer
    inc DOG2 ; incrwease the second watch dog
    di
    inc SDISABLE ; count off the systen disable timer
    jr nz,D012 ; if not rolled over then do the 1.2 sec
    dec SDISABLE ; else reset to FF
    D012:
    cp ONEP2,#00 ; test for 0
    jr z,INCLEARN ; if counted down then increment learn
    dec ONEP2 ; else down count
    INCLEARN:
    inc learnt ; increase the learn timer
    cp learnt,#0H ; test for overflow
    jr nn,LEARNTOK ; if not 0 skip back turning
    dec learnt ;
    LEARNTOK:
    ei
    inc eraset ; increase the erase timer
    cp eraset,#0H ; test for overflow
    jr nz,ERASETOK ; if not 0 skip back turning
    dec eraset :
    ERASETOK:
    pop RP
    iret
    fault blinker
    FAULTB:
    inc FAULTTIME ; increase the fault timer
    op L_A_C, #070H ; Test for in learn limits mode
    jr ult, DoFaults ; If not, handle faults normally
    cp L_A_C, #071H ; Test for failed learn
    jr z, FastFlash ; If so, blink the LED fast
    RegFlash:
    tm FAULTIME, #00000100b ; Toggle the LED every 250ms
    jr z, FlashOn ;
    FlashOff:
    or ledport, #ledh ; Turn of f the LED for blink
    jr NOFAULT ; Don't test for faults
    FlashOn:
    and ledport,#ledl ; Turn on the LED for blink
    jr NOFAULT ;
    FastFlash:
    tm FAULTIME; #00000010b ; Toggle the LED every 125ms
    jr z, FlasnOn ;
    jr FlashOff
    DoFaults:
    cp FAULTTIME, #80h ; test for the end
    jr nz,FIRSTFAULT ; if not timed out
    clr FAULTTIME ; reset the clock
    clr FAULT ; clear the last
    cp FAULTCODE,#05h ; test for call dealer code
    jr UGE,GOTFAULT ; set the fault
    cp CMD_DEB,#0FFH ; test the debouncer
    jr nz,TESTAOBSM ; if not set test aobs
    cp FAULTCODE,#03h ; test for command shorted
    jr z,GOTFAULT ; set the error
    ld FAUTCODE,#03h ; set the code
    jr FIRSTFAULT ;
    TESTAOBSM:
    tm AOBSF,#00000001b ; test for the skiped aobs pulse
    jr z,NOAOBSFAULT if no skips then no faults
    tm AOBSF,#00000000b ; test for any pulses
    jr z, NOPULSE ; if no pulses find if hi or low
    ; else we are intermittent
    ld FAULTCODE,#04h ; set the fault
    jr GOTFAULT ; if same got fault
    cp FAULTCODE,#04h ; test the last fault
    jr z,GOTFAULT ; if same got fault
    ld FAULTCODE,#04h ; set the fault
    jr FIRSTFC ;
    NOPULSE: tm P3,#00000001b ; test the input pin
    jr z,AOBSSH ; jump if aobs is stuck hi
    cp FAULTCODE,#01h ; test for stuck low in the past
    jr z,GOTFAULT ; set the fault
    ld FAULTCODE,#01h ; set the fault code
    jr FIRSTFC ;
    AOBSSH: cp FAULTCODE,#02h ; test for stuck high in past
    jr z,GOTFAULT ; set the fault
    ld FAULTCODE.#02h ; set the code
    jr FIRSTFC ;
    GOTFAULT: ld FAULT,FAULTCODE ; set the cone
    swap FAULT ;
    jr FIRSTFC ;
    NOAOBSFAULT:
    clr FAULTCODE ; clear the fault code
    FIRSTFC: and AOBSF, #11111100b ; clear flags
    FIRSTFAULT:
    tm FAULTTIME, #00000111b ; If one second has passed,
    jr nz, RegularFault ; increment the 60min
    incw HOUR_TIMER ; Increment the 1 hour timer
    tcm HOUR_TIMER_LO, #00011111b ; If 32 seconds have passed
    jr nz, RegularFault ; poll the radio mode
    or AOBSF, #01000000b ; Set the ‘poll radio’ flag
    RegularFault:
    cp FAULT,#00 ; test for no fault
    jr z,NOFAULT
    ld FAULTFLAG,#0FFH ; set the fault flag
    cp CodeFlag,#REGLEARN ; test for not in learn mode
    jr z,TESTSDI ; if in learn then skip setting
    cp FAULT, FAULTTIME ;
    jr ULE,TESTSDI
    tm FAULTTIME,#00001000b ; test the 1 sec bit
    jr nz,BITONE
    and ledport,#ledl ; turn on the led
    ret
    BITONE:
    or ledport,#ledh ; turn off the led
    TESTSDI:
    ret
    NOFAULT: clr FAULTFLAG ; clear the flag
    ret
    Four ms timer tick routines and aux light function
    TIMER4MS:
    cp RPMONES,#00H ; test for the end of the one sec timer
    jr z,TESTPERIOD ; if one sec over then test the pulses
    ; over the period
    aec RPMONES ; else decrease the timer
    di
    clr RPM_COUNT ; start with a count of 0
    clr BRPM_COUNT ; start with a count of 0
    ei
    jr RPMTDONE
    TESTPERIOD:
    cp RPMCLEAR,#00H ; test the clear test timer for 0
    jr nz,RPMTDONE ; if not timed out then skip
    ld RPMCLEAR,#122 ; set the clear test time for next cycle .5
    cp RPM_COUNT,#50 ; test the count for too many pulses
    jr ugt,FAREV ; if too man pulses then reverse
    di
    clr RPM_COUNT ; clear the counter
    clr BRPM_COUNT ; clear the counter
    ei
    clr FAREVFLAG ; clear the flag temp test
    jr RPMTDONE ; continue
    FAREV:
    ld FAULTCODE,#06h ; set the fault flag
    ld FAREVFLAG,#088H ; set the forced up flag
    and p),#LOW ˜WORKLIGHT ; turn off light
    ld REASON,#80H ; rpm forcing up motion
    call SET_AREV_STATE ; set the autorev state
    RPMTDONE:
    dec RPMCLEAR ; decrement the timer
    cp LIGHT1S,#00 ; test for the end
    jr z,SKIPLIGHTE
    dec LIGHT1S ; down count the light time
    SKIPLIGHTE:
    inc R_DEAD_TIME
    cp RTO,#RDROPTIME ; test for the radio time out
    jr ult,DONOTCB ; if not timed out donot clear b
    cp CodeFlag, #LRNOCS ; If we are in a special learn mode,
    jr uge,DONOTCB ; then don't clear the code flag
    clr CodeFlag ; else clear the b code flag
    DONOTCB:
    inc +L,15 RTO ; increment the radio time out
    jr nz,RTOOK ; if the radio timeout Ok then skip
    dec RTO ; back turn
    RTOOK:
    cp RRTO,#0FFH ; test for roll
    jr z,SKIPRRTO ; if so then skip
    inc RRTO
    SKIPRRTO: ;
    cp SKIPRADIO, #00 ; Test for EEPROM communication
    jr nz, LEARNDBOK ; If so, skip reading program switch
    cp RsMode, #00 ; Test for in RS232 mode,
    jr nz, LEARNDBOK ; if so don't update the debouncer
    tm psport,#psmaks ; Test for program switch
    jr z,PRSWOLOSED ; if the switch is closed count up
    cp LEARNDB,#00 ; test for the non decrement point
    jr z, LEARNDBOK ; if at end skip dec
    dec LEARNDB ;
    jr LEARNBOK ;
    PHSWCLOSE:
    cp LEARNDB,#0FFH ; test for debouncer at max.
    jr z,LEARNDBOK ; if not at max increment
    inc LEARNDB ; increase the learn debounce timer
    LEARNDBOK
    AUX OBSTRUCTION OUTPUT AND LIGHT FUNCTION
    AUXLIGHT:
    test_light_on:
    cp LIGHT_FLAG,#LIGHT ;
    jr z,ado_light ;
    cp LIGHT1s,#00 ; test for no flash
    jr z,NO1S ; if not skip
    cp LIGHTS,#1 ; test for timeout
    jr nz,NO1S ; if not skip
    xor p0,#WORKLIGHT ; toggle light
    clr LIGHT1S ; onesnoted
    NO1S:
    cp FLASH_FLAG,#FLASH
    jr nz,dec_light ;
    clr VACFLASH ; Keep the vacation flash timer off
    dec FLASH_DELAY ; 250 ms period
    jr nz,dec_light ;
    cp STATUS, #RSSTATUS ; Test for in RS232 mode
    jr z,BlinkDone ; If so, don't blink the LED
    ; Toggle the wall control LED
    cp STATUS, #WALLOFF ; See if the LED is off or on
    jr z, TurnItOn ;
    TurnItOff:
    ld STATUS, #WALLOFF ; Turn the light off
    jr BlinkDone ;
    TurnItOn:
    ld STATUS, #CHARGE ; Turn the light on
    ld SWITCH_DELAY, #CMD_DEL_EX ; Reset the delay time for charge
    BlinkDone:
    ld FLASH_DELAY,#FLASH_TIME
    dec FLASH_COUNTER ;
    jr nz,dec light
    clr FLASH_FLAG ;
    dec_light:
    cp LIGHT_TIMER_HI,#0FFH ; test for the timer ignore
    jr z,exit_light ; if set then ignore
    tm T0EXT, #00010000b ; Decrement the light every 8 ms
    jr nz,exit_light ; (Use T0Ext to prescale)
    decw LIGHT_TIMER ;
    jr nz,exit_light ; if timer 0 turn off the light
    and p0,#˜LIGHT_ON ; turn off the light
    cp L_A_C, #00 ; Test for in a learn mode
    jr z, exit_light ; If not, leave the LED alone
    clr L_A_C ; Leave the learn mode
    or ledport,#ledh ; turn off the LED for program mode
    exit_light:
    ret ; return
    MOTOR STATE MACHINE
    STATEMACHINE:
    cp MOTDEL, #0FFH ; Test for max. motor delay
    jr z, MOTDELDONE ; if do, don't increment
    inc MOTDEL ; update the motor delay
    MOTDELDONE:
    xor p2,#FALSEIR ; toggle aux output
    cp DOG2,#8 ; test the 2nd watchdog for problem
    jp ugt,START ; if problem reset
    cp STATE,#6 ; test for legal number
    jp ugt,start ; if not the reset
    jp z,stop ; step motor 6
    cp STATE,#3 ; test for legal number
    jp z,start ; if not the reset
    cp STATE,#0 ; test for autorev
    jp z,auto_rev ; auto reversing 0
    cp STATE,#1 ; test for up
    jp z,up_direction ; door is going up 1
    cp STATE,#2 ; test for autorev
    jp z,up_position ; door is up 2
    cp STATE,#4 ; test for autorev
    jp z,dn_direction ; door is going down 4
    jp dn_position ; door is down 5
    AUTO_REV ROUTINE
    auto_rev:
    cp FAREVFLAG,#088H ; test for the forced up flag
    jr nz,LEAVEREV
    and p0,#LOW(˜WORKIGHT) ; turn off light
    clr FAREVFLAG ; one shot temp test
    LEAVEREV:
    cp MOTDEL, #10 ; Test for 40 ms passed
    jr ult, AREVON ; If not, keep the relay on
    AREVOFF:
    and p0,#LOW(˜MOTOR_UP & ˜MOTOR_DN) ; disable motor
    AREVON
    WDT ; kick the dog
    call HOLDREV ; hold off the force reverse
    ld LIGHT_FLAG,#LIGHT ; force the Light on no blink
    di
    dec AUTO_DELAY ; wait for .5 second
    dec BAUTO_DELAY ; wait for .5 second
    ei
    jr nz,arswitch ; test switches
    or p2,#FALSEIR ; set aux output for FEMA
    ;LOOK FOR LIMIT HERE (No)
    ld REASON,#40H ; set the reason for the change
    cp L_A_C, #075H ; Check for learning limits,
    jp nz, SET_UP_NOBLINK ; If not, proceed normally
    ld L_A_C, #076H ;
    jp SET_UP_NOBLINK ; set the state
    arswitch:
    ld REASON,#00H ; set the reason to command
    di
    cp SW_DATA,#CMD_SW ; test for a command
    clr SW_DATA
    ei
    jp z,SET_STOP_STATE ; if so then stop
    ld REASON,#10H ; set the reason as radio command
    cp RADIO_CMD,#0AAH ; test for a radio command
    jp z,SET_STOP_STATE ; if so the stop
    exit_auto_rev:
    ret ; return
    HOLDFREV:
    ld RPMONES,#244 ; set the hold off
    ld RPMCLEAR,#122 ; clear rpm reverse .5 sec
    di
    clr RPM_COUNT ; start with a count of 0
    clr BRPM_COUNT ; start with a count of 0
    ei
    ret
    DOOR GOING UP
    up_direction:
    WDT ; kick the dog
    cp OnePass, STATE ; Test for the memory read one-shot
    jr z, UpReady ; If so, continue
    ret ; Else wait
    UpReady:
    call HOLDFREV ; hold off the force reverse
    ld LIGHT_FLAG,#LIGHT ; force the light on no blink
    and p0,#LOW ˜MOTOR_DN ; disable down relay
    or p0,#LIGHT ON ; turn on the light
    cp MOTDEL,#10 ; test for 40 milliseconds
    jr ule,UPOFF ; if not timed
    CheckUpBlink:
    and P2M_SHADOW, #˜BLINK_PIN ; Turn on the blink output
    ld P2M, P2M_SHADOW ;
    cr P2, #BLINK_PIN ; Turn on the blinker
    decw BLINK ; Decrement blink time
    tm BLINK_HI, #10000000b ; Test for pre-travel blinking done
    jp z, NotUpSlow ; If not, delay normal motor travel
    UPON:
    or p0,#(MOTOR_UP | LIGHT_ON) ; turn on the motor and light
    UPOFF:
    cp FORCE_IGNORE,#1 ; test fro the end of the force ignore
    jr nz,SKIPUPRPM ; if not donot test rpmcount
    cp RPM_ACCOUNT,#12h ; test for less the 2 pulses
    jr ugt,SKIPUPRPM ;
    ld FAULTCODE,#05h
    SKIPUPRPM:
    cp FORCE_IGNORE, #00 ; test timer for done
    jr nz,test_UP_SW_pre ; if timer not up do not test force
    TEST_UP_FORCE:
    di
    dec RPM_TIME_OUT ; decrease the timeout
    dec BRPM_TIME_OUT ; decrease the timeout
    ei
    jr z,failed_up_rpm
    cp RampFlag, #RAMPUP ; Check for ramping up the force
    jr z, test_up_sw ; If not, always do full force check
    TestUpForcePot:
    di ; turn off the interrupt
    cp RPM_PERIOD_HI, UP_FORCE_HI ; Test the RPM against the force setting
    jr ugt, failed_up rpm ;
    jr ult, test_up_sw ;
    cp RPM_PERIOD_LO, UP_FORCE_LO ;
    jr ult, test_up_sw ;
    failed_up_rpm:
    ld REASON, #20H ; set the reason as force
    cp L_A_C, #076H ; If we're learning limits,
    jp nz, SET_STOP_STATE ; then set the flag to store
    ld L_A_C, #077H ;
    jp SET_STOP_STATE
    test_up_sw_pre:
    di
    dec FORCE_IGNORE
    dec BFORCE_IGNORE
    test_up_sw:
    di
    ld LIM_TEST_HI, POSITION_HI ; Calculate the distance from the up limit
    ld LIM_TEST_LO, POSITION_LO ;
    sub LIM_TEST_LO, UP_LIMIT_LO ;
    sbc LIM_TEST_HI, UP_LIMIT_HI ;
    cp POSITION_HI, #0B0H ; Test for lost door
    jr ugt, UpPosKnown ; If not lost, limit test is done
    cp POSITION_HI, #050H
    jr ult, UpPosKnown ;
    ei ;
    UPosUnknown:
    sub LIM_TEST_LO, #062H ; Calculate the total travel distance allowed
    sbc LIM_TEST_HI, #07FH ; from the floor when lost
    add LIM_TEST_LO, DN_LIMIT_LO ;
    adc LIM_TEST_HI, DN_LIMIT_HI ;
    UpPosKnown: ;
    ei ;
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; If we're positioning the door, forget the limit
    jr z, test_up_time ; and the wall control and radio
    cp LIM_TEST_HI, #11 ; Test for exactly at the limit
    jr nz, TestForPastUp ; If not, see if we've passed the limit
    cp LIM_TEST_LO, #00 ;
    jr z, AtUpLimit ;
    TestForPastUp:
    tm LIM_TEST HI, #10000000b ; Test for a negative result (past the limit, but
    close)
    jr z, get_sw ; If so, set the limit
    AtUpLimit:
    ld REASON,#50H ; set the reason as limit
    cp L_A_C, #072H ; If we're re-learning limits,
    jr z, ReLearnLim ; jump
    cp L_A_C, #076H ; If we're learning limits,
    jp nz, SET_UP_POS_STATE ; then set the flag to store
    ld L_A_C, #077H ;
    jp SET_UP_POS_STATE ;
    ReLearnLim:
    ld L_A_C, #073H ;
    jp SET_UP_POS_STATE ;
    get_sw:
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; Test for positioning the up limit
    jr z,NotUpSlow ; If so, don't slow down
    TestUpSlow:
    cp LIM_TEST_HI, #HIGH(UPSLOWSTART) ; Test for start of slowdown
    jr nz, NotUpSlow ; (Cheating -- the high byte of the number is zero)
    cp LIM_TEST_LO, #LOW(UPSLOWSTART) ;
    jr ugt, NotUpSlow ;
    UpSlow:
    ld RampFlag, #RAMPDOWN ; Set the slowdown flag
    NotUpSlow:
    ld REASON, #10H ; set the radio command reason
    cp RADIO_CMD,#0AAH ; test for a radio command
    jp z,SET_STOP_STATE ; if so stop
    ld REASON,#00H ; set the reason as a command
    di
    cp SW_DATA, #CMD_SW ; test for a command condition
    clr SW_DATA
    ei
    jr ne,test_up_time ;
    jp SET_STOP_STATE ;
    test_up_time:
    ld REASON,#70H ; set the reason as a time out
    decw MOTOR_TIMER ; decrement motor timer
    jp z,SET_STOP_STATE ;
    exit_up_dir:
    ret ; return to caller
    DOOR UP
    up_position:
    WDT ; kick the dog
    cp FAREVFLAG,#088E ; test for the forced up flag
    jr nz, LEAVELIGHT
    and p0,#LOW(˜WORKLIGHT) ; turn off light
    jr UPNOFLASH ; skip clearing the flash flag
    LEAVELIGHT:
    ld LIGHT_FLAG,#00H ; allow blink
    UPNOFLASH:
    cp MOTDEL, #10 ; Test for 40 ms passed
    jr ult, UPLIMON ; If not, keep the relay on
    UPLIMOFF:
    and p0,#LOW(˜MOTOR UP & ˜MOTOR_DN) ; disable motor
    UPLIMON:
    cp L_A_C, #073H ; If we've begun the learn limits cycle,
    jr z,LAOUPPOS ; then delay before traveling
    cp SW_DATA, #LIGHT_SW ; light sw debounced
    jr z,work_up ;
    ld REASON, #10H ; set the reason as a radio command
    cp RADIO_CMD,#0AAH ; test for a radio cmd
    jr z,SETDNDIRSTATE ; if so start down
    ld REASON, #00H ; set the reason as a command
    di
    cp SW_DATA,#CMD_SW ; command sw debounced?
    clr SW_DATA
    ei
    jr z,SETDNDIRSTATE ; if command
    ret
    SETDNDIRSTATE:
    ld ONEP2,#10 ; set the 1.2 sec timer
    jp SET_DN_DIR_STATE
    LACUPPOS:
    cp MOTOR_TIMER_HI, #HIGH(LACTIME) ; Make sure we're set to the proper time
    jr ule, UpTimeOx
    ld MOTOR_TIMER_HI, #HIHG(LACTIME)
    ld MOTOR_TIMER_LO, #LOW(LACTIME)
    UpTimeOk:
    decw MOTOR_TIMER ; Count down more time
    jr nz, up_pos_ret ; If nor timed out, leave
    StartLACDown:
    ld L_A_C, #074H ; Set state as traveling down in LAC
    clr UP_LIMIT_HI ; Clear the up limit
    clr UP_LIMIT_LO ; and the position for
    clr POSITION_HI ; determining the new up
    clr POSITION_LO ; limit of travel
    ld PassCounter, #030H ; Set pass points at max.
    jp SET_DN_DIR_STATE ; Start door traveling down
    work_up:
    xor p0,#WORKLIGHT ; toggle work light
    ld LIGHT_TIMER_HI,#0FFH ; set the timer ignore
    and SW_DATA, #LOW(˜LIGHT_SW) ; Clear the worklight bit
    up_pos_ret:
    ret ; return
    DOOR GOING DOWN
    dn_direction:
    WDT ; kick the dog
    cp OnePass, STATE ; Test for the memory read one-shot
    jr z, DownReady ; If so, continue
    ret ; else wait
    DownReady:
    call HOLDFREV ; hold off the force reverse
    clr FLASH_FLAG ; turn off the flash
    ld LIGHT_FLAG,#LIGHT ; force the light on no blink
    and p0,#LOW(˜MOTOR_UP ; turn off motor up
    or p0,#LIGHT_ON ; turn on the light
    cp MOTDEL,#10 ; test for 40 milliseconds
    jr ule,DNOFF ; if not timed
    CheckDnBlink:
    and P2M_SHADOW, #˜BLINK_PIN ; Turn on the blink output
    ld P2M, P2M_SHADOW ;
    or P2, #BLINK_PIN ; Turn on the blinker
    decw BLINK ; Decrement blink time
    tm BLINK_HI, #10000000b ; Test for pre-travel blink done
    jr z, NotOnSlow ; If not, don't start the motor
    DNON:
    or p0,#(MOTOR_DN LIGHT_ON ; turn on the motor and Light
    DNOFF:
    cp FORCE_IGNORE,#01 ; test fro the end of the force ignore
    jr nz,SKIPDNRPM ; if not donot test rpmcount
    cp RPM_ACOUNT,·02H ; test for less the 2 pulses
    jr ugt,SKIPDNRPM ;
    ld FAULTCODE,#05h
    SKIPDNRPM:
    cp FORCE_IGNORE,#00 ; test timer for done
    jr nz,test_on_sw_pre ; if timer not up do not test force
    TEST_DOWN_FORCE:
    di
    dec RPM_TIME_OUT ; decrease the timeout
    dec BRPM_TIME_OUT ; decrease the timeout
    ei
    jr z,failed_dn_rpm
    cp RampFlag, #RAMPUP ; Check for ramping up the force
    jr z, test_dn_sw ; If not, always do full force check
    TestDownForcePot:
    di ; turn off the interrupt
    cp RPM_PERIOD_HI, DN_FORCE_HI ; rest the RPM against the force setting
    jr ugt, failed_dn_rpm ; if too slow then force reverse
    jr ult, test_dn_sw ; if faster then we're fine
    cp RPM_PERIOD_LO, DN_FORCE_LO ;
    jr ult, test_dn_sw ;
    failed_dn_rpm:
    +T+L,12 cp L_A_C, #074H ; Test for learning limits
    jp z, DnLearnRev ; If not, set the state normally
    tm POSITION_HI, #11000000b ; Test for below last pass point
    jr nz, DnRPMRev ; if not, we're nowhere near the limit
    tm LIM_TEST_HI, #10000000b ; Test for beyond the down limit
    jr nz, DoDownLimit ; If so, we've driven into the down limit
    DnRPMRev:
    ld REASON, #0B0H ; set the reason as force
    cp POSITION_HI, #0B0H ; Test for lost,
    jp ugt, SET_AREV_STATE ; if not, autoreverse normally
    cp POSITION_HI, #050H ;
    jp ult, SET_AREV_STATE ;
    di ; Disable interrupts
    ld POSITION_HI, #07FH ; Reset lost position for max. travel up
    ld POSITION_LO, #080H ;
    ei ; Re-enable interrupts
    jp SET_AREV_STATE ;
    DnLearnRev:
    ld L_A_C, #075H ; Set proper LAC
    jp SET_AREV_STATE ;
    test_dn_sw_pre:
    di
    dec FORCE_IGNORE
    dec BFORCE_IGNORE
    test_dn_sw:
    di ;
    cp POSITION_HI, #050H ; Test for lost in mid travel
    jr ult, TestDnLimGood ;
    cp POSITION_HI, #0B0H ; If so, don't test for limit until
    jr ult, NotDnSlow ; a proper pass point is seen
    TestDnLimGood:
    ld LIM_TEST_HI, DN_LIMIT_HI ; Measure the distance to the down limit
    ld LIM_TEST_LO, DN_LIMIT_LO ;
    sub LIM_TEST_LO, POSITION_LO ;
    sbc LIM_TEST_HI, POSITION_HI ;
    ei ;
    cp L_A_C, #070H If we're in the learn cycle, forget the limit
    jr uge, test_dn_time ; and ignore the radio and wall control
    tm LIM_TEST_HI, #10000000b ; Test for a ngegative result (past the down limit)
    jr z, call_sw_dn ; If so, set the limit
    cp LIM_TEST_LO, #255 36 ; Test for 36 pulses (3″) beyond the limit
    jr ugt, NotDnSlow ; if not, then keep driving onto the floor
    DoDownLimit:
    ld REASON,#50H ; set toe reason as a limit
    cp CMD_DEB,#0FFH ; test for the switch still held
    jr nz,TESTRADIO ;
    ld REASON,#90H ; closed with the control held
    jr TESTFORCEIG
    TESTRADIO:
    cp LAST_CMD,#00 ; test for the last command being radio
    jr nz,TESTFORCEIG ; if not test force
    cp CodeFlag,#BRECEIVED ; test for the b code flag
    jr nz,TESTFORCEIG ;
    ld REASON,#0A0H ; set the reason as b code to limit
    TESTFORCEIG:
    cp FORCE_IGNORE,#00H ; test the force ignore for done
    jr z,NOAREVDN ; a rev if limit before force enabled
    ld REASON,#60h ; early limit
    jp SET_AREV_STATE ; set autoreverse
    NOAREVDN:
    and p0,#LOW(˜MOTOR_DN ;
    jp SET_DN_POS_STATE ; set the state
    call_sw_dn:
    cp LIM_TEST_HI, #HIGH(DNSLOWSTART, ; Test for start of slowdown
    jr nz, NotDnSlow ; (Cheating -- the high byte is zero)
    cp LIM_TEST_LO, #LOW(DNSLOWSTART) ;
    jr ugt, NotDnSlow ;
    DnSlow:
    ld RampFlag, #RAMPDOWN ; Set the slowdown flag
    NotDnSlow:
    ld REASON, #10H ; set the reason as radio command
    cp RADIO_CMD,#0AAH ; test for a radio command
    jp z,SET_AREV_STATE ; if so arev
    ld REASON,#00H ; set the reason as command
    di
    cp SW_DATA,#CMD_SW ; test for command
    clr SW_DATA
    ei
    jp z,SET_AREV_STATE ;
    test_dn_time:
    ld REASON,#70H ; set the reason as timeout
    decw MOTOR_TIMER ; decrement motor timer
    jp z,SET_AREV_STATE ;
    test_obs_count:
    cp OBS_COUNT,#00 ; Test the obs count
    jr nz, exit_dn_dir ; if not done, don't reverse
    cp FORCE_IGNORE, #(ONE_SEC / 2) ; Test for 0.5 second passed
    jr ugt, exit_an_dir ; if within first 0.5 sec, ignore it
    cp LAST_CMD,#00 ; test for the last command from radio
    jr z,OBSTESTB ; if last command was a radio test b
    cp CMD_DEB,#0FFH ; test for the command switch holding
    jr nz,OBSAREV ; if the command switch is not holding
    ; do the autorev
    jr exit_dn_dir ; otherwise skip
    OBSAREV:
    ld FLASH_FLAG, #0FFH ; set flag
    ld FLASH_COUNTER, #20 ; set for 10 flashes
    ld FLASH_DELAY,#FLASH_TIME ; set for .5 Hz period
    ld REASON,#30E ; set the reason as autoreverse
    jp SET_AREV_STATE ;
    OBSTESTB:
    cp CodeFlag,#BRECEIVED ; test for the b code flag
    jr nz,OBSAREV ; if not b code then arev
    exit_dn_dir:
    ret ; return
    DOOR DOWN
    dn_position:
    WDT ; kick the doa
    cp FAREVFLAG,#088H ; test for the forced up flag
    jr nz,DNLEAVEL ;
    and p0,#LOW(˜WORKLIGHT) ; turn off light
    jr DNNOFLASH ; skip clearing the flash flag
    DNLEAVEL:
    ld LIGHT_FLAG,#00H ; allow blink
    DNNOFLASH:
    cp MOTDEL, #10 ; Test for 40 ms passed
    jr ult, DNLIMON ; If not, keep the relay on
    DNLIMOFF:
    and p0,#LOW(˜MOTOR_UP & ˜MOTOR_DN) ; disable motor
    DNLIMON:
    cp SW_DATA,#LIGHT_SW ; debounced? light
    jr z,work_an ;
    ld REASON,#10H ; set the reason as a radio command
    cp RADIO_CMD,#0AAH ; test for a radio command
    jr z,SETUPDIRSTATE ; if so go up
    ld REASON,#00H ; set the reason as a command
    di
    cp SW_DATA,#CMD_SW ; command sw pressed?
    clr SW_DATA
    ei
    jr z,SETUPDIRSTATE ; if so go up
    ret
    SETUPDIRSTATE:
    ld ONEP2,#10 ; set the 1.2 sec timer
    jp SET_UP_DIR_STATE
    work_dn:
    xor p0,#WORKLIGMT ; toggle work light
    ld LIGHT_TIMER_HI,#0FFH ; set the timer ignore
    and SW_DATA, #LOW(˜LIGHT_SW) ; Clear the worklight bit
    dn_pos_ret:
    ret ; return
    STOP
    stop:
    WDT ; kick the dog
    cp FAREVFLAG,#066H ; test for the forced up flag
    jr nz,LEAVESTOP
    and p0,#LOW˜WORKLIGHT ; turn off light
    jr STOPNOFLASH ;
    LEAVESTOP:
    ld LIGHT_FLAG,#00H ; allow blink
    STOPNOFLASH:
    cp MOTDEL, #10 ; Test for 40 ms passed
    jr ult, STOPMIDON ; If not, keep the relay on
    STOPMIDOFF:
    and p0,#LOW(˜MOTOR_UP & ˜MOTOR_DN ; disable motor
    STOPMIDON:
    cp SW_DATA,#LIGHT_SW ; debounced? light
    jr z,work_stop ;
    ld REASON,#10H ; set the reason as radio command
    cp RADIO_CMD,#0AAH ; test for a radio command
    jp z,SET_DN_DIR_STATE ; if so go down
    ld REASON,#00H ; set the reason as a command
    di
    cp SW_DATA,#CMD_SW ; command sw pressed?
    clr SW_DATA
    ei
    jp z,SET_DN_DIR_STATE ; if so go down
    ret
    work_stop:
    xor p0,#WORKLIGHT ; toggle work light
    ld LIGHT_TIMER_HI,#0FFH ; set the timer ignore
    and SW_DATA, #LOW,˜LIDHT_SW ; Clear the worklight bit
    stop_ret:
    ret ; return
    SET THE AUTOREV STATE
    SET_ARVE_STATE:
    di ;
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; Test for learning limits,
    jt uge, LearningRev ; If not, do a normal autoreverse
    cp POSITION_HI, #020H ; Look for lost postion
    jr ult, DoTheArev ; If not, Proceed as normal
    cp POSITION_HI, #0D0H ; Look for lost position
    jr ugt, DoTheArev ; If not, proceed as normal
    ;Otherwise, we're list -- ignore commands
    cp REASON, #020H Don't respond to command or radio
    jf uge, DoTheArev ;
    clr RADIO_CMD ; Throw out the radio command
    ei ; Otherwise, just ignore it
    ret ;
    DoTheArev:
    ld STATE,#AUTO_REV ; if we got here, then reverse motor
    ld RampFlag, #STILL ; Set the FET's to off
    clr PowerLevel ;
    jr SET_ANY ; Done
    LearningRev:
    ld STATE,#AUTO_REV ; if we got here, then reverse motor
    ld RampFlag, #STILL ; Set the FET's to off
    clr PowerLevel ;
    cp L_A_C, #075H ; Check for proper reversal
    jr nz, ErrorLearnArev ; If not, stop the learn cycle
    cp PassCounter, #030H ; If we haven't seen a pass point,
    jr z, ErrorLearnArev ; then flag an error
    GoodLearnArev:
    cp POSITION_HI, #00 ; Test for down limit at least
    jr nz, DnLimGood ; 20 pulses away from pass point
    cp POSITION_LO, #20 ;
    jr ult, MovePassPoint ; If not, use the upper pass point
    DnLimGood:
    and PassCounter, #10100000b ; Set at lowest pass point
    GotDnLim:
    di
    ld DN_LIMIT_HI, POSITION_HI ; Set the new down limit
    ld DN_LIMIT_LO, POSITION_LO ;
    add DN_LIMIT_LO, #01 ; Add in a pulse to guarantee reversal off the block
    adc DN_LIMIT_HI, #00 ;
    jr SET_ANY ;
    ErrorLearnArev:
    ld L_A_C, #071H ; Set the error in learning state
    jr SET_ANY
    MovePassPoint:
    cp PassCounter, #02FH ; If we have only one pass point,
    jr z, ErrorLearnArev ; don't allow it to be this close to the floor
    di
    add POSITION_LO, #LOW(PPOINTPULSES) ; Use the next pass point up
    adc POSITION_HI, #HIGH(PPOINTPULSES) ;
    add UP_LIMIT_LO, #LOW PPOINPULSES ;
    adc UP_LIMIT_HI, #HIGH PPOINTPULSES ;
    ei ;
    or PassCounter, #01111111b ; Set pass counter at −1
    jr GotDmLim ;
    SET THE STOPPED STATE
    SET_STOP_STATE:
    di
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; If we're in the learn mode,
    jr uge, DoTheStop ; Then don't ignore anything
    cp POSITION_HI, #020H ; Look for lost postion
    jr ult, DoTheStop ; If not, proceed as normal
    cp POSITION_HI, #0D0H ; Look for lost postion
    jr ugt, DoTheStop ; If not, proceed as normal
    ;Otherwtse, we're lost -- ignore commands
    cp REASON, #020H ; Don't respond to command or radio
    jr uge, DoTheStop ;
    clr RADIO_CMD ; Throw out the radio command
    ei ; Otherwise, just ignore it
    ret
    DoTheStop:
    ld STATE,#STOP ;
    ld RampFlag, #STILL ; Stop the motor at the FET's
    clr PowerLevel ;
    jr SET_ANY
    SET THE DOWN DIRECTION STATE
    SET_DN_DIR_STATE:
    ld BLINK_HI, #0FFH ;Initially disable pre-travel blink
    call LookForFlasher ;Test to see if flasher present
    tm P2, #BLINK PIN ;If the flasher is not present,
    jr nz, SET_DN_NOBLINK ;don't flash it
    ld BLINK_LO, #0FFH ;Turn on the blink timer
    ld BLINK_HI, #01H ;
    SET_DN_NOBLINK:
    di
    ld RampFlag, #RAMPUP ; Set the flag to accelerate motor
    ld PowerLevel, #4 ; Set speed at minimum
    ld STATE,#DN_DIRECTION ; energize door
    clr FAREVFLAG ; one shot the forced reverse
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; If we're learning the limits,
    jr uge, SET_ANY ; Then don't bother with testing anything
    cp POSITION_HI, #020H ; Look for lost postion
    jp ult, SET_ANY ; If not, proceed as normal
    cp POSITION_HI, #0D0H ; Lock for lost postion
    jp ugt, SET_ANY ; If not, proceed as normal
    LostDn:
    cp FirstRun, #0C ; If this isn't our first operation when lost,
    jr nz, SET_ANY ; then ALWAYS head down
    tm PassCounter, #01111111b ; If we are below the lowest
    jr z, SET_UP_DIR_STATE ; pass point, head up to see it
    tcm PassCounter, #01111111b ; If our pass point number is set at −1,
    jr z, SET_UP_DIR_STATE ; then go up to find the position
    jr SET_ANY ; Otherwise, proceed normally
    SET THE DOWN POSITION STATE
    SET_DN_POS_STATE:
    di
    ld STATE,#DN_POSITION ; load new state
    ld RampFlag, #STILL ; Stop the motor at the FET's
    clr PowerLevel ;
    jr SET_ANY
    SET THE UP DIRECTION STATE
    SET_UP_DIR_STATE:
    ld BLINK_HI, #0FFH ;Initially turn off blink
    call LookForFlasher ;Test to see if flasher present
    tm P2, #BLINK_PIN ;If the flasher is not present,
    jr nz, SET_UP_NOBLINK ;don't flash it
    ld BLINK_LO, #0FFH ;Turn on the blink timer
    ld BLINK_HI, #01H ;
    SET_UP_NOBLINK
    di
    ld RampFlag,#RAMPUP ; Set the flag to accelerate to max.
    ld PowerLevel, #4 ; Start speed at minimum
    ld STATE, #UP_DIRECTION ;
    jr SET_ANY ;
    SET THE UP POSITION STATE
    SET_UP_POS_STATE:
    di
    ld STATE,#UP_POSITION ;
    ld RampFlag, #STILL ; Stop the motor at the FET's
    clr PowerLevel ;
    SET ANY STATE
    SET_ANY:
    and P2M_SHADOW, #˜BLINK_PIN ; Turn on the blink output
    ld P2M, P2M_SHADOW :
    and P2, #˜BLINK_PIN ; Turn off the light
    cp PPOINT_DEB, #2 ; Test for pass point being seen
    jr ult, NoPrePPoint ; If signal is low, none seen
    PrePPoint:
    or PassCounter, #0000000b ; Flag pass point signal high
    jr PrePPointDone ;
    NoPrePPoint:
    and PassCounter, #01111111b ; Flag pass point signal low
    PrePPointDone:
    ld FirstRun, #0FFH ; One-shot the first run flag DONE IN MAIN
    ld BSTATE,STATE ; set the backup state
    di
    clr RPM_COUNT ; clear the rpm counter
    clr BRPM_COUNT ;
    ld AUTO_DELAY,#AUTO_REV_TIME ; set the .5 second auto rev timer
    ld BAUTO_DELAY, #AUTO_REV_TIME ;
    ld FORCE_IGNORE,#ONE_SEC ; set the force ignore timer to one sec
    ld BFORCE_IGNORE,#ONE_SEC ; set the force ignore timer to one sec
    ld RPM_PERIOD_HI, #0FFH ; Set the RPM period to max. to start
    ei ; Flush out any pending interrupts
    di ;
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; If we are in learn mode,
    jr uge, LearnModeMotor ; don't test the travel distance
    push LIM_TEST_HI ; Save the limit tests
    push LIM_TEST_LO ;
    ld LIM_TEST_HI, DN_LIMIT_HI +T+L,28 Test the door travel distance to
    ld LIM_TEST_LO, DN_LIMIT_LO ; see if we are shorter than 2.3M
    sub LIM_TEST_L0, UP_LIMIT_LO ;
    sbc LIM_TEST_HI, UP_LIMIT_HI ;
    cp LIM_TEST_HI, #HIGH(SHORTDOOR) ; If we are shorter than 2.3M,
    jr ugt, DoorIsNorm ; then set the max. travel speed to 2/3
    jr ult, DoorIsShort ; Else, normal speed
    cp LIM_TEST_LO, #LOW(SHORTDOOR) ;
    jr ugt, DoorIsNorm ;
    DoorIsShort:
    ld MaxSpeed, #12 ; Set the max. speed to 2/3
    jr DoorSet ;
    DoorIsNorm:
    ld MaxSpeed, #20 ;
    DoorSet:
    pop LIM_TEST_LO ; Restore the limit tests
    pop LIM_TEST HI ;
    ld MOTOR_TIMER_HI,#HIGH(MOTORTIME)
    ld MOTOR_TIMER_LO,#LOW(MOTORTIME)
    MotorTimeSet:
    ei
    clr RADIO_CMD ; one shot
    clr RPM_ACOUNT ; clear the rpm active counter
    ld STACKREASON,REASON ; save the temp reason
    ld STACKFLAG,#0FFH ; set the flag
    TURN_ON_LIGHT:
    call SetVarLight ; Set the worklight to the proper value
    tm P0, *LIGHT_ON ; If the light is on skip clearing
    jr nz,lighton ;
    lightoff:
    clr MOTDEL ; clear the motor delay
    lighton:
    ret
    LearnModeMotor:
    ld MaxSpeed, #12 ; Default to slower max. speed
    ld MOTOR_TIMER_HI,#HIGH(LEARNTIME)
    ld MOTOR_TIMER_LO,#LOW(LEARNTIME)
    jr MotorTimeSet ; Set door to longer run for learn
    THIS IS THE MOTOR RPM INTERRUPT ROUTINE
    RPM:
    push rp ; save current pointer
    srp #RPM_GROUP ;point to these reg
    ld rpm_temp_of,T0_0FLOW ; Read the 2nd extension
    ld rpm_temp_hi,T0EXT ; read the timer extension
    ld rpm_temp_lo,T0 ; read the timer
    tm IRQ,#00010000B ; test for a pending interrupt
    jr z,RPMTIMEOK ; if not then time ok
    RPMTIMEERROR:
    tm rpm_temp_lo, #10000000B ; test for timer reload
    jr z,RPMTIMEOK ; if no reload time is ok
    decw rpm_temp_hiword ; if reloaded then dec the hi to resync
    RPMTIMEOK:
    cp RPM_FILTER, #128 ; Signal must have been high for 3 ms before
    jr ult, RejectTheRPM ; the pulse is considered legal
    tm P3, #00000010B ; If the line is sitting high,
    jr nz, RejectTheRPM ; then the falling edge was a noise pulse
    RPMIsGood:
    and imr,#11111011b ; turn off the interupt for up to 500uS
    ld divcounter, #03 ; Set to divide by 8 (destroys value in RPM_FILTER)
    DivideRPMLoop:
    rcf ; Reset the carry
    rrc rpm_temp_of ; Divide the number by 8 so that
    rrc rpm_temp hi ; it will always fit within 16 bits
    rrc rpm_temp_lo ;
    djnz divcounter, DivideRPMLoop ; Loop three times (Note: This clears RPM FILTER)
    ld rpm_period_lo, rpm_past_lo ;
    ld rpm_period_hi, rpm_past_hi ;
    sub rpm_period_lo, rpm_temp_lo ; find the period of the last pulse
    sbc rpm_period_hi, rpm_temp_hi ;
    ld rpm_past_lo, rpm_temp_lo ; Store the current time for the
    ld rpm_past_hi, rpm_temp_hi ; next edge capture
    cp rpm_period_hi,#12 ; test for a period of at least 6.144mS
    jr ult,SKIPC ; if the period is less then skip counting
    TULS:
    INCRPM:
    inc RPM_COUNT ; increase the rpm count
    inc BRPM_COUNT ; increase the rpm count
    SKIFC:
    inc RPM_ACOUNT ; increase the rpm count
    cp RampFlag, #RAMPUP ; If we're ramping the speed up,
    jr z, MaxTimeOut ; then set the timeout at max.
    cp STATE, #DN_DIRECTION ; If we're traveling down,
    jr z, DownTimeOut ; then set the timeout from the down force
    UpTimeOut:
    ld rpm_time_out,UP_FORCE_HI ; Set the RPM timeout to be equal to the up force setting
    rcf ; Divide by two to account
    rrc rpm_time_out ; for the different prescalers
    add rpm_time_out, #2 ; Round up and account for free-running prescale
    jr GotTimeOut
    MaxTimeOut:
    ld rpm_time_out, #125 ; Set the RPM timeout to be 500mns
    jr GotTimeOut ;
    DownTimeOut:
    ld rpm_time_out,DN_FORCE_HI ; Set the RPM timeout to be equal to the down force setting
    rcf ; Divide by two to account
    rrc rpm_time_out ; for the different prescalers
    add rpm_time_out, #2 ; Round up and account for free-running prescale
    GotTimeOut:
    ld BRPM_TIME_OUT, rpm_time_out ; Set the backup to the same value
    ei
    Position Counter
    Position is incremented when going down and decremented when
    going up. The zero position is taken to be the upper edge of the pass
    point signal (i.e. the falling edge in the up direction, the rising edge in
    the down direction)
    cp STATE, #UP_DIRECTION ; Test for the proper direction of the counter
    jr z, DecPos ;
    cp STATE, #STOP ;
    jr z, DecPos ;
    +T+L,12 cp STATE, #UP_POSITION ;
    jr z, DecPos ;
    IncPos:
    incw POSITION ;
    cp PPOINT_DEB, #2 ; Test for pass point being seen
    jr ult, NoDNPPoint ; If signal is low, none seen
    DnPPoint:
    or PassCounter, #10000000b +T+L,32 ; Mark pass point as currently high
    jr CtrDone ;
    NoDnPPoint:
    tm PassCounter, #10000000b ; Test for pass point seen before
    jr z, PastDnEdge ; If not, then we're past the edge
    AtDnEdge
    cp L_A_C, #074H ; Test for learning limits
    jr nz, NormalDownEdge ; if not, treat normally
    LearnDownEdge:
    di
    sub UP_LIMIT_LO, POSITION_LO ; Set the up position higher
    sbc UP_LIMIT_HI, POSTION_HI ;
    dec PassCounter ; Count pass point as being seen
    jr Lowest1 ; Clear the position counter
    NormalDownEdge:
    dec PassCounter ; Mark as one pass point closer to floor
    tm PassCounter, #01111111b ; Test for lowest pass point
    jr nz, NotLowest1 ; If not, don't zero the position counter
    Lowest1:
    di
    clr POSITION_HI ; Set the position counter back to zero
    ld POSITION_LO, #1 ;
    ei ;
    NotLowest1:
    cp STATUS, #PSSTATUS ; Test for in R5232 mode
    jr z, DontResetWall3 ; If so, don't blink the LED
    ld STATUS, #WALLOFF ; Blink the LED for pass point
    clr VACFLASH ; Set the turn-off timer
    DontResetWall3.
    PastDnEdge:
    NoUpPPoint:
    and PassCounter, #01111111b ; Clear the flag for pass point high
    jr CtrDone ;
    DecPos:
    decw POSITION ;
    cp PPOINT_DEB, #2 ; Test for pass point being seen
    jr ult, NoUpPPoint ; If signal is low, none seen
    UpPPoint:
    tm PassCounter, #10000000b +T+L,32 ; Test for pass point seen before
    jr nz, PastUpEdge ; If so, then we're past the edge
    AtUpEdge:
    tm PassCounter, #01111111b ; Test for lowest pass point
    jr nz, NotLowest2 ; If not, don't zero the position counter
    Lowest2:
    di
    clr POSITION_HI ; Set the position counter back to zero
    clr POSITION_LO ;
    ei
    NotLowest2:
    cp STATUS, #RSSTATUS ; Test for in R5232 mode
    jr z, DontResetWall2 ; If so, don't blink the LED
    ld STATUS, #WALLOFF ; Blink the LED for pass point
    clr VACFLASH ; Set the turn-off timer
    DontResetWall2:
    inc PassCounter ; Mark as one pass point higher above
    cp PassCounter, FirstRun ; Test for pass point above max. value
    jr ule, PastUpEdge ; If not, we're fine
    ld PassCounter, FirstRun ; Otherwise, correct the pass counter
    PastUpEdge:
    or PassCounter, #10000000b ; Set the flag for pass point high before
    CtrDone:
    RejectTheRPM:
    pop rp ; return the rp
    iret ; return
    THIS IS THE SWITCH TEST SUBROUTINE
    STATUS
    0 => COMMAND TEST
    1 => WORKLIGHT TEST
    2 => VACATION TEST
    3 => CHARGE
    4 => RSSTATUS -- RS232 mode, don't scan for switches
    5 => WALLOFF -- Turn off the wall control LED
    SWITCH DATA
    0 => OPEN
    1 => COMMAND CMD_SW
    2 => WORKLIGET LIGHT_SW
    4 => VACATION VAC_SW
    switches:
    ei
    4-22-97
    CP LIGHT_DEB,#0FFH ;is the light button being held?
    JR NZ,NotHeldDown ;if not debounced, skip long hold
    CP EnableWorkLight,#01100000B ;has the 10 sec. already passed?
    JR GE,HeldDon
    CP EnableWorkLight,#01010000B
    JR LT,HeldDown
    LD EnableWorkLight,#10010000B ;when debounce occurs, set register
    ;to initiate e2 write in mainloop
    JR HeldDown
    NotHeldDown:
    CLR EnableWorkLight
    HeldDown:
    and SW_DATA, #LIGHT_SW ; Clear all switches excect for worklrght
    cp STATUS, #WALLOFF ; Test for illegal status
    jp ugt, start ; if so reset
    jr z, NoWallCtrl ; Turn off wall control state
    cp STATUS, #RSSTATUS ; Check for in RS232 mode
    jr z, NOTFLASHED ; If so, skip the state machine
    cp STATUS,#3 ; test for illegal number
    jp z,charge ; if it is 3 then goto charge
    cp STATUS,#2 ; test for vacation
    jp z,VACATION_TEST ; if so then jump
    cp STATUS,#1 ; test for worklight
    jp z,WORKLIGHT_TEST ; if so then jump
    ; else it id command
    COMMAND_TEST:
    cp VACFLAC,#00H ; test for vacation mode
    jr z,COMMAND_TEST1 ; if not vacation skip flash
    inc VACFLASH ; increase the vacation flash timer
    cp VACFLASH,#10 ; test the vacation flash period
    jr ult,COMMMAND_TEST1 ; if lower period skip flash
    and p3,#˜CHARGE_SW ; turn off wall switch
    or p3,#DIS_SW ; enable discharoe
    cp VACFLASH,#60 ; test the time delay for max
    jr nz,NOTFLASHED ; if the flash is not done jump and ret
    clr VACFLASH ; restart the timer
    NOTFLASHED
    ret ; return
    NoWallCtrl:
    and P3, #˜CHARGE_SW ; Turn off the circuit
    or P3, #DIS_SW ;
    inc VACFLASH ; Update the off time
    cp VACFLASH, #81 ; If off tine hasn't expired,
    jr ult, KeepOff ; keep the LED off
    ld STATUS, #CHARGE ; Reset the wall control
    ld SWITCH_DELAY, #CMD_DEL_EX ; Reset the charce timer
    KeepOff:
    ret ;
    COMMAND_TEST1:
    tm p0,#SWTCHES1 ; command sw pressed?
    jr nz,CMDOPEN ; open command
    tm P0,#SWITCHES2 ; test the second command input
    jr nz,CMDOPEN
    CMDCLOSE1: ; closed command
    call DECVAC ; decrease vacation debounce
    call DECLIGHT ; decrease light debounce
    cp CMD_DEB,#0FFH ; test for the max number
    jr z,SKIPCMDINO ; if at the max skip inc
    di
    inc CMD_DEB ; increase the debouncer
    inc BCMD_DEB increase the debouncer
    SKIPCMDINC:
    cp CMD_DEB,#CMD_MAFE ;
    jr nz,CMDEXIT ; if not made then exit
    call CmdSet ; Set the command switch
    CMDEXIT:
    or p3,#CHARGE_SW ; turn on the charge system
    and p3,#˜DIS_SW ;
    ld SWITCH_DELAY,#CMD_DEL_EX ; set the delay time to 8mS
    ld STATUS,#CHARGE ; charge time
    CMDDELEXIT:
    ret ;
    CmdSet:
    cp L_A_C, #070H ; Test for in learn limits mode
    jr ult, RegCmdMake ; If not, treat as normal command
    jr ugt, LeaveLAC ; If learning, command button exits
    call SET_UP_NOBLINK ; Set the up direction state
    jr CMDMAXEDONE ;
    RegCmdMake:
    cp LEARNDB, #0FFH ; Test for learn button held
    jr z, GoIntoLAC ; If so, enter the learn mode
    NormalCmd:
    di
    ld LAST_CMD,#055H ; set the last command as command
    cmd: ld SW_DATA,#CMD_SW ; set the switch data as command
    cp AUXLEARNSW,#100 ; test the time
    jr ugt,SKIP_LEARN
    push RP
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP
    call SETLEARN ; set the learn mode
    dr SW_DATA ; clear the cmd
    pop RP
    or p0,#LIGHT_ON ; turn on the light
    call TURN_ON_LIGHT ; turn on the light
    CMDMAKEDONE:
    SKIP_LEARN:
    ld CMD_DEB,#0FFH ; set the debouncer to ff one shot
    ld BCMD_DEB,#0FFH ; set the debouncer to ff one shot
    ei
    ret
    LeaveLAC:
    clr L_A_C ; Exit the learn mode
    or ledport,#ledn ; turn off the LED for program mode
    call SET_STOP_STATE ;
    jr CMDMAKEDONE ;
    GoIntoLAC:
    ld L_A_C, #170H ; Start the learn limits mode
    clr FAULTCODE ; Clear any faults that exist
    clr CodeFlag ; Clear the reoular learn mode
    ld LEARNT, #0FFH ; Turn off the learn timer
    ld ERASET, #OFFH ; Turn off the erase timer
    jr CMDMAKEDONE ;
    CMDOPEN: ; command switch open
    and p3,#˜CHARGE_SW ; turn off charging sw
    or p3,#DIS_SW ; enable discharge
    ld DELAYC,#16 ; set the time delay
    DELLOOP:
    dec DELAYC
    jr nz,DELLOOP ; loop till delay is up
    tm p0,#SWITCHES1 ; command line still high
    jr nz,TESTWL ; if so return later
    call DECVAC ; if not open line dec all debouncers
    call DECLIGHT ;
    call DECCMD ;
    ld AUXLEARNSW,#0FfH ; turn off the aux learn switch
    jr CMDEXIT ; and exit
    TESTWL:
    ld STATUS,#WL_TEST ; set to test for a worklight
    ret ; return
    WORKLIGHT_TEST:
    tm p0,#SWITCHES ; command line still high
    jr nz,TESTVAC2 ; exit setting to test for vacation
    call DECVAC ; decrease the vacation debouncer
    call DECCMD ; and the command debouncer
    cp LIGHT_DEB,#0FFH ; test for the max
    jr z,SKIPLIGHTING ; if at the max skip inc
    inc LIGHT_DEB ; inc debouncer
    SKIPLIGHTING:
    cp LIGHT_DEB,#LIGHT_MAKE ; test for the light make
    jr nz,CMDEXIT ; if not then recharge delay
    call LightSet ; Set the light debouncer
    jr CMDEXIT ; then recharge
    LightSet:
    ld LIGHT_DEB,#0FFH ; set the debouncer to max
    ld SW_DATA,#LIGHT_SW ; set the data as worklight
    cp RRTO,#RDROPTIME ; test for code reception
    jr ugt,CMDEXT ; if not then skip the seting of flag
    clr AUXLEARNSW ; start the learn timer
    ret
    TESTVAC2:
    ld STATUS,#VAC_TEST ; set the next test as vacation
    ld switch_delay,#VAC_DEL ; set the delay
    LIGHTDELEXIT:
    ret ; return
    VACATION_TEST:
    djnz switch_delay,VACDELEXIT ;
    tm p0,#SWITCHES1 ; command line still high
    jr, EXIT_ERROR ; exit with a error setting open state
    call DECLIGHT ; decrease the light debouncer
    call DECCMD ; decrease the command debouncer
    cp VAC_DEB,#0FFH ; test for the max
    jr z,VACINCSKIP ; skip the incrementing
    VACINCSKIP:
    or VACFLAG,#00H ; test for vacation mode
    jr z,VACOUT ; if not vacation use out time
    VACIN:
    or VAC_DEB,#VAC_MAKE_IN ; test for the vacation make point
    jr nz,VACATION_EXIT ; exit of not made
    call VacSet ;
    jr VACATION_EXIT ;
    VACOUT:
    cp VAC_DEB,#VAC_MAKE_OUT ; test for the vacation make count
    jr nz,VACATION_EXIT ; exit if not made
    call VacSet ;
    jr VACATION_EXIT ; Forget vacatoon mode
    VacSet:
    ld VAC_DEB,#0FFH ; set vacation debouncer to max
    cp AUXLEARNSW,#100 ; test the time
    jr ugt,SKIP_LEARNV
    push RP
    srp #LEARNEE_GRP
    call SETLEARN ; set the learn mode
    pop RP
    cr p0, #LIGHT_ON ; Turn on the worklight
    call TURN_ON_LIGHT ;
    ret
    SKIP_LEARNT:
    ld VACCHANGE,#0AAH ; set the toggle data
    cp RRTO,#RDROPTIME ; test for code reception
    jr ugt,VACATION_EXIT ; if not then skip the seting of flag
    clr AUXLEARNSW ; start the learn timer
    VACATION_EXIT:
    ld SWITCH_DELAY,#VAC_DEL_EX ; set the delay
    ld STATUS,#CHARGE ; set the next test as charge
    VACDELEXIT:
    ret
    EXIT_ERROR:
    call DECCMD ; decrement the debouncers
    call DECVAC ;
    call DECLIGHT ;
    ld SWITCH_DELAY,#VAC_DEL_EX ; set the delay
    ld STATUS,#CHANGE ; set the next test as charge
    ret
    charge:
    or p3,#CHARGE_SW ;
    and p3,#˜DIS_SW ;
    dec SWITCH_DELAY ;
    jr nz,charge_ret ;
    ld STATUS,#CMD_TEST ;
    charge_ret:
    ret
    DECOMD:
    cp CMD_DEB,#00H ; test for the min number
    jr z,SKIPCMDDEC ; if at the min skip dec
    di
    dec CMD_DEB ; decrement debouncer
    dec BCMD_DEB decrement debouncer
    ei
    SKIPCMDDEC:
    cp CMD_DEB,#CMD_BREAK ; if not at break then exit
    jr nz,DECMDEXIT ; if not break then exit
    call CmdRel ;
    DECCMDEXIT:
    ret ; and exit
    CmdRel:
    cp L_A_C, #070h ; Test for in learn mode
    jr nz, NormCmdBreak ; If not, treat normally
    call SET_STOP_START ; Stop the door
    NormCmdBreak:
    di
    clr CMD_DEB ; reset the debouncer
    clr BCMD_DEB ; reset the debouncer
    ei
    ret
    DECLIGHT:
    cp LIGHT_DEB,#00H ; test for the min number
    jr z,SKIPLIGHTDEC ; if at the min skip dec
    dec LIGHT_DEB ; decrement debouncer
    SKIPLIGHTDEC:
    cp LIGHT_DEB,#LIGHT_BREAK ; if not at break then exit
    jr nz,DECLIGHTEXIT ; if not break then exit
    clr LIGHT_DEB ; reset the debouncer
    DECLIGHTEXIT:
    ret ; and exit
    DECVAC:
    cp VAC_DEB,#00H ; test for one min number
    jr z,SKIPVACDEC ; if at the min skip dec
    dec VAC_DEB ; decrement debouncer
    SKIPVACDEC:
    cp VACFLAG,#00H ; test for vacation mode
    jr z,DECVACOUT ; if not vacation use out time
    DECVACIN:
    cp VAC_DEB,#VAC_BREAK_IN ; test for the vacation break point
    jr nz,DECVACEXIT ; exit if not
    jr CLEARVACDEB ;
    DECVACOUT:
    cp VAC_DEB,#VAC_BREAK_OUT ; test for the vacation break point
    jr nz,DECVACEXIT ; exit if not
    CLEARVACDEB:
    clr VAC_DEb ; reset the debouncer
    DECVACEXIT:
    ret ; and exit
    FORCE TABLE
    force_table:
    f_0: .byte 000H, 06BH, 06CH
    .byte 000H, 06BH, 06CH
    .byte 000H, 06DH, 073H
    .byte 000H, 06FH, 08EH
    .byte 000H, 071H, 0BEH
    .byte 000H, 074H, 004H
    .byte 000H, 076H, 062H
    .byte 000H, 078H, 0DAH
    .byte 000H, 07BH, 06CH
    .byte 000H, 07EH, 01BH
    .byte 000H, 080H, 0E8H
    .byte 000H, 083H, 0D6H
    .byte 000H, 086H, 09BH
    .byte 000H, 089H, 07FH
    .byte 000H, 08CH, 084H
    .byte 000H, 08FH, 0ABH
    .byte 000H, 092H, 0F7H
    .byte 000H, 096H, 06BH
    .byte 000H, 09AH, 009H
    .byte 000H, 09DH, 0D5H
    .byte 000H, 0A1H, 0D2H
    .byte 000H, 0A6H, 004H
    .byte 000H, 0AAH, 076H
    .byte 000H, 0AFH, 027H
    .byte 000H, 0B4H, 01CH
    .byte 000H, 0B9H, 05BH
    .byte 000H, 0BEH, 0EBH
    .byte 000H, 0C4H, 0D3H
    .byte 000H, 0CBH, 01BH
    .byte 000H, 0D1H, 0CDH
    .byte 000H, 0D8H, 0F4H
    .byte 000H, 0E0H, 09CH
    .byte 001H, 005H, 05DH
    .byte 001H, 00EH, 035H
    .byte 001H, 017H, 0ABH
    .byte 001H, 021H, 0D2H
    .byte 001H, 320H, 0BBH
    .byte 001H, 138H, 060H
    .byte 001H, 045H, 03AH
    .byte 001H, 053H, 008H
    .byte 001H, 062H, 010H
    .byte 001H, 072H, 07DH
    .byte 001H, 084H, 083H
    .byte 001H, 098H, 061H
    .byte 001H, 0AEH, 064H
    .byte 001H, 0C6H, 0E8H
    .byte 001H, 0E2H, 062H
    .byte 002H, 001H, 065H
    .byte 002H, 024H, 0AAH
    .byte 002H, 04DH, 024H
    .byte 002H, 07CH, 010H
    .byte 002H, 0B3H, 01BH
    .byte 002H, 0F4H, 094H
    .byte 003H, 043H, 0C1H
    .byte 003H, 0A5H, 071H
    .byte 004H, 020H, 0FCH
    .byte 004H, 0C2H, 038H
    .byte 005H, 09DH, 080H
    .byte 013H, 012H, 0D0H
    f_63: .byte 013H, 012H, 0D0H
    SIM_TABLE:
    .WORD 00000H ; Numbers set to zero (proprietary table)
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    .WORD 00000H
    SPEED_TABLE_50:
    .BYTE 40
    .BYTE 34
    .BYTE 30
    .BYTE 26
    .BYTE 27
    .BYTE 25
    .BYTE 24
    .BYTE 23
    .BYTE 21
    .BYTE 20
    .BYTE 17
    .BYTE 16
    .BYTE 15
    .BYTE 13
    .BYTE 12
    .BYTE 10
    .BYTE 8
    .BYTE 6
    SPEED_TABLE_60:
    .BYTE 33
    .BYTE 29
    .BYTE 27
    .BYTE 25
    .BYTE 23
    .BYTE 22
    .BYTE 21
    .BYTE 20
    .BYTE 19
    .BYTE 18
    .BYTE 17
    .BYTE 16
    .BYTE 15
    .BYTE 13
    .BYTE 12
    .BYTE 11
    .BYTE 10
    .BYTE 8
    .BYTE 7
    .BYTE 5
    .BYTE 0
    ; Fill 49 bytes of unused memory
    FILL
    10
    FILL 10
    FILL 10
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    FILL
    .end

Claims (30)

What is claimed is:
1. A movable barrier operator operable from alternating current comprising:
an electric motor;
a transmission connected to the motor to be driven thereby and to the movable barrier to be moved;
an electric circuit for detecting AC line voltage and frequency of the alternating current;
a worklight;
a first set of operational values for operating the worklight, when a first AC line frequency is detected;
a second set of operational values for operating the worklight, when a second AC line frequency is detected; and
a controller, responsive to the detected AC line frequency, for activating the corresponding operational set of values for operating the worklight.
2. A movable barrier operator operable from alternating current according to
claim 1
wherein the first AC line frequency comprises 50 Hz and the first set of values comprises a first shut-off time and the second AC line frequency comprises 60 Hz and the second set of values comprises a second shut-off time.
3. A movable barrier operator operable from alternating current according to
claim 2
further comprising a routine for controlling motor speed and wherein the first set of values further comprises a scaling factor for scaling the motor speed.
4. A movable barrier operator operable from alternating current according to
claim 3
wherein the scaling factor is stored in a look-up table stored in a memory.
5. A movable barrier operator operable from alternating current according to
claim 2
wherein the first shut-off time comprises about two and one half minutes and wherein the second shut-off time comprises about four and one half minutes.
6. A movable barrier operator having linearly variable output speed, comprising:
an electric motor having a motor output shaft;
a transmission connected to the motor output shaft to be driven thereby and to the movable barrier to be moved;
a circuit for providing a pulse signal comprising a series of pulses;
a motor control circuit responsive to the pulse signal, for starting the motor and for determining the direction of rotation of the motor output shaft; and
a controller for controlling the length of the pulses in the pulse signal in accordance with a predetermined set of values, wherein in accordance with the predetermined set of values, a speed of the motor is linearly varied from zero to a maximum speed and from the maximum speed to zero.
7. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 6
wherein the predetermined set of values causes incrementing of the motor speed from zero to a maximum motor speed in a plurality of steps, causing the motor to operate at the maximum speed for a predetermined period of time, then decrementing the motor speed from the maximum speed to zero in a plurality of steps.
8. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 7
wherein each step comprises a value corresponding to about five percent of a maximum speed of the motor.
9. A moveable barrier operator according to
claim 6
wherein the motor control circuit comprises:
a first electromechanical switch for causing the motor output shaft to rotate in a first direction;
a second electromechanical switch for causing the motor output shaft to rotate in a second direction; and
a solid state device responsive to the pulse signal, for providing current to the motor to cause it to rotate.
10. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 9
wherein the first and second electromechanical switches comprise relays and the solid state device comprises an FET.
11. A movable barrier operator which automatically detects barrier size, comprising:
an electric motor having a maximum output speed;
a transmission connected to the motor to be driven thereby and to the movable barrier to be moved;
a position detector for sensing the position of the barrier with respect to a frame of reference; and
a controller, responsive to the position detector, for calculating a time of travel between a first barrier travel limit and a second barrier travel limit and responsive to the calculated time of barrier travel, for automatically adjusting a barrier travel speed.
12. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 11
wherein the barrier comprises a segmented panel door and wherein the controller adjusts the barrier travel speed such that a maximum barrier travel speed is based on one hundred percent of the motor's maximum output speed.
13. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 11
wherein the barrier comprises a single panel door and wherein the controller adjusts the barrier travel speed such that a maximum barrier travel speed is based on percentage less than one hundred percent of the motor's maximum output speed.
14. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 12
further comprising a routine for varying the motor speed in accordance with a predetermined set of values, wherein in accordance with the predetermined set of values, a speed of the motor is linearly varied from zero to a maximum speed and from the maximum speed to zero.
15. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 13
further comprising a routine for varying the motor speed in accordance with a predetermined set of values, wherein in accordance with the predetermined set of values, a speed of the motor speed is linearly varied from zero to the motor's scaled output speed and from the motor's scaled output speed to zero.
16. A movable barrier operator having full closure, comprising:
an electric motor;
a transmission connected to the motor to be driven thereby and connectable to a movable barrier to be moved;
a position detector for sensing a position of the barrier;
a learn routine for determining a minimum reversal position of the barrier relative to a close limit, wherein the minimum reversal position of the barrier position is located a short distance above the close limit;
a controller responsive to the position detector and to a close command to move the barrier to the close limit, for controlling the motor, wherein when the position detector senses the position of the barrier at the minimum reversal position, the controller causes the motor to continue to operate for a predetermined period of time prior to shutting off the motor, effective for driving the barrier to the close limit.
17. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 16
wherein the electric motor comprises a DC motor.
18. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 16
wherein the electric motor comprises an AC motor.
19. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 16
wherein the minimum reversal position is located approximately one inch above the close limit.
20. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 16
wherein the close limit corresponds to a location of a floor.
21. A movable barrier operator having automatic force settings, comprising:
an electric motor;
a transmission connected to the motor to be driven thereby and connectable to the movable barrier to be moved;
a circuit for providing a pulse signal comprising a series of pulses;
a motor control circuit, responsive to the pulse signal, for starting the motor and for determining the direction of rotation of the motor output shaft;
a first force command device for setting a first force limit for use when the motor is rotating in a first direction;
a second force command device for setting a second force limit for use when the motor is rotating in a second direction; and
a controller responsive to the first force limit and to the second force limit for varying the length of the pulses in the pulse signal, effective for varying the motor speed during travel in the first direction and in the second direction.
22. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 21
wherein the barrier comprises a door having a pedestrian door and the operator further comprises a sensor for detecting the position of the pedestrian door, wherein the controller, responsive to the pedestrian door sensor detecting the pedestrian door is not closed, disables movement of the barrier.
23. A moveable barrier operator according to
claim 21
wherein the motor control circuit comprises a first electromechanical switch for causing the motor output shaft to rotate in the first direction, a second electromechanical switch for causing the motor output shaft to rotate in the second direction and a solid state device responsive to the pulse signal, for providing current to the motor to cause it to rotate.
24. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 21
wherein the first force command device comprises a force potentiometer for generating a first analog force signal and the second force command device comprises a force potentiometer for generating a second analog force signal.
25. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 24
further comprising a first A/D converter for converting the first analog signal to a first digital signal and a second A/D converter for converting the second analog signal to a second digital signal.
26. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 25
further comprising a look-up table comprising a plurality of motor speeds stored in a memory in the controller, wherein responsive to the first digital signal and the second digital signal selects a corresponding motor speed stored in the look-up table.
27. A movable barrier operator having a flasher module, comprising:
an electric motor;
a transmission connected to the motor to be driven thereby and connectable to a movable barrier to be moved;
a flasher module light;
a flasher routine for enabling and disabling the flasher module light in a predetermined pattern;
a controller, responsive to a command to move the barrier, for controlling the motor and for automatically detecting the presence of the flasher module light, wherein responsive only to the presence of the flasher module light, the controller executes the flasher routine and delays starting the motor for a predetermined delay time.
28. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 27
, wherein the flasher routine continues until the controller causes the motor to stop.
29. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 27
wherein the predetermined delay time comprises about two seconds.
30. A movable barrier operator according to
claim 27
, wherein the flasher routine continues only during the predetermined delay period.
US09/785,619 1998-09-28 2001-02-16 Movable barrier operator Expired - Fee Related US6417637B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US09/785,619 US6417637B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-02-16 Movable barrier operator

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US09/161,840 US6172475B1 (en) 1998-09-28 1998-09-28 Movable barrier operator
US09/536,833 US6239569B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/785,619 US6417637B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-02-16 Movable barrier operator

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/536,833 Continuation US6239569B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20010024095A1 true US20010024095A1 (en) 2001-09-27
US6417637B2 US6417637B2 (en) 2002-07-09

Family

ID=22582981

Family Applications (16)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/161,840 Expired - Fee Related US6172475B1 (en) 1998-09-28 1998-09-28 Movable barrier operator
US09/535,221 Expired - Lifetime US6278249B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/536,055 Expired - Lifetime US6246196B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/536,832 Expired - Fee Related US6229276B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/536,428 Expired - Lifetime US6456022B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/536,833 Expired - Fee Related US6239569B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/693,141 Expired - Lifetime US6720747B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-10-20 Moveable barrier operator
US09/785,619 Expired - Fee Related US6417637B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-02-16 Movable barrier operator
US09/804,411 Expired - Lifetime US6710560B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-03-12 Movable barrier operator
US09/804,407 Expired - Fee Related US6683431B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-03-12 Movable barrier operator
US09/840,601 Expired - Fee Related US6744231B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-04-23 Movable barrier operator
US10/424,970 Expired - Fee Related US6806672B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2003-04-28 Movable barrier operator
US10/609,788 Abandoned US20040195986A1 (en) 1998-09-28 2003-06-30 Movable barrier operator
US10/630,160 Abandoned US20040056621A1 (en) 1998-09-28 2003-07-30 Movable barrier operator
US10/703,188 Abandoned US20050140323A1 (en) 1998-09-28 2003-11-06 Movable barrier operator
US11/245,807 Expired - Lifetime US7164246B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2005-10-07 Movable barrier operator

Family Applications Before (7)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/161,840 Expired - Fee Related US6172475B1 (en) 1998-09-28 1998-09-28 Movable barrier operator
US09/535,221 Expired - Lifetime US6278249B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/536,055 Expired - Lifetime US6246196B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/536,832 Expired - Fee Related US6229276B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/536,428 Expired - Lifetime US6456022B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/536,833 Expired - Fee Related US6239569B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-03-27 Movable barrier operator
US09/693,141 Expired - Lifetime US6720747B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2000-10-20 Moveable barrier operator

Family Applications After (8)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/804,411 Expired - Lifetime US6710560B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-03-12 Movable barrier operator
US09/804,407 Expired - Fee Related US6683431B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-03-12 Movable barrier operator
US09/840,601 Expired - Fee Related US6744231B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-04-23 Movable barrier operator
US10/424,970 Expired - Fee Related US6806672B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2003-04-28 Movable barrier operator
US10/609,788 Abandoned US20040195986A1 (en) 1998-09-28 2003-06-30 Movable barrier operator
US10/630,160 Abandoned US20040056621A1 (en) 1998-09-28 2003-07-30 Movable barrier operator
US10/703,188 Abandoned US20050140323A1 (en) 1998-09-28 2003-11-06 Movable barrier operator
US11/245,807 Expired - Lifetime US7164246B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2005-10-07 Movable barrier operator

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (16) US6172475B1 (en)
AU (6) AU769967B2 (en)
CA (6) CA2461178C (en)
DE (1) DE19946414A1 (en)
FR (1) FR2788387A1 (en)
GB (6) GB2384578B (en)
NZ (5) NZ507860A (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030192254A1 (en) * 2002-04-10 2003-10-16 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Balance control system for a movable barrier operator
US20060138987A1 (en) * 2004-12-06 2006-06-29 Overhead Door Corporation Barrier operator controller with user adjustable force setpoint
US20090272035A1 (en) * 1992-04-22 2009-11-05 Nartron Corporation Collision monitoring system
US10198619B1 (en) * 2010-10-05 2019-02-05 Waymo Llc System and method for evaluating the perception system of an autonomous vehicle
US20190080786A1 (en) * 2017-09-12 2019-03-14 Fujifilm Corporation Clinical laboratory test apparatus and system
US10421453B1 (en) 2014-10-02 2019-09-24 Waymo Llc Predicting trajectories of objects based on contextual information
US11562610B2 (en) 2017-08-01 2023-01-24 The Chamberlain Group Llc System and method for facilitating access to a secured area
US11574512B2 (en) 2017-08-01 2023-02-07 The Chamberlain Group Llc System for facilitating access to a secured area

Families Citing this family (117)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6172475B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-01-09 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Movable barrier operator
US6737968B1 (en) * 1999-04-07 2004-05-18 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Movable barrier operator having passive infrared detector
EP1276951B1 (en) * 2000-04-13 2007-01-24 Wayne-Dalton Corp. Overhead door locking operator
US6614200B2 (en) * 2001-04-11 2003-09-02 Meritor Light Vehicle Technology, Llc AC motors for driving vehicle closures
US6696806B2 (en) * 2001-04-25 2004-02-24 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Method and apparatus for facilitating control of a movable barrier operator
US6847178B2 (en) * 2001-09-27 2005-01-25 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Method and apparatus for dynamic braking of a barrier operator
US6667591B2 (en) 2001-10-18 2003-12-23 Wayne-Dalton Corp. Method and device for increasing the allowed motor power of a motorized garage door operator
US7405530B2 (en) * 2001-11-30 2008-07-29 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Method and apparatus for automatically establishing control values for a control device
US7127847B2 (en) 2002-02-19 2006-10-31 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Barrier movement control safety method and apparatus
US6777902B2 (en) * 2002-03-20 2004-08-17 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Asymmetric drive motor for a barrier operator or the like
US20030189415A1 (en) * 2002-04-08 2003-10-09 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Method and apparatus for pulse variable-controlled movable obstacle detection
US6741052B2 (en) 2002-04-11 2004-05-25 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Post-automatically determined user-modifiable activity performance limit apparatus and method
US6897630B2 (en) 2002-08-16 2005-05-24 Wayne-Dalton Corp. System and related methods for sensing forces on a movable barrier
US7755223B2 (en) * 2002-08-23 2010-07-13 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Movable barrier operator with energy management control and corresponding method
US7375612B2 (en) * 2002-10-07 2008-05-20 Wayne-Dalton Corp. Systems and related methods for learning a radio control transmitter to an operator
US7207142B2 (en) 2002-12-04 2007-04-24 Wayne-Dalton Corp. System and related methods for signaling the position of a movable barrier and securing its position
US6819071B2 (en) * 2003-01-15 2004-11-16 Kenneth B. Graham Automatic garage door closing system
US7023162B2 (en) * 2003-02-18 2006-04-04 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Automatic gate operator
US7176647B2 (en) * 2003-03-11 2007-02-13 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Light-emitting device having a phosphor particle layer with specific thickness
US7012508B1 (en) 2003-04-10 2006-03-14 Briggs & Stratton Corporation System and method for controlling a door
US7196611B2 (en) * 2003-04-17 2007-03-27 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Barrier movement operator human interface method and apparatus
US7042183B2 (en) * 2003-07-18 2006-05-09 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Barrier movement operator speed control
US7181174B2 (en) * 2003-08-21 2007-02-20 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Wireless transmit-only apparatus and method
US7268681B2 (en) * 2003-09-16 2007-09-11 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. System and method for actuating a remote control access system
EP1517433A1 (en) * 2003-09-18 2005-03-23 Alcatel Speed controlling method for an electric motor, control circuit and electric motor
US7154377B2 (en) * 2003-12-30 2006-12-26 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Movable barrier operator compressed information method and apparatus
US7205735B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2007-04-17 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Barrier movement operator having obstruction detection
US7173516B2 (en) * 2004-02-06 2007-02-06 Wayne-Dalton Corp. Operating system for a motorized barrier operator
US7183732B2 (en) * 2004-04-22 2007-02-27 Wayne-Dalton Corp. Motorized barrier operator system for controlling a stopped, partially open barrier and related methods
US7109677B1 (en) * 2004-05-07 2006-09-19 Wayne-Dalton Corp. Motorized barrier operator system for controlling a barrier after an obstruction detection and related methods
US8494861B2 (en) * 2004-05-11 2013-07-23 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Movable barrier control system component with audible speech output apparatus and method
US7302775B2 (en) * 2004-05-12 2007-12-04 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Power bus and structure for a barrier movement operator
US7271560B2 (en) * 2004-10-28 2007-09-18 A.O. Smith Corporation Assembly for moving a barrier and method of controlling the same
US7482923B2 (en) * 2005-01-27 2009-01-27 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Alarm system interaction with a movable barrier operator method and apparatus
US8040217B2 (en) 2005-02-15 2011-10-18 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Barrier movement operator communications
US7208897B2 (en) * 2005-03-04 2007-04-24 Linear Corporation Motion control system for barrier drive
US7525265B2 (en) * 2005-04-20 2009-04-28 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Drive motor reversal for a barrier operator or the like
US7382063B2 (en) * 2005-05-24 2008-06-03 Wayne-Dalton Corp. Uninterruptible power source for a barrier operator and related methods
DK1727274T3 (en) * 2005-05-27 2012-01-09 Siemens Ag Method and device for activating an actuator element
US7034487B1 (en) * 2005-06-30 2006-04-25 Overhead Door Corporation Barrier operator controller with user settable control limits when entrapment device present
US7576502B2 (en) * 2005-07-28 2009-08-18 Arvinmeritor Light Vehicle Systems - France Method and apparatus for closing a powered closure of a vehicle
DE202005013682U1 (en) * 2005-08-30 2007-05-24 Marantec Antriebs- Und Steuerungstechnik Gmbh & Co. Kg garage Door
CA2561626C (en) * 2005-09-30 2013-11-26 9141-0720 Quebec Inc. Motorized closure operating device with electronic control system
US7521881B2 (en) * 2005-09-30 2009-04-21 Wayne-Dalton Corp. Constant speed barrier operator
US7112937B1 (en) 2005-10-31 2006-09-26 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, Lp. Device and method for driving a motor
US20080061948A1 (en) * 2006-08-18 2008-03-13 Daniel Perez System and method for communicating with gate operators via a power line
US8558885B2 (en) * 2006-09-29 2013-10-15 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Barrier operator system and method with obstruction detection
US20080094186A1 (en) * 2006-10-04 2008-04-24 Viking Access Systems, Llc Apparatus and method for monitoring and controlling gate operators via power line communication
US20080083167A1 (en) * 2006-10-04 2008-04-10 Robert John Olmsted Chain guide insert for a garage door
US20080101095A1 (en) * 2006-10-17 2008-05-01 Gustavo Thunder Estravit Thunder mount
US20080106370A1 (en) * 2006-11-02 2008-05-08 Viking Access Systems, Llc System and method for speech-recognition facilitated communication to monitor and control access to premises
US7615945B2 (en) * 2006-12-01 2009-11-10 Richmond Thomas R Barrier operator with panic control override mode and related method
US20080217949A1 (en) * 2007-03-09 2008-09-11 Kobrehel Michael D Powered Tailgate Ramp
US20090085719A1 (en) * 2007-09-28 2009-04-02 Daniel Perez System and method for monitoring and controlling a movable barrier operator utilizing satellite communication capabilities
US7816875B2 (en) * 2008-01-24 2010-10-19 Viking Access Systems, Llc High torque gearless actuation at low speeds for swing gate, roll-up gate, slide gate, and vehicular barrier operators
US7816879B2 (en) * 2008-02-19 2010-10-19 Viking Access Systems, Llc High torque movable barrier actuation at low speeds utilizing a hub motor
US20090211160A1 (en) * 2008-02-26 2009-08-27 Ali Tehranchi Access device with a photovoltaic housing utilized to generate power
US8359790B2 (en) * 2008-03-03 2013-01-29 Jeong-Hun Shin Multi doorlock using braking resistance of DC motor
US20090315751A1 (en) * 2008-06-20 2009-12-24 Ford Global Technologies, Inc. Adaptive vehicle system for controlling a radio frequency (rf) receiver/control unit(s)
US20100058669A1 (en) * 2008-09-09 2010-03-11 Cole Ricky L Garage door power management system
US8279040B2 (en) * 2008-10-07 2012-10-02 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. System and method for control of multiple barrier operators
US20100096092A1 (en) * 2008-10-22 2010-04-22 Shanghai Guardian Corp. Garage door assembly
US8587404B2 (en) * 2009-03-24 2013-11-19 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Movable barrier operator and transmitter with imminent barrier moving notification
US20100289616A1 (en) * 2009-05-18 2010-11-18 Ali Tehranchi Movable barrier system adapted to utilize biometric technology to identify and authorize access to premises
US10208529B2 (en) 2009-06-23 2019-02-19 Higher Power Hydraulic Doors, Llc Tilt-up door
US8495836B2 (en) * 2009-08-27 2013-07-30 Sargent Manufacturing Company Door hardware drive mechanism with sensor
US8327586B2 (en) 2010-02-02 2012-12-11 Hi-Fold Door Corporation Hydraulic cylinder control
US8669697B2 (en) * 2010-03-11 2014-03-11 Phoseon Technology, Inc. Cooling large arrays with high heat flux densities
US8707627B2 (en) 2010-09-20 2014-04-29 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Method of removing slack from a flexible driven member
US9734645B2 (en) * 2010-10-15 2017-08-15 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Method and apparatus pertaining to message-based functionality
CN102022055B (en) * 2010-11-11 2013-06-12 广东电网公司电力科学研究院 Method, device and system for positioning electrically operated gate
DE102011107867B4 (en) * 2010-11-29 2015-04-16 Novoferm-Tormatic Gmbh Method for operating a building closure
GB2478505B (en) * 2011-01-17 2012-02-15 Ido Schwartzman Method and system for secure firmware updates in programmable devices
US8994496B2 (en) 2011-04-01 2015-03-31 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Encrypted communications for a moveable barrier environment
US8665065B2 (en) 2011-04-06 2014-03-04 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Barrier operator with power management features
US10060173B2 (en) 2011-05-24 2018-08-28 Overhead Door Corporation Multiple speed profiles in barrier operator systems
DE102011107866A1 (en) * 2011-07-18 2013-01-24 Novoferm Tormatic Gmbh Method for operating a building closure
US9698997B2 (en) 2011-12-13 2017-07-04 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Apparatus and method pertaining to the communication of information regarding appliances that utilize differing communications protocol
US9607512B2 (en) * 2012-02-13 2017-03-28 Cinch Systems, Inc. Logical controller for vehicle barrier
US8866583B2 (en) 2012-06-12 2014-10-21 Jeffrey Ordaz Garage door system and method
WO2014024059A2 (en) * 2012-08-09 2014-02-13 Danfoss Power Electronics A/S Automated motor adaptation
CA2789040C (en) * 2012-08-23 2014-01-07 Philip Y.W. Tsui Universal remote control system
NZ707134A (en) 2012-10-03 2018-02-23 Automatic Tech Au Pty Ltd Apparatus and method for driving a moveable closure
US9122254B2 (en) 2012-11-08 2015-09-01 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Barrier operator feature enhancement
US20140159522A1 (en) * 2012-12-06 2014-06-12 Twin-Star International, Inc. DC Motor Assembly and Method
US9367978B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-06-14 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Control device access method and apparatus
US9449449B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-09-20 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Access control operator diagnostic control
US10229548B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-03-12 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Remote guest access to a secured premises
US9396598B2 (en) 2014-10-28 2016-07-19 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Remote guest access to a secured premises
US9172320B2 (en) 2013-05-14 2015-10-27 Allegro Microsystems, Llc Electronic circuit and method for synchronizing electric motor drive signals between a start-up mode of operation and a normal mode of operation
US9281769B2 (en) * 2013-05-14 2016-03-08 Allegro Microsystems, Llc Electronic circuit and method for adjusting start-up characteristics of drive signals applied to an electric motor
WO2015015342A1 (en) 2013-08-02 2015-02-05 Danfoss Power Electronics A/S Automated motor adaptation
US9970228B2 (en) * 2013-10-04 2018-05-15 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Movable barrier safety sensor override
US9890575B2 (en) 2013-12-09 2018-02-13 Viking Access Systems, Llc Movable barrier operator with removable power supply module
HUE037434T2 (en) * 2013-12-23 2018-08-28 Gabrijel Rejc Gmbh & Co Kg Drive and control system for raising gates
EP3007014B1 (en) * 2014-10-06 2024-07-03 EM Microelectronic-Marin SA Low power configuration circuit for a horological motor driver
DE202016008364U1 (en) * 2015-05-13 2017-08-28 Novoferm Tormatic Gmbh Garage door drive device
US10557532B2 (en) * 2015-05-22 2020-02-11 Hubert Junior Hill Movable latch housing apparatus
DE102016102703B3 (en) * 2016-01-22 2016-11-10 Hörmann KG Antriebstechnik GATE OPERATING DEVICE, OVERHEADING OPERATOR AND OPERATING METHOD THEREFOR
CA2961090A1 (en) 2016-04-11 2017-10-11 Tti (Macao Commercial Offshore) Limited Modular garage door opener
USD871472S1 (en) 2016-04-11 2019-12-31 Tti (Macao Commercial Offshore) Limited Garage door opener
USD841444S1 (en) 2016-04-11 2019-02-26 Tti (Macao Commercial Offshore) Limited Accessory mount
CA2961221A1 (en) 2016-04-11 2017-10-11 Tti (Macao Commercial Offshore) Limited Modular garage door opener
PL3263819T3 (en) 2016-06-28 2019-06-28 Gabrijel Rejc Vertically movable door with a door leaf
HUE041690T2 (en) 2016-06-28 2019-05-28 Gabrijel Rejc Motorised and vertically movable lifting door
DE102016225079A1 (en) 2016-12-15 2018-06-21 Gabrijel Rejc Gmbh & Co. Kg Gate with a fall protection
US11393331B2 (en) 2017-05-12 2022-07-19 Gmi Holdings, Inc. Remote monitoring and control of movable barrier status
US10540889B2 (en) 2017-05-12 2020-01-21 Gmi Holdings, Inc. Remote monitoring and control of movable barrier status
US10822858B2 (en) 2017-07-24 2020-11-03 Gmi Holdings, Inc. Power supply for movable barrier opener with brushless DC motor
AU2019217958B2 (en) 2018-02-12 2024-01-04 The Chamberlain Group Llc Movable barrier operator having updatable security protocol
US10968676B2 (en) 2018-04-24 2021-04-06 Gmi Holdings, Inc. Movable barrier apparatus and methods for responding to barrier travel obstructions and abnormalities
US10837217B2 (en) 2019-01-24 2020-11-17 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Movable barrier imminent motion notification system and method
US10846956B2 (en) 2019-01-24 2020-11-24 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Movable barrier imminent motion notification system and method
US11220856B2 (en) 2019-04-03 2022-01-11 The Chamberlain Group Llc Movable barrier operator enhancement device and method
US11746584B2 (en) 2019-04-24 2023-09-05 Gmi Holdings, Inc. Remote monitoring and control of moveable barrier in jackshaft door operator system
US11600126B2 (en) 2020-05-08 2023-03-07 The Chamberlain Group Llc Movable barrier operator system and methods of installation and use
DE102022122154A1 (en) 2022-09-01 2024-03-07 Novoferm Tormatic Gmbh Goal

Family Cites Families (92)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2268133A (en) 1938-06-17 1941-12-30 Robert W Carlson Electric timing device
US3147001A (en) 1957-07-01 1964-09-01 Frederick A Purdy Door-operators
US3262105A (en) 1961-01-03 1966-07-19 Hughes Aircraft Co Condition responsive electrical system
GB1322713A (en) 1969-10-17 1973-07-11 Nat Res Dev Tachogenerators
US3783556A (en) * 1972-07-13 1974-01-08 Telectron Inc Door control system providing automatic delayed door reversal
US3906348A (en) * 1973-08-20 1975-09-16 Chamberlain Mfg Corp Digital radio control
US4037201A (en) * 1975-11-24 1977-07-19 Chamberlain Manufacturing Corporation Digital radio control
US4141010A (en) * 1976-04-07 1979-02-20 Multi-Elmac Company Digital encoder for door operator
US4064404A (en) 1976-04-19 1977-12-20 Chamberlain Manufacturing Corporation Accessory for a garage door opener
US4119896A (en) * 1976-05-28 1978-10-10 The Alliance Manufacturing Company, Inc. Sequencing control circuit
US4064487A (en) * 1976-11-17 1977-12-20 The Alliance Manufacturing Company, Inc. Receiver and decoder
US4167833A (en) * 1977-07-26 1979-09-18 Metro-Dynamics, Inc. Overhead garage door opener
US4234833A (en) * 1978-01-19 1980-11-18 A. E. Moore Company, Inc. Door operator system using counter circuit for determining limit positions
US4263536A (en) * 1978-08-07 1981-04-21 Clopay Corporation Control circuit for a motor-driven door operator
US4369399A (en) * 1978-08-07 1983-01-18 Clopay Corporation Control circuit for a motor-driven door operator
JPS55111575A (en) * 1979-02-21 1980-08-28 Hitachi Ltd Device for opening closing door
US4328540A (en) 1979-02-23 1982-05-04 Hitachi, Ltd. Door operation control apparatus
US4357564A (en) * 1979-04-09 1982-11-02 The Alliance Manufacturing Company Closure operator control
AT359548B (en) * 1979-04-18 1980-11-10 Ife Gmbh CONTROL OF THE DRIVE FOR A DOOR
JPS55142883A (en) * 1979-04-19 1980-11-07 Hitachi Ltd Garage door controller
US4348625A (en) * 1979-12-21 1982-09-07 Marmon Company Variable speed motor system
JPS5715786A (en) * 1980-07-02 1982-01-27 Hitachi Ltd Door controller
JPS57100277A (en) * 1980-12-12 1982-06-22 Hitachi Ltd Apparatus for controlling door opening and closing
JPS57116883A (en) * 1980-12-12 1982-07-21 Hitachi Ltd Door operation controller
JPS57151783A (en) * 1981-03-10 1982-09-18 Hitachi Ltd Remote control apparatus of door opening and closing
JPS58110778A (en) * 1981-12-23 1983-07-01 ワイケイケイ株式会社 Control apparatus of automatic opening and closing door
DE3200511A1 (en) 1982-01-11 1983-07-21 Hörmann KG Antriebs- und Steuerungstechnik, 4834 Harsewinkel METHOD FOR MONITORING A POWERED MOVABLE GATE OR THE LIKE
US4467249A (en) * 1982-07-09 1984-08-21 Swearingen Jr Judson S Remote automobile window control
US4565029A (en) 1983-11-28 1986-01-21 The Stanley Works Traffic responsive control system for automatic swinging door
US4491774A (en) * 1983-12-30 1985-01-01 Motorola, Inc. Control system for a radio-controlled door operator
US4597428A (en) * 1984-02-01 1986-07-01 Chamberlain Manufacturing Corporation Two drum cable drive garage door opener
US4511832A (en) * 1984-03-19 1985-04-16 Westinghouse Electric Corp. Stepper motor door control apparatus and method
US4628636A (en) * 1984-05-18 1986-12-16 Holmes-Hally Industries, Inc. Garage door operator mechanism
DE3419477C1 (en) 1984-05-24 1985-11-28 Hörmann KG Antriebs- und Steuerungstechnik, 4834 Harsewinkel Gearbox for converting a rotary into a translatory movement
US4750118A (en) * 1985-10-29 1988-06-07 Chamberlain Manufacturing Corporation Coding system for multiple transmitters and a single receiver for a garage door opener
US4638433A (en) 1984-05-30 1987-01-20 Chamberlain Manufacturing Corporation Microprocessor controlled garage door operator
GB2166132B (en) * 1984-10-27 1988-02-10 Emhart Ind Parison transferring mechanism
NZ214354A (en) 1984-11-30 1989-04-26 Kierkegaard Soren Sliding door controller:arrested door motion causes cessation or reversal of door movement according to door position
JPS61117598U (en) * 1984-12-29 1986-07-24
US4614902A (en) * 1985-02-26 1986-09-30 Jessup Frank L Closure retention apparatus for automatic doors
US4567411A (en) * 1985-03-22 1986-01-28 Otis Elevator Company High frequency pulse width modulation
JPS62156489A (en) 1985-12-28 1987-07-11 ワイケイケイ株式会社 Method for opening and closing control of car door at time of abnormality
US4637848A (en) 1986-03-14 1987-01-20 Apache Powder Company High density gel explosive
US4808995A (en) * 1986-05-02 1989-02-28 Stanley Automatic Openers Accessory-expandable, radio-controlled, door operator with multiple security levels
JPH0652026B2 (en) * 1986-10-27 1994-07-06 吉田工業株式会社 Automatic door acceleration / deceleration distance control device
JPH0747905B2 (en) 1986-11-14 1995-05-24 本田技研工業株式会社 Anti-theft device for vehicle
DE3870924D1 (en) 1987-02-12 1992-06-17 Marantec Antrieb Steuerung CONTROLLED DRIVE FOR A DOOR LEAF OR THE LIKE.
US4888531A (en) 1987-02-12 1989-12-19 Hormann Kg Antriebs- Und Steuerungstechnik Variable drive mechanism for the panel of a gate or similar structure
US4727679A (en) * 1987-04-02 1988-03-01 The Stanley Works Swing-door operator system
US4929877A (en) * 1987-10-22 1990-05-29 John Clark Automatic garage door operator with remote load control
JPH01242388A (en) * 1988-03-25 1989-09-27 Hitachi Ltd Elevator door control device
US5076012A (en) 1988-04-25 1991-12-31 Doorking, Inc. Apparatus and method for opening and closing a gate
US4916860A (en) 1988-04-25 1990-04-17 Doorking, Inc. Apparatus and method for opening and closing a gate
US5136809A (en) 1988-04-25 1992-08-11 Doorkino, Inc. Apparatus and method for opening and closing a gate
DE3907499A1 (en) 1989-03-08 1990-09-13 Hoermann Kg Antrieb Steuertec CONTROL DEVICE FOR DOOR BLADE DRIVE
US4922168A (en) 1989-05-01 1990-05-01 Genie Manufacturing, Inc. Universal door safety system
US4952080A (en) * 1989-05-12 1990-08-28 The Stanley Works Automatic assist for swing-door operator
ATE118848T1 (en) 1990-01-22 1995-03-15 Exxon Chemical Patents Inc REDUCING FOAM IN PAPER PRODUCTION.
US5081586A (en) * 1990-02-20 1992-01-14 Eaton Corporation Multiplexing of accessories in a vehicle
US5189412A (en) 1990-05-11 1993-02-23 Hunter Fan Company Remote control for a ceiling fan
NZ233965A (en) 1990-06-06 1997-02-24 Advanced Door Systems Ltd Power operated drive unit for door with gearbox
DE9006391U1 (en) 1990-06-06 1991-10-10 Marantec Antriebs-und Steuerungstechnik GmbH & Co, Produktions-oHG, 4834 Marienfeld Gearbox for converting a rotary into a translatory movement
US5576701A (en) 1990-07-16 1996-11-19 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Remote actuating apparatus comprising keypad controlled transmitter
US5137500A (en) * 1991-05-22 1992-08-11 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Sprocket conversion kit for garage door opener
US5191268A (en) * 1991-08-26 1993-03-02 Stanley Home Automation Continuously monitored supplemental obstruction detector for garage door operator
DE59206034D1 (en) 1991-11-25 1996-05-23 Marantec Antrieb Steuerung Circuit arrangement for monitoring a moving object
US5235494A (en) 1992-01-16 1993-08-10 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Electrical controller having pivotally mounted circuit board support
US5357183A (en) * 1992-02-07 1994-10-18 Lin Chii C Automatic control and safety device for garage door opener
US5233185A (en) 1992-02-28 1993-08-03 Gmi Holdings, Inc. Light beam detector for door openers using fiber optics
JPH05328642A (en) * 1992-05-21 1993-12-10 Mabuchi Motor Co Ltd Small motor and its manufacture
US5226257A (en) 1992-06-17 1993-07-13 Moss Richard D Garage door security apparatus
JPH0617553A (en) 1992-06-30 1994-01-25 Takahiro Tsubota Containing device of vehicles
US5278480A (en) * 1992-10-26 1994-01-11 Stanley Home Automation Door opener control with adaptive limits and method therefor
WO1994017504A1 (en) * 1993-01-28 1994-08-04 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Extended range wired remote control circuit
US5282337A (en) 1993-02-22 1994-02-01 Stanley Home Automation Garage door operator with pedestrian light control
US5903226A (en) * 1993-03-15 1999-05-11 Prince Corporation Trainable RF system for remotely controlling household appliances
US5596840A (en) * 1993-09-15 1997-01-28 Rmt Associates, Inc. Garage door opener with remote safety sensors
US5625980A (en) 1993-09-15 1997-05-06 Rmt Associates Garage door opener with remote safety sensors
US5412297A (en) 1994-06-27 1995-05-02 Stanley Home Automation Monitored radio frequency door edge sensor
JP3319230B2 (en) 1994-08-05 2002-08-26 株式会社デンソー Remote control device
US5699055A (en) * 1995-05-19 1997-12-16 Prince Corporation Trainable transceiver and method for learning an activation signal that remotely actuates a device
US5656900A (en) * 1995-06-05 1997-08-12 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Retro-reflective infrared safety sensor for garage door operators
US5661804A (en) 1995-06-27 1997-08-26 Prince Corporation Trainable transceiver capable of learning variable codes
US5589747A (en) 1995-07-06 1996-12-31 Utke; Michael C. Light and motion governed garage door opener lamp
DE19537304C2 (en) 1995-10-06 1999-08-19 Marantec Antrieb Steuerung Drive system for closing elements
DE19540620A1 (en) 1995-10-31 1997-05-07 Marantec Antrieb Steuerung Monitoring the movement of a drivable, single or multi-part door or gate leaf
DE19602633A1 (en) 1996-01-25 1997-07-31 Marantec Antrieb Steuerung Electronic monitoring of the driving force of a drive
US5969637A (en) * 1996-04-24 1999-10-19 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Garage door opener with light control
DE29706251U1 (en) 1997-04-08 1997-08-21 MARANTEC Antriebs- und Steuerungstechnik GmbH & Co. Produktions-KG, 33428 Marienfeld Remote control
US5929580A (en) * 1997-08-05 1999-07-27 Wayne-Dalton Corp. System and related methods for detecting an obstruction in the path of a garage door controlled by an open-loop operator
US6091217A (en) * 1998-01-29 2000-07-18 Elite Access Systems, Inc. Safety gate operator which prevents entrapment, and method of its operation
US6172475B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2001-01-09 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Movable barrier operator

Cited By (26)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090272035A1 (en) * 1992-04-22 2009-11-05 Nartron Corporation Collision monitoring system
US8217612B2 (en) * 1992-04-22 2012-07-10 Uusi, Llc Collision monitoring system
US9030144B2 (en) 1992-04-22 2015-05-12 Uusi, Llc Monitoring system
US20030192254A1 (en) * 2002-04-10 2003-10-16 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Balance control system for a movable barrier operator
US20050081452A1 (en) * 2002-04-10 2005-04-21 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Balance control system for a movable barrier operator
US7017302B2 (en) * 2002-04-10 2006-03-28 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Balance control system for a movable barrier operator
US7260917B2 (en) 2002-04-10 2007-08-28 The Chamberlain Group, Inc. Balance control system for a movable barrier operator
US20060138987A1 (en) * 2004-12-06 2006-06-29 Overhead Door Corporation Barrier operator controller with user adjustable force setpoint
US7298107B2 (en) * 2004-12-06 2007-11-20 Overhead Door Corporation Barrier operator controller with user adjustable force setpoint
US11287817B1 (en) 2010-10-05 2022-03-29 Waymo Llc System and method of providing recommendations to users of vehicles
US10198619B1 (en) * 2010-10-05 2019-02-05 Waymo Llc System and method for evaluating the perception system of an autonomous vehicle
US10372129B1 (en) 2010-10-05 2019-08-06 Waymo Llc System and method of providing recommendations to users of vehicles
US11747809B1 (en) 2010-10-05 2023-09-05 Waymo Llc System and method for evaluating the perception system of an autonomous vehicle
US11720101B1 (en) 2010-10-05 2023-08-08 Waymo Llc Systems and methods for vehicles with limited destination ability
US10572717B1 (en) 2010-10-05 2020-02-25 Waymo Llc System and method for evaluating the perception system of an autonomous vehicle
US11106893B1 (en) 2010-10-05 2021-08-31 Waymo Llc System and method for evaluating the perception system of an autonomous vehicle
US11010998B1 (en) 2010-10-05 2021-05-18 Waymo Llc Systems and methods for vehicles with limited destination ability
US10899345B1 (en) 2014-10-02 2021-01-26 Waymo Llc Predicting trajectories of objects based on contextual information
US10421453B1 (en) 2014-10-02 2019-09-24 Waymo Llc Predicting trajectories of objects based on contextual information
US12090997B1 (en) 2014-10-02 2024-09-17 Waymo Llc Predicting trajectories of objects based on contextual information
US11562610B2 (en) 2017-08-01 2023-01-24 The Chamberlain Group Llc System and method for facilitating access to a secured area
US11574512B2 (en) 2017-08-01 2023-02-07 The Chamberlain Group Llc System for facilitating access to a secured area
US11941929B2 (en) 2017-08-01 2024-03-26 The Chamberlain Group Llc System for facilitating access to a secured area
US12106623B2 (en) 2017-08-01 2024-10-01 The Chamberlain Group Llc System and method for facilitating access to a secured area
US20190080786A1 (en) * 2017-09-12 2019-03-14 Fujifilm Corporation Clinical laboratory test apparatus and system
US10497468B2 (en) * 2017-09-12 2019-12-03 Fujifilm Corporation Clinical laboratory test apparatus and system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2461178A1 (en) 2000-03-28
GB2384579A8 (en) 2003-12-17
GB2381085A (en) 2003-04-23
US20050140323A1 (en) 2005-06-30
GB2341948A (en) 2000-03-29
CA2461177C (en) 2008-03-18
US20010024094A1 (en) 2001-09-27
US6744231B2 (en) 2004-06-01
GB2384579B (en) 2003-09-17
GB2384579A (en) 2003-07-30
US6417637B2 (en) 2002-07-09
GB0308454D0 (en) 2003-05-21
AU769967B2 (en) 2004-02-12
AU2004200081A1 (en) 2004-02-05
US6683431B2 (en) 2004-01-27
GB9922843D0 (en) 1999-11-24
US6229276B1 (en) 2001-05-08
US6710560B2 (en) 2004-03-23
US20020033683A1 (en) 2002-03-21
AU2004200080A1 (en) 2004-02-05
NZ507861A (en) 2002-08-28
CA2461180A1 (en) 2000-03-28
CA2461177A1 (en) 2000-03-28
CA2283533A1 (en) 2000-03-28
AU5016899A (en) 2000-03-30
CA2461180C (en) 2007-12-04
US6239569B1 (en) 2001-05-29
GB2341948B (en) 2003-03-26
GB0308451D0 (en) 2003-05-21
CA2461173C (en) 2007-02-13
US6456022B1 (en) 2002-09-24
US6278249B1 (en) 2001-08-21
FR2788387A1 (en) 2000-07-13
US6172475B1 (en) 2001-01-09
AU2004200084A1 (en) 2004-02-05
NZ507862A (en) 2002-08-28
US6720747B1 (en) 2004-04-13
GB2384578A (en) 2003-07-30
US20040056621A1 (en) 2004-03-25
CA2461179C (en) 2007-06-05
GB0308453D0 (en) 2003-05-21
GB2384577A (en) 2003-07-30
GB2381085B (en) 2003-07-30
GB2384872B (en) 2003-09-17
NZ338053A (en) 2001-03-30
GB2384577B (en) 2003-09-17
AU2004200083A1 (en) 2004-02-05
GB0300492D0 (en) 2003-02-12
US20030205980A1 (en) 2003-11-06
CA2461179A1 (en) 2000-03-28
CA2461173A1 (en) 2000-03-28
GB2341948A8 (en) 2000-04-12
US6806672B2 (en) 2004-10-19
US20010038272A1 (en) 2001-11-08
US20040195986A1 (en) 2004-10-07
US6246196B1 (en) 2001-06-12
GB2384578B (en) 2003-09-17
CA2461178C (en) 2007-02-06
NZ507859A (en) 2002-08-28
US20060186844A1 (en) 2006-08-24
GB2384872A (en) 2003-08-06
GB0308449D0 (en) 2003-05-21
AU2004200082A1 (en) 2004-02-05
CA2283533C (en) 2005-03-29
US7164246B2 (en) 2007-01-16
NZ507860A (en) 2002-10-25
DE19946414A1 (en) 2000-05-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20010024095A1 (en) Movable barrier operator
US6111374A (en) Movable barrier operator having force and position learning capability

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 4

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 8

REMI Maintenance fee reminder mailed
LAPS Lapse for failure to pay maintenance fees
STCH Information on status: patent discontinuation

Free format text: PATENT EXPIRED DUE TO NONPAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEES UNDER 37 CFR 1.362

FP Lapsed due to failure to pay maintenance fee

Effective date: 20140709